8th Maths EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

www.tntextbooks.
in
GOVERNMENT OF TAMIL NADU
STANDARD EIGHT
MATHEMATICS
A publication under Free Textbook Programme of Government of Tamil Nadu
Department of School Education
Untouchability is Inhuman and a Crime
00_8th_Front Pages_FM.indd 1 20/11/2022 12:43:18

www.tntextbooks.in
Government of Tamil Nadu
First Edition - 2019

Revised Edition - 2020, 2022, 2023
(Published under New Syllabus)
NOT FOR SALE
Content Creation
The wise
possess all
State Council of Educational

Research and Training
© SCERT 2019
Printing & Publishing
Tamil Nadu Textbook and Educational

Services Corporation
www.textbooksonline.tn.nic.in
ii

www.tntextbooks.in
Mathematics is a unique symbolic language in which the whole world

works and acts accordingly. This text book is an attempt to make
learning of Mathematics easy for the students community.
Mathematics is not about numbers, equations, computations

or algorithms; it is about understanding
— William Paul Thurston
Try this/these
Activity A few questions which
provide scope for
To enjoy learning reinforcement of the
Mathematics by doing content learnt.
ematic
ath
M
Do you know? A li v e Think

To know additional To think deep
information and explore
related to the topic to yourself!
create interest.
To understand that Mathematics can be
experienced everywhere in
nature and real life.
Miscellaneous Note
and Challenging To know
problems important facts
To give space for learning more and concepts
and to face higher challenges
in Mathematics and to face
Competitive
Examinations.
ICT Corner
Go, Search the content
and Learn more!
The main goal of Mathematics in School Education is to mathematise

the child’s thought process. It will be useful to know how to
mathematise than to know a lot of Mathematics.
iii

www.tntextbooks.in
CONTENTS
UNIT TITLE PAGE NO. MONTH

1 NUMBERS 1-49
1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 Rational Numbers 2
1.3 Basic Arithmetic Operations on Rational Numbers 14
1.4 Word Problems on the basic operations 16
1.5 Properties of Rational Numbers 20 June
1.6 Introduction to Square Numbers 25
1.7 Square Root 27
1.8 Cubes and Cube Roots 36
1.9 Exponents and Powers 39
2 MEASUREMENTS 50-73
2.1 Introduction 50
2.2 Parts of a Circle 52
July
2.3 Combined Shapes 59
2.4 Three Dimensional (3-D) Shapes 66
3 ALGEBRA 74-120
3.1 Introduction 76
3.2 Multiplication of Algebraic Expressions 77
August
3.3 Division of Algebraic Expressions 82
3.4 Avoid some Common Errors 84
3.5 Identities 86
3.6 Cubic Identities 88
October
3.7 Factorisation 92
3.8 Linear Equation in One Variable 97
3.9 Graph 107 September
3.10 Linear Graph 115 January
4 LIFE MATHEMATICS 121-154
4.1 Introduction 121
4.2 Applications of Percentage in Word Problems 122 September
4.3 Profit, Loss, Discount, Overhead Expenses and GST 126
4.4 Compound Interest 132
4.5 Compound Variation 140
November
4.6 Time and Work 147
iv
8th_Maths_English Medium_Front Matter.indd 4 03-12-2022 15:15:50

www.tntextbooks.in
5 GEOMETRY 155-210
5.2 Congruent and Similar Shapes 156
August
5.3 The Pythagorean Theorem 167
5.4 Converse of Pythagoras Theorem 167
5.5 Point of Concurrency 170
5.6 Medians of a Triangle 170
5.7 Altitude of a Triangle 173 December
5.8 Perpendicular Bisectors of a Triangle 174
5.9 Angle Bisectors of a Triangle 175
5.10 Construction of Quadrilaterals 180
July
5.11 Construction of Trapeziums 187
5.12 Construction of Special Quadrilaterals 192
5.13 Construction of a Parallelogram 196 November
5.14 Construction of a Rhombus 201
5.15 Construction of a Rectangle 205
February
5.16 Construction of a Square 207
6 STATISTICS 211-231
6.2 Frequency Distribution Table 212
January
Graphical Representation of the Frequency
6.3 217
Distribution for Ungrouped Data
Graphical Representation of the Frequency
6.4 221 February
Distribution for Grouped Data
7 INFORMATION PROCESSING 232-271
7.2 Principles of Counting 234 August
7.3 SET - Game 239
7.4 Map Colouring 243
7.5 Fibonacci Numbers 247 November
7.6 Highest Common Factor 251
7.7 Cryptology 254
7.8 Shopping Comparison 262 February
7.9 Packing 267
ANSWERS 273-280
MATHEMATICAL TERMS 281
E-Book Assessment

www.tntextbooks.in
STANDARD EIGHT
MATHEMATICS
vi

www.tntextbooks.in
Rational
Numbers
Integers 0.75
Natural –3
1 NUMBERS
Numbers 3.2125
349 –24
12
5 –1.7
0
–10 7.66...
2.1515...
Learning Objectives

To understand the necessity for extending fractions to rational
numbers, to represent rational numbers on the number line and
to know that between any two given rational numbers, there lies
many rational numbers.

To learn and perform the four basic arithmetic operations and solve
word problems on rational numbers and simplify expressions with
atmost three brackets.

To understand the properties of rational numbers.
To compute the square, the square root, the cube and the cube root of numbers.
To make a rough estimate of the square roots and the cube roots of numbers.
o express numbers in exponential form and understand the laws of exponents with
T
integral powers.
To identify and express the numbers in scientific notation.
1.1 Introduction
Let us recall the different types of numbers which we have already learnt in our earlier
classes. When we want to count, it is natural to start with numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, … Isn’t it?
These are all called as Counting numbers or Natural numbers and their collection is
denoted by . The use of three dots at the end of the list is a notation to show that the list keeps
going forever.
The natural numbers can be visualized as a ray marked with these numbers:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig 1.1
Consider the situation that yesterday my purse had money, say `8, but today the purse
may be empty. How many rupees are there in the purse now? How to denote this emptiness?
Here comes the concept of zero which evolved to symbolize the idea of emptiness. The
concept of zero, though quite natural now, was not normal to early humans. Only after
hundreds of years people started thinking of it as an actual number. The difficulty was solved
when the Indian Mathematicians provided the symbol for zero. The natural numbers system
Numbers 1
01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 1 20/11/2022 12:46:34

www.tntextbooks.in
with this additional number zero became Whole numbers. The whole numbers can be
visualized now as follows:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fig 1.2
The system of whole numbers is denoted by .
Even zero was not sufficient to solve all problems. Think what happens when 4 is taken
away from 6?
Draw a number line up to, say 9. Mark 6 by a dot on it.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fig 1.3
We know that, to subtract 4, we need to go 4 steps to the left side from 6. We will land
on 2 and so the answer is 2. But what will happen if we want to subtract 6 from 4? This
situation is where the humans needed (and created) negative numbers.
-8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig 1.4
But, how can a number be negative? Simple! Just think of them as numbers less than zero.
Including the negative integers with the whole numbers, we get the list of numbers called the
Integers. The integers consist of zero, the natural numbers and the negatives of the natural
numbers and it consists a list of numbers that stretch in either direction without end. The
entire collection of integers is denoted by .
MATHEMATICS ALIVE - NUMBERS IN REAL LIFE
If an orange is peeled off and 8 carpels Finding the square root of numbers in
are found, then one carpel represents the the form spiral using the Pythagoras
1
rational number . Theorem from Geometry
8
1.2 Rational Numbers

Even after coining integers, one could not relax! 10¸5 is no doubt fine, giving the answer 2
but is 8¸5 comfortable? Numbers between numbers are needed. 8¸5 seen as 1.6, is a number
between 1 and 2. But, where does (–3)¸4 lie? Between 0 and –1. Similarly, where do you find
2 8th Standard Mathematics

www.tntextbooks.in
-12
on the number line? Between –2 and –3. Thus, a ratio made by dividing an integer by
5
another integer is called a rational number. (Remember, we should not divide by zero!)
a
Formally speaking, a rational number is a number of the fractional (ratio) form ,
b
where a and b are integers and b ≠ 0. The collection of all rational numbers is denoted by .
Non-negative rational numbers may be thought of as fractions. They can also be expressed as
decimals and percents.
Since operations on rational numbers demand a basic knowledge of operations on
fractions, let us recall through an exercise some of the basic ideas related to fractions.
Recap Exercise
125
1. The simplest form of is _________.
200
8
2. Which of the following is not an equivalent fraction of ?
12
2 16 32 24
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 24 60 36
4 8 3 5 7
3. Which is bigger: or ? 4. Add the fractions: + +
5 9 5 8 10
1  1 1 3 4
5. Simplify: − −  6. Multiply: 2 and 1 .
8  6 4  5 7
7 35  70 28  7
7. Divide: by . 8. Fill in the boxes: = = = =
36 81 66  44 121 
7 1
9. In a city of the population are women and are children. Find the fraction of the
20 4
population of men.
1 1
10. Represent by a diagram.
2 4
Try these
1. Is the number –7 a rational number? Why?
2. Write any 6 rational numbers between 0 and 1.
Note
The word ‘ratio’ in Math refers to the comparison of the sizes of two different
quantities of any kind. For example, if there is one teacher for every 20 students in a
class, then the ratio of teachers to students is 1:20. Ratios are often written as fractions
1
and so 1:20 = . For this reason, numbers in the fractions form are called rational
20
numbers.
Numbers 3

www.tntextbooks.in
1.2.1 Rational numbers on a number line

Locating the rational numbers on a number line is an important skill. For example,
−3 −3
to represent the number on the number line, being negative would be marked to
4 4
the left of 0 and it is between 0 and –1. We know that the integers, 1 and –1 are equidistant
from 0 and so are the numbers 2 and –2, 3 and –3 from 0. This concept remains the same
3
for rational numbers too. Now, as we mark to the right of zero, at 3 parts out of 4 between
−3 4
0 and 1, the same way, we will mark to the left of zero, at 3 parts out of 4 between 0 and
4
–1 as shown below.
-3 −3 3
2 4 4
–2 –1 0 1 2
Fig. 1.5
-3 3 1
Similarly, it is easy to find
between –1 and –2 since 1 .
2 2 2
Now, on the following number line what rational numbers do the letters A and B
represent?
A B
–6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4
Fig. 1.6
You will now be able to say easily the rational numbers marked by A and B on the
number line as shown above. Isn’t it? Here, A represents the rational number
4  −32  3  18 
−4   and B represents the rational number 3   .
7 7  5 5
1.2.2 Decimal representation of a rational number
A rational number can be nicely represented in decimal form rather than in the usual
a
fractional form. Given a rational number in the form (b ≠ 0), just divide the numerator
b
a by the denominator b and we can see that it can be expressed as a terminating or non-
terminating, recurring decimal.
Activity
Use a string as a number line and fix it on the wall, for the
length of the class room. Just mark the integers spaciously and
ask the students to pick the rational number cards from a box
and fix it roughly at the right place on the number line string.
This can be played between teams and the team which fixes more
number of cards correctly (by marking) will be the winner.

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.1
Write the decimal forms of the following rational numbers:
1 3 4
i) ii) 1 iii) -5 iv) 3 v) 1
4 20 5 3
Solution:
1 25 3 23 115 4 −29 −58
(i)= = 0.25 (ii) 1 = = = 1.15 (iii) −5 = = = −5. 8
4 100 20 20 100 5 5 10
3 30
(iv) 3 = = = 3.0 (v) 1 = 0.3333... (by actual division and it is recurring and non-terminating)
1 10 3
Note
� The above examples show how a rational number may be given in decimal
form. The reverse process of converting the decimal form of a rational number to the
fractional form may be seen in the higher classes.
� There are decimal numbers which are non-terminating and non-recurring such as
𝜋 = 3.141592653589793238462643…..
2 = 1.41421356237309504880168……. etc.
They are not rational numbers and one can study more about them in the higher classes.
Try these
Write the decimal forms of the following rational numbers:

4 486 1 1 3
1. 2. 6 3. 4. 5. 3 6. −2
5 25 1000 9 4 5
1.2.3 Positive and Negative rational numbers

Rational numbers may be classified as positive and negative rational numbers.
If both the numerator and the denominator of the fraction representing a rational
number are of the same sign, then the rational number is positive.
3 -11
For example, numbers like , etc., are positive rational numbers.
4 -6
If either the numerator or the denominator of the fraction representing a rational
number is negative, then the rational number is negative.
-3 11
For example, numbers like , etc., are negative rational numbers.
4 -6
Note
0 is a rational number which is neither positive nor negative.
�
−11 11 11
� Note that = =−
6 −6 6
Numbers 5

www.tntextbooks.in
1.2.4 Equivalent rational numbers

We know how to write equivalent fractions when a fraction is given. Since a rational
number can be represented by a fraction, we can think of equivalent rational numbers,
duly obtained through equivalent fractions.
Suppose a rational number is in fractional form. Multiply its numerator and denominator
by the same non-zero integer to obtain a rational number which is equivalent to it.
For example,
2 -6 -2 -2 ´ 3 -6 Try these
- is equivalent to since = =
3 9 3 3´3 9
2 10 2 2´5 10 7 ? 49 -21
- is also equivalent to since = = 1. = = =
3 -15 -3 -3 ´ 5 -15 3 9 ? ?
2 -6 10 -2 ? 6 -8
Thus, - = = . 2. = = =
3 9 -15 5 10 ? ?
1.2.5 Rational numbers in Standard form
4 -3 1 -4 -50
Observe the following rational numbers: , , , , . Here, we see that
5 7 6 13 51
i) the denominators of these rational numbers are all positive integers
ii) 1 is the only common factor between the numerator and the denominator of each
of them and
iii) the negative sign occurs only in the numerator.
Such rational numbers are said to be in standard form.
A rational number is said to be in standard form, if its denominator is a positive
integer and both the numerator and denominator have no common factor other than 1.
If a rational number is not in the standard form, then it can be simplified to arrive at
the standard form.
The collection of rational numbers is denoted by the letter

Interest Rates
2020
Bank
because it is formed by considering all quotients, except General

Category
those involving division by 0. Decimal numbers can be put in
Senior
quotient form and hence they are also rational numbers. Citizens
Example 1.2
48 −18
Reduce to the standard form: (i) (ii)
−84 −42
Solution:
(i) Method 1:
48 48 2 24 2 12 3 4
(dividing by –2,2 and 3 successively)
84 84 2 42 2 21 3 7

www.tntextbooks.in
Method 2:
The HCF of 48 and 84 is 12 (Find it!). Thus, we can get its standard form by
dividing it by –12.
48 48 12 4

84 84 (12) 7
(ii) Method 1:
−18 −18 ÷ ( −2) 9 ÷ 3 3
= = = (dividing by –2 and 3 successively)
−42 −42 ÷ ( −2) 21 ÷ 3 7
Method 2:
The HCF of 18 and 42 is 6 (Find it!). Thus, we can get its standard form by
dividing it by 6.
−18 −18 × ( −1) 18 18 ÷ 6 3
= = = =
−42 −42 × ( −1) 42 42 ÷ 6 7
Try these
1. Which of the following pairs represents equivalent rational numbers?
−6 18 −4 1 −12 60
(i) , (ii) , (iii) ,
4 −12 −20 −5 −17 85
2. Find the standard form of:
36 −56 27
(i) (ii) (iii)
−96 −72 18
3. Mark the following rational numbers on a number line.
−2 −8 5
(i) (ii) (iii)
3 −5 −4
1.2.6 Comparison of rational numbers

It is useful to remember the following points:
Every positive number is greater than zero.
Every negative number is smaller than zero.
Every positive number is greater than every negative number.
Every number on the right of a number on a number line is greater than that number.
When two integers or fractions are given, we know how to compare them and say
which is greater or smaller. Now, in the same way, we can compare a pair of rational numbers.
Type 1 : Comparing two rational numbers with opposite signs
Example 1.3
5 -10
Compare and .
17 19
Numbers 7

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
Since every positive number is greater than every negative number,
5 -10
we conclude that > .
17 19
Type 2 : Comparing two rational numbers represented by two fractions with same
denominators
Example 1.4
1 4
Compare and .
3 3
Solution:
Since the denominators are the same, just compare the numerators.
1 4
Since 1 < 4, we conclude that < .
3 3
Type 3 : Comparing two rational numbers represented by two fractions with different
denominators
Example 1.5
3 5
Compare and .
4 6
Solution:
The LCM of the denominators is 12 (Find it!). Consider for each rational number an
equivalent rational number with the LCM 12 as denominator.
3 9 5 10
We get = and = , which become like fractions now.
4 12 6 12
9 10 3 5
Here, < . Hence, we conclude that < .
12 12 4 6
Type 4 : Comparing two rational numbers that are not in standard form
Example 1.6
9 -2
Compare and .
-4 3
Solution:
9
The number is not in standard form. First put it in the standard form.
-4
9 9 -1 -9
= ´ (to get a positive denominator ) =
-4 -4 -1 4
-9 -2
Now, we shall compare the fractions and . We find that these two fractions are unlike
4 3
fractions. To make them as like fractions, we make use of their LCM, which is 12.
-9 -27 -2 -8
We can now compare their equivalent fractions = and = (How?). We find that
4 12 3 12
the denominators are the same and so just comparing the numerators –27 and –8 are enough.

www.tntextbooks.in
Visualizing these numbers on the number line, we see that

–28 –27 –26 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –10 –9 –8 –7
Fig. 1.7
-8 -27
–8 is to the right of –27 and hence (–8) > (–27). This leads to the result that > and
12 12
-2 9
consequently we conclude that > .
3 -4
Example 1.7
Write the following rational numbers in ascending and descending order.
−3 7 −15 14 −8
, , , ,
5 −10 20 −30 15
Solution:
First make the denominators to be positive and write the numbers in standard form
− 3 − 7 − 15 − 14 − 8
as , , , , . Here, the LCM of 5,10,15,20 and 30 is 60 (Find it!). Change the
5 10 20 30 15
given rational numbers in equivalent form with common denominator 60.
−3 -7 −15 −14 −8
5 10 20 30 15
3 12 7 6 42 15 3 45 = 14 2 28 8 4 32
= = = =
5 12 10 6 60 20 3 60 30 2 60 15 4 60
−36 7 6 42 15 3 45 14 2 28 8 4 32
= = = = =
60 10 6 60 20 3 60 30 2 60 15 4 60
Comparing the numerators alone, that is, −36, −42, −45, −28 and –32 we see that
−45 < −42 < −36 < −32 < −28
45 42 36 32 28 15 7 3 8 14
Hence, and so, .
60 60 60 60 60 20 10 5 15 30
−15 7 −3 −8 14
So, the ascending order is , , , and .
20 −10 5 15 −30
14 −8 −3 7 −15
Also, its reverse order gives the descending order as , , , and .
−30 15 5 −10 20
1.2.7 Rational numbers between any two given rational numbers
Consider the integers 4 and 10. We can locate five integers namely 5,6,7,8 and 9
(shown in dark dots) between them. Isn’t it?
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 1.8
How many integers can you find between 3 and –2? List them.
Are there any integers between –5 and –4? No, is the answer.
?
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1
Fig. 1.9
Numbers 9

www.tntextbooks.in
This shows that the choice of integers between two given integers is limited. They are
finite in number or may be nothing between them. Let us think what will happen, if we
consider rational numbers instead of integers? We will see that we can have many rational
numbers between any two rational numbers. There are at least two methods to find more
rational numbers between any two rational numbers.
Method of Averages:
We know that that the average of any two numbers always lies at the middle of them.
2+8
For example, the average of 2 and 8 is = 5 and this 5 lies at the middle of 2 and 8 as
shown in the following number line. 2
average
?
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
{
{
Fig. 1.10
We use this idea to find more rational numbers between any two rational numbers.
Example 1.8
Find a rational number between 1 and 5 .
3 9
Solution:
1 5 1 1 5 1 1 3 5
The average of and =  +  =  × +  (Why?)
3  9  2  3 9  2  3 3 9
1 3 5 1 8 4
=  +  = × =
2  9 9 2 9 9
1 average
=
0 3 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Fig. 1.11
4 1 5
Note that is one rational number we have found in between and and we
9 3 9
1 5
can find many such numbers in between and . This
3 9 Think
shows that between any two rational numbers there lie Are there any
an unlimited number of rational numbers! Mathematically, rational numbers
we say that there lie an infinite number of rational numbers −7 6
between and ?
between any two rational numbers. 11 −11
Method of Equivalent rational numbers:

We can use the idea of equivalent fractions to get more rational numbers between
any two rational numbers. This is clearly explained in the following illustration.

www.tntextbooks.in
Illustration:
3 4
Let us now try to find more rational numbers say between and by the following
7 7
visual explanation on the number line. If we get the multiples of the denominator of the
equivalent rational numbers (the easy one will be to multiply by 10), then we can insert as
3 30 4 40
many rational numbers as we want. We shall write as and as and see that there
7 70 7 70
3 4
are 9 rational numbers between and as given in the number line below.
7 7
3 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4
= =
7 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 7
Fig. 1.12
37 38 37 370
Now, if we want more rational numbers between say and we can write as
70 70 70 700
38 380 37 38
and as . Then again, we will get nine rational numbers between and as
70 700 70 70
371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379
, , , , , , , and .
700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700
The following diagram helps us to understand this nicely with a magnifying lens used
between 0 and 1 and further zoomed into the fractional parts also.
.–2 –1 0 1 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0= =1
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
3 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4
= =
7 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 7
37 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 38
= =
70 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 70
Fig. 1.13
Thus, we can see that there are an unlimited number of rational numbers between any
two given rational numbers.
Numbers 11

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.9
-3 -2
Find atleast two rational numbers between and .
4 5
Solution:
The denominators are different for the given rational numbers. The LCM of the
denominators 4 and 5 is 20. Make the rational numbers such that they have common
denominators as 20. Here,
−3 −3 5 −15 −2 −2 4 −8 .
= × = and = × =
4 4 5 20 5 5 4 20
-15 -8
and
It is easy now to find and insert rational numbers between as shown below.
20 20
-3 -2 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -3 -2 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11
4 5 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 4 5 20 20 20 20 20
-3 --32--3-2-
15
--32-
15
- 314
--2-
15314
--215
- 13
--314
--215
-13
-
-14
-3212
- 15
13
- 14
--
-12
--2-
15
13
-11
14
-
-12
--13
15
-11
-14
12
-
-10
13
-
-11-
12
14
10
-
--13
11
-912
10
-
---11
913
812
10
- 11
9-8-
-- 10
12911
-- 8-
10
-9-11
8-10
-9-8--
10
98 -
-98 -8
4 4 5 45204520420 520420
520
20
420
520
2020
4520
20
2020
20
520
20
20
20
2020
2020
20
20
20
2020
2020
2020
20
20
20
20
2020
20
20
2020
20
202020
20
20
2020
20
20 2020 20
20 20
Fig. 1.14
-14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9
We can list a few rational numbers as , , , , and between
20 20 20 20 20 20
-15 -8
and .
20 20
-15 -8
Are these the only rational numbers between and ? Think! Try to find 10 more
20 20
rational numbers between them, if possible!
Note
-7 5
We can find many rational numbers between and quickly as given below:
11 -9
The range of rational numbers can be got by the cross multiplication of denominators with the
numerators after writing the given fractions in standard form. The cross multiplication here
-7 -5
gives the range of rational numbers from –63 to –55 with the denominator 99.
11 9
This is nothing but making the given rational numbers equivalent with the denominator 99!
Exercise 1.1
1. Fill in the blanks:
−19
(i) lies between the integers __________ and __________.
5
9 -8 -17 15
(ii) The decimal form of the rational number is __________.
4 3 -5 -4
9 -8 -17
8 15
(iii) The rational numbers and are equidistant from __________.
4 3 -53 -4
−15 20 −25
(iv) The next rational number in the sequence , , is __________.
24 −32 40
58
(v) The standard form of is __________.
−78

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Say True or False:

(i) 0 is the smallest rational number.
−4 −3
(ii) lies to the left of .
5 4
−19
9 -8 -17 15
(iii) is greater than .
45 3 -5 -4
(iv) The average of two rational numbers lies between them.
(v) There are an unlimited number of rational numbers between 10 and 11.
3. Find the rational numbers represented by each of the question marks marked on the
following number lines.
(i) ?
–4 –3 –2 –1 0 1
?
(ii)
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2
?
(iii)
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2
4. The points S, Y, N, C, R, A, T, I and O on the number line are such that CN=NY=YS and
RA=AT=TI=IO. Find the rational numbers represented by the letters Y, N, A, T and I.
S Y N C RAT I O
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
5. Draw a number line and represent the following rational numbers on it.
(i) 9 -8 9(ii)-- 1798 15 9 817 --

-
(iii)
8 15
17 -1715 15
(iv)
4 3 4 -534 -44-35 3-45 -- 5 4 -4
6. Write the decimal form of the following rational numbers.
1 13 -18 2 1
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 1 (v) -3
11 4 7 5 2
7. List any five rational numbers between the given rational numbers.
−1 3 1 7 -6 -23
(i) –2 and 0 (ii) and (iii) and (iv) and
2 5 4 20 4 10
14 16
8. Use the method of averages to write 2 rational numbers between and .
5 3
9. Compare the following pairs of rational numbers.
−11 −21 3 −1 2 4
(i) , (ii) , (iii) , .
5 8 −4 2 3 5
10. Arrange the following rational numbers in ascending and descending order.
−5 −11 −15 −7 12 −17 −7 −2 −19
(i) , , , , (ii) , , 0, ,
12 8 24 −9 36 10 5 4 20
Numbers 13

www.tntextbooks.in
Objective Type Questions

−6 8
11. The number which is subtracted from to get is __________.
11 9
34 −142 142 −34
(A) (B) (C) (D)
99 99 99 99
12. Which of the following pairs is equivalent?
−20 5 16 −8 −18 −20 7 −5
(A) , (B) , (C) , (D) ,
12 3 −30 15 36 44 −5 7
−5
13. is a rational number which lies between __________ .
4
−5
(A) 0 and (B) –1 and 0 (C) –1 and –2 (D) –4 and –5
4
14. Which of the following rational numbers is the greatest?
−17 −13 7 −31
(A) (B) (C) (D)
24 16 −8 32
112
15. The sum of the digits of the denominator in the simplest form of is _________ .
528
(A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 7
1.3 Basic Arithmetic Operations on Rational Numbers

All the rules and principles that govern fractions in the basic operations apply to
rational numbers also.
1.3.1 Addition
There can be four different situations while doing addition.
Type 1 : Adding numbers that have same denominators
This is simply like adding like fractions and the result is the sum of the numerators
divided by their common denominator.
Example 1.10
−6 8 −12
Add : , ,
11 11 11
Solution:
Write the given rational numbers in the standard form and then add them.
6 8 12 6 8 12 10
So,
11 11 11 11 11
Type 2 : Adding numbers that have different denominators
After writing the given rational numbers in the standard form, use the LCM of their
denominators to convert the numbers into equivalent rational numbers with a common
denominator so that this reduces to Type1.

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.11
−5 −4 7
Add : , ,
9 3 12
Solution:
LCM of 9, 3,12 = 36
5 4 6 5 4 4 12 7 3
So,
9 3 12 9 4 3 12 12 3
20 48 21 20 48 21 47

36 36 36 36 36
1.3.2 Additive Inverse
The additive inverse of a rational number is another rational number which when
added to the given number, gives zero.
4 -4 Think
For example, and are additive inverses of each
3 3 Is zero a rational
other, since their sum is zero. number? If so, what
1.3.3 Subtraction is its additive inverse?
Subtraction is simply adding the additive inverse.
Example 1.12
9 −12
Subtract : from
17 17
Solution:
12 9 12 9 12 9 21
Now,
17 17 17 17 17 17
Example 1.13
 6  5
Subtract :  −2  from  −4 
 11  22 
Solution:
 5  6
Now,  −4  −  −2 
 22   11
93 28

22 11
93 28 −93 + 28 × 2
=
22 11 22
−93 + 56 −37 15
= = = −1
22 22 22
1.3.4 Multiplication
Product of two or more rational numbers is found by multiplying the corresponding
numerators and denominators of the numbers and then writing them in the standard form.
Numbers 15

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.14
−5 7 −6
Evaluate : (i) × (ii) × ( −4 )
8 3 −11
Solution:
−5 7 −5× 7 −35 −6 6 (−4) 6 × (−4) −24
(i) × = = (ii) × (−4) = × = =
8 3 8×3 24 −11 11 1 11 × 1 11
1.3.5 Multiplicative Inverse
Think
If the product of two rational numbers is 1,
What is the multiplicative
then each of them is said to be the reciprocal or the
inverse of 1 and –1?
multiplicative inverse of the other.
1 1 1
For the rational number a, its reciprocal is and vice versa since a a 1.
a a a
a b a b b a
For the rational number , its multiplicative inverse is and vice versa since × = × = 1.
b a b a a b
1.3.6 Division
The idea of reciprocals of fractions is extended to the division of rational numbers
also. To divide a given rational number by another rational number, we have to multiply
the given rational number by the reciprocal of the second rational number. That is, division
is simply multiplying by the multiplicative inverse of the divisor.
Example 1.15
Try these
7 −3
Divide : by Divide :
−8 4
Solution: -7 -7 -7 35
(i) by 5 (ii) 5 by (iii) by
7 3 7 4 7 3 3 3 6
Here,
8 4 8 3 6
Note
For any non-zero b, c, and d, we have
a  a b  ac a   c  ad
(i)   ÷ c = (ii) a ÷   = (iii)   ÷   =
b  bc c  b  b   d  bc
1.4 Word Problems on the basic operations

Example 1.16
4 2
The sum of two rational numbers is . If one number is , then find the other.
5 15
Solution:
Let the other number be x.
2 4
Given, +x=
15 5
4 2 12 − 2 10 2
⇒ x = − = = ⇒x=
5 15 15 15 3

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.17
−2 3
The product of two rational numbers is . If one number is , then find the other.
3 7
Solution:
Let the other number be x. Aliter
3 2 3 2
Given, x x
7 3 7 3
3 7
Multiplying by the reciprocal of , that is on both sides, x 2 7 14
7 3 3 3 9
7 3 7 2 (by cross multiplication)
x
3 7 3 3
14
x
9
Example 1.18
3
One roll of ribbon is 18 m long. Sankari has four full rolls and one–third of another
4
roll. How many metres of ribbon does Sankari have in total?
Solution:
Number of metres of ribbon Sankari has in total
3 1
= 18 × 4
4 3
75 13 325 1
= × = = 81 m Fig. 1.15
4 3 4 4
Example 1.19
Find the rational numbers that should be added and subtracted so that they will
1 3 3
make the sum 3 + 1 + 2 to the nearest whole number.
2 4 8
Solution:
1 3 3
Now, 3 + 1 + 2
2 4 8
7 7 19 7 × 4 + 7 × 2 + 19 × 1 28 + 14 + 19
= + + = =
2 4 8 8 8
61 5
= = 7 , which lies between the whole numbers 7 and 8.
8 8
5 5 64 61 3 5 64 615 3
= 7 from
If we subtract = 7 , it becomes 7. If we = 7 , it becomes−
− add= to =7+
7 =+ =7+1=8.
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 88 8
Example 1.20
8 8
A student instead of multiplying a number by , by mistake divided it by . If the
9 9
difference between the correct answer and the answer got by him is 34, then find the number.
Numbers 17

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
Let the number be x .
x
8x 9x
The student had to find but, he had found  8  , that is .
9  9 8
9x 8x
Now, − = 34 (given)
8 9
81x − 64 x 17 x
= 34 ⇒ = 34
72 72
34 × 72
x = = 144
17
Example 1.21
4 3 5 30 12 27
Simplify:
3 2 3 12 9 16
Solution:
4 3 5 30 12 27  4 3   −5 12   −12 −27 
Here, = +  + ×  + × 
3 2 3 12 9 16  3 2   3 30   9 16 
 8 9   −1 4   −3 −3 
= +  + ×  + × 
 6 6  1 6  1 4

 17   −4   9 
=  +  + 
 6   6   4
 17 − 4  9 13 9
= + = +
 6  4 6 4

26 + 27 53
= =
12 12
Exercise 1.2
−5 7
(i) The value of + = ________.
12 15
 −3   18 
(ii) The value of   ×   is ________.
 6   −9 
15 30
(iii) The value of is ________.
23 46
(iv) The rational number ________ does not have a reciprocal.
(v) The multiplicative inverse of –1 is ________.
(i) All rational numbers have an additive inverse.
(ii) The rational numbers that are equal to their additive inverses are 0 and –1.
−11 11
(iii) The additive inverse of is .
−17 17

www.tntextbooks.in
(iv) The rational number which is its own reciprocal is –1.

(v) The multiplicative inverse exists for all rational numbers.
3. Find the sum:
7 3 7 5 6  −14  2 5
(i) + (ii) + (iii) + 
 (iv) −4 + 7
5 5 5 7 5  15  3 12
−8 −17
4. Subtract : from .
44 11
9 11 7 24
5. Evaluate : (i) (ii)
132 3 27 35
−21 −7 −3 −6
6. Divide : (i) by (ii) by –3 (iii) –2 by
5 −10 13 15
7. Find (a + b) 4 (a 2 b) if
1 2 3 2
(i)= a = ,b (ii) a , b
2 3 5 15
1 3 2 3
8. Simplify : 3 and show that it is a rational number between 11 and 12.
2 2 5 10
9. Simplify :
11 6 1 3 9 4 7 4 8 3 4 4 1
(i) (ii)
8 33 3 5 20 7 5 3 7 4 3 3 4
4 4
10. A student had multiplied a number by instead of dividing it by and got 70 more
3 3
than the correct answer. Find the number.
3 5  −7 
11. The standard form of the sum + +   is __________ .
4 6  12 
−1 1 1
(A) 1 (B) (C) (D)
2 12 22
 3 5 1
12.  −  + = __________ .
4 8 2
15 5 1
(A) (B) 1 (C) (D)
64 8 16
3  5 1
13. ÷  +  = __________ .
4  8 2
13 2 3 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 3 2 8
3  5 1
14. × ÷  = __________ .
4  8 2 
5 2 15 15
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8 3 32 16
Numbers 19

www.tntextbooks.in
15. Which of these rational numbers which have additive inverse?

−5
(A) 7 (B) (C) 0 (D) all of these
7
Note
a c a+c
Why+ ≠ ?
b d b+d
A mathematical statement is true only if it is 100% true without any exception. If
3 1 3 +1 4 1 3 1 3 +1 4
we do the addition, say + as = = . This is wrong, since + = = = 1.
4 4 4+4 8 2 4 4 4 4
1.5 Properties of Rational Numbers

Some properties listed here below will be of good use in solving problems.
1.5.1 Closure property/law for the collection of rational numbers
i) Closure property for Addition
For any two rational numbers a and b, the sum a + b is also a rational number.
ii)
Closure property for Multiplication
For any two rational numbers a and b, the product ab is also a rational number.
Illustration
3 1 Try this
Take a = and b
4 2
The closure property
3 1 3 2 3 2 1 on integers holds for
Now, ab is in
4 2 4 4 4 4 subtraction and not for
3 1 3 division. What about rational
Also, a b is in
4 2 8 numbers? Verify.
1.5.2 Commutative property/law for the collection of rational numbers

i) Commutative property for Addition
For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b + a.
ii)
C ommutative property for Multiplication
For any two rational numbers a and b, ab = ba (ab means a × b =and
b ×ba
a means
a × b = b × a ).
Illustration
7 3
Take a and b =
8 5
7 3 7 5 3 8 35 24 11
Now, a b
8 5 40 40 40
3 7 3 8 7 5 24 35 11
Also, b a
5 8 40 40 40
Here, we find that a + b = b + a and hence addition is commutative.

Fill in the blanks in the table given below of properties of Integers.
Operations (If a, b, c are integers, then –a, –b, –c are also integers)
Closure Commutative Associative Identity Inverse Distributive
01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 21
a+b is in a+b=b+a (a + b) + c a+0 a + ( − a) a × (b + c)
= a + (b + c) =0+a=a = ( − a) + a = 0 = (a × b) + (a × c)
E.g. E.g. E.g. E.g. E.g. E.g.
Addition
5+(23)=2 5 + (−3) = (−3) + 5 (2 + 3) + ( −4) = 1 (4) 0 5 + ( −5) 2 × [3 + (−5)] = −4
⇒ 2 is in ⇒2=2 2 [3 (4)] 1 0 (4) 4 = ( −5) + 5 = 0 (2 × 3) + [2 × (−5)]
= −4
ab is in a ×b =b×a (a × b) × c a ×1
= a × (b × c) = 1× a = a
Multiplication E.g._______ E.g._______ E.g. E.g._______ Does not exist Not Applicable
(2 × 3) × (−6) = −36
2 × [3 × (−6)] = −36
www.tntextbooks.in
a2b is in Fails Fails Fails Fails a − (−a) a × (b − c )

a−0≠0−a ≠ ( − a) − a
a −b ≠b −a (a − b) − c = (a × b ) − (a × c )
≠ a − (b − a) E.g. E.g. E.g._______
Subtraction 520 = 5
E.g._______ E.g._______ E.g._______ 2 2 (22)=4
025 = 25 (−2) − 2 = −4
5 ≠ −5
4 ≠ −4
Fails
a ÷ b is not in
Numbers
Division 3 Fails Fails Fails Fails Not applicable
E.g. 3 ÷ 5 = does
5
21
not belong to
20/11/2022 12:47:40
www.tntextbooks.in
Further,
7 3 7 3 21 Try these
a b
8 5 85 40
3 7 7 3
3 7 3 7 21 (i) Is ?
Also, ba 5 8 8 5
5 8 58 40 3 7 7 5
(ii) Is ÷ = ÷ ?
Here, we find that a × b = b × a and hence 5 8 8 3
So, what do you conclude?
multiplication is commutative.
1.5.3 Associative property/law for the collection of rational numbers

i) A
ssociative property for Addition
For any three rational numbers a, b, and c, a + (b + c) = (a + b) + c
ii) A
ssociative property for Multiplication
For any three rational numbers a, b, and c, a(bc) = (ab)c
Illustration
−1 3 −7
Take rational numbers a, b, c as a =
, b = and c =
2 5 10
1 3 5 6
Now, a b (equivalent rationals with common denominators)
2 5 10 10
−5 + 6 1
a+ b = =
10 10
1  −7  1 − 7 −6 −3
(a + b) + c = +  = = = ...(1)
10  10  10 10 5
3 −7 6 −7 6 − 7 −1
Also, b + c = + = + = =
5 10 10 10 10 10
1 1 5 1 5 1 6 3

a+(b+c) = ...(2)
2 10 10 10 10 10 5
(1) and (2) shows that (a + b) + c = a + (b + c) is true for rational numbers.
1 3 1 3 3
Similarly, a × b =
2 5 2 5 10
−3 −7 −3 × −7 21
(a × b) × c = 10 × 10 = 10 × 10 = 100 ...(3)
3 −7 3 × −7 −21
Also, b × c = × = =
5 10 5 × 10 50
1 21 1 21 21
a × (b × c ) = ...(4)
2 50 2 50 100
(3) and (4) shows that Try this
(a × b) × c = a × (b × c) is true for rational numbers. Check whether associative
Thus, the associative property is true for addition and property holds for subtraction and
multiplication of rational numbers. division.

www.tntextbooks.in
1.5.4 Identity property/law for the collection of rational numbers

i) Identity property for Addition
For any rational number a, there exists a unique rational number 0 such that
0 + a = a = 0 + a.
ii) Identity property for Multiplication
For any rational number a, there exists a unique rational number 1 such that
1 × a = a = a × 1.
Illustration
3 3 3 3 3
Take a that is, a . Now 0 0 (Isn’t it?)
7 7 7 7 7
−3
Hence, 0 is the additive identity for
7
3 3 3
Also, 1 1 (Isn’t it?)
7 7 7
−3
Hence, 1 is the multiplicative identity for
7
1.5.5 Inverse property/law for the collection of rational numbers
i) A
dditive Inverse property
For any rational number a, there exists a unique rational number –a such that
a + (–a) = (–a) + a = 0. Here, 0 is the additive identity.
ii) Multiplicative Inverse property
1
For any rational number b, there exists a unique rational number such that
1 1 b
b × = × b = 1 . Here, 1 is the multiplicative identity.
b b
Illustration
11 11 11
Take a Now, a
23 23 23
11 11 11 11 0
So, a + (–a) = 0
23 23 23 23
11 11 11 11 0
Also, (–a)+ a = 0
23 23 23 23
∴ a + (–a) = (–a)+ a = 0 is true.
17 1 29 29
Also, take b . Now,
29 b 17 17
1 17 29 1 29 17
b× = 1 . Also, × b = 1
b 29 17 b 17 29
1 1
∴ b × = × b = 1 is true.
b b
Numbers 23

www.tntextbooks.in
1.5.6 Distributive property/law for the collection of rational numbers

Multiplication is distributive over addition for the collection of rational numbers.
For any three rational numbers a, b and c, the distributive law is a b c a b a c
Illustration
7 11 14
, b=
Take rational numbers a, b, c as a
and c
9 18 27
11 14 33 28 33 28 5
Now, b+c = b c
18 27 54 54 54 54
(equivalent rationals with common denominators)
7 5 7 5 35
∴ a ×(b+c) = ...(1)
9 54 9 54 486
7 11 7 11 77
Also, a × b =
9 18 9 18 9 9 2
7 14 7 14 98
a×c =
9 27 9 9 3 9 9 3
−77 98
∴ (a × b)+ (a × c) =
+
9×9×2 9×9×3
−77 × 3 + 98 × 2 −231 + 196 −35
= = = ...(2)
9×9×2×3 486 486
(1) and (2) shows that a × (b + c) = (a × b) + (a × c) .
Hence, multiplication is distributive over addition for the collection of rational numbers.
Exercise 1.3
1. Verify the closure property for addition and multiplication for the
−5 8
rational numbers and .
7 9
2. Verify the commutative property for addition and multiplication for
−10 −8
the rational numbers and .
11 33
3. Verify the associative property for addition and multiplication for the rational numbers
−7 5 −4
, and .
9 6 3
4. Verify the distributive property a × (b + c ) = (a × b ) + (a + c ) for the rational numbers
1 2 5
a , b = and c .
2 3 6
5. Verify the identity property for addition and multiplication for the rational numbers
15 −18
and .
19 25

www.tntextbooks.in
6. Verify the additive and multiplicative inverse property for the rational numbers
−7 17
and .
17 27
7. Closure property is not true for division of rational numbers because of the number
1
(A) 1 (B) –1 (C) 0 (D)
2
1  3 5  1 3  5
8. − −  ≠ −  − illustrates that subtraction does not satisfy the ________
2  4 6   2 4  6
property for rational numbers.
(A) commutative (B) closure (C) distributive (D) associative
9. Which of the following illustrates the inverse property for addition?
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(A) − =0 (B) + = (C) +0= (D) −0=
8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 8
3 1 1 3 1 3 1
10. illustrates that multiplication is distributive over
4 2 4 4 2 4 4
(A) addition (B) subtraction (C) multiplication (D) division
Think
We know that different operations 1 1 2

Observe that, + =
with the same pair of rational numbers usually 1.2 2.3 3
give different answers. Check the following 1 1 1 3
calculations which are some interesting + + =
1 . 2 2 . 3 3. 4 4
exceptions in rational numbers.
1 1 1 1 4
13 13 13 13 169 13 169 13 + + + =
(i) + = × (ii) + = ÷ 1 . 2 2 . 3 3. 4 4. 5 5
4 9 4 9 30 15 30 15
Use your reasoning skills, to find
Amazing …! Isn’t it? Try a few more like the sum of the first 7 numbers in the
these, if possible. pattern given above.
1.6 Introduction to Square Numbers
1 2 3
1 2 4 5 6
1 3 4 7 8 9
This is a square of side This is a square of side This is a square of side

1 unit. It is 1 squared. 2 units. It is 2 squared. 3 units. It is 3 squared.
We write this as 12 We write this as 22 We write this as 32
12 = 1 × 1 = 1 22 = 2 × 2 = 4 32 = 3 × 3 = 9
Numbers 25

www.tntextbooks.in
More often we write like this:

42 = 16
This says “4 squared is 16”
The 2 at the top stands for squared and it indicates the number of times the number 4
appears in the product (42 = 4 × 4 = 16).
The numbers 1, 4, 9, 16, ... are all square numbers (also called perfect square numbers).
Each of them is made up of the product of same two factors.
A natural number n is called a square number, if we can find another natural number m
such that n = m2.
Is 49 a square number? Yes, because it can be written as 72. Is 50 a square number?
The following table gives the squares of numbers up to 20.
Its Its Its Its
Number Number Number Number
square square square square
1 1 6 36 11 121 16 256
2 4 7 49 12 144 17 289
3 9 8 64 13 169 18 324
4 16 9 81 14 196 19 361
5 25 10 100 15 225 20 400
Try to extend the table up to 50 numbers!
We can now easily verify the following properties of square numbers by referring the
table given above:
The square numbers end with 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 and 9 only.
If a number ends with 1 or 9, its square ends with 1.
If a number ends with 5 or 0, its square also ends with 5 or 0 respectively.
Square of an odd number is always odd and the square of an even number is always even.
Numbers that end with 2,3,7 and 8 are not perfect squares.
Think
1. Is the square of a prime number, prime?
2. Will the sum of two perfect squares always be a perfect square? What about their
difference and their product?
Try these
1. Which among 256, 576, 960, 1025, 4096 are perfect square numbers?
(Hint: Try to extend the table of squares already seen).
2. One can judge just by look that each of the following numbers 82, 113, 1972, 2057,
8888, 24353 is not a perfect square. Explain why?

www.tntextbooks.in
1.6.1 Some more special properties of square numbers

(i) The square of a natural number other than 1, is either a multiple of 3 or exceeds a
multiple of 3 by 1.
(ii) The square of a natural number, other than 1, is either a multiple of 4 or exceeds a
multiple of 4 by 1.
(iii) The remainder of a perfect square when divided by 3, is either 0 or 1 but never 2.
(iv) The remainder of a perfect square, when divided by 4, is either 0 or 1 but never
2 and 3.
(v) When a perfect square number is divided by 8, the remainder is either 0 or 1 or 4, but
will never be equal to 2, 3, 5, 6 or 7.
Perfect numbers such as 6, 28, 496, 8128 etc., are not square numbers.
Note
If a perfect square number ends in zero, then it must end with even number of
zeroes always. We can verify this for a few numbers in the table given below.
Number 10 20 30 40 ... 90 100 110 ... 2000 ...

Its Square 100 400 900 1600 ... 8100 10000 12100 ... 4000000 ...
Think
Consider the claim: “Between the squares of the consecutive numbers n and (n+1),
there are 2n non-square numbers”. Can it be true? How many non-square numbers are
there between 2500 and 2601? Verify the claim.
1.7 Square Root

Squaring a number is another mathematical operation just like addition, subtraction,
multiplication etc., Most mathematical operations have ‘inverse’ (meaning ‘opposite’)
operations. For example, subtraction is the inverse of addition, division is the inverse of
multiplication etc., Squaring also has an inverse operation namely finding the Square root.
1
The square root of a number n, written n (or) n 2 , is the number that gives n when
multiplied by itself. For example, 81 is 9, because 9 × 9 = 81.
In the adjacent table, we have square roots of all the perfect squares starting from
1 to 100.
Numbers 27

www.tntextbooks.in
If 112 = 121, what is 121 ? If 529 = 232, what is the square Square root Reason
root of 529? If we know that 324 = 182, we can immediately 1=1 12 = 1
tell that 324 is 18.
4 =2 22 = 4
We have, 1 = 1 and so 1 is a square root of 1. Similarly,
2
(–1) = 1. So, (–1) is also a square root of 1.

2
9 =3 32 = 9
22 = 4 and so 2 is a square root of 4. Similarly, (–2)2 = 4.
16 = 4 42 = 16
So, (–2) is also a square root of 4.
This continues as 32 = 9 and so 3 is a square root of 9. 25 = 5 52 = 25
Similarly, (–3)2 = 9. So, (–3) is also a square root of 9.
36 = 6 62 = 36
The above examples suggest that there are two integral
square roots for a perfect square number. However, in 49 = 7 72 = 49
working out the problems, we will take up only positive
64 = 8 82 = 64
integral square root. The positive square root of a number is
always denoted by the symbol . Thus, 4 is 2 (and not 81 = 9 92 = 81
–2). Also, 9 is 3 (and not –3). We have to remember that
100 = 10 102 = 100
this is a universally accepted notation.
1.7.1 Square root through Prime Factorisation
Study the following table giving the prime factors of numbers and those of their squares.
Prime factorisation The square of Prime factorisation
Numbers
of the numbers given numbers of their squares
6 6=2×3 62 = 36 36 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 = (2 × 3)2
8 8=2×2×2 82 = 64 64 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = (2 × 2 × 2)2
12 12 = 2 × 2 × 3 122 = 144 44 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 = (2 × 2 × 3)2
15 15 = 3 × 5 152 = 225 225 = 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 = (3 × 5)2
Look at 6 and its prime factors. How many times do 2 and 3 occur in 36 in the list?
Now, look at its square 36 and its prime factors. How many times do 2 and 3 occur in 36 here?
Repeat the above task in the case of other numbers 8, 12, and 15 also. (We may also
choose our own numbers and their squares). What do we find? We find that,
e number of times a prime factor twice the number of times it occurs in
Th
=
occurs in the square of a number the prime factorisation of the number.
We use this idea to find the square root of a square number. First, resolve the given number
into prime factors. Group the identical factors in pairs and then take one from them to find
the square root.
Example 1.22
Find the square root of 324 by prime factorisation.
8th_Maths_English Medium_Chapter 1.indd 28 03-12-2022 15:17:17

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
First, resolve the given number into prime factors. Group the identical factors in pairs
and then take one from them to find the square root.
Now, 324 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 2 324
= 22 × 32 × 32 2 162
3 81
(2 3 3)2
3 27
324 (2 3 3)2 3 9
233 3 3
324 18 1
Example 1.23
Find the least number by which 250 is to be multiplied (or) divided so that the resulting
number is a perfect square. Also, find the square root in that case.
Solution: 5 250
5 50
Here, 250 = 5 × 5 × 5 × 2
5 10
= 52 × 5 × 2 2 2
Here, the prime factors 5 and 2 do not have pairs. 1
Therefore, we can either divide 250 by 10 (5 × 2) or multiply 250 by 10.
(i) If we multiply 250 by 10, we get 2500 = 52 × 5 × 2 × 5 × 2 and therefore the square
root of 2500 would be 5 × 5 × 2 = 50.
(ii) If we divide 250 by 10, we get 25 and in this case we get 25 = 52 = 5 .
Example 1.24
Is 108 a perfect square number?
Solution:
2 108 Think
Here, 108 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 3 2 54 In this case, if we want to
= 2 ×3 ×3
2 2
3 27 find the smallest factor with which
Here, the prime factor 3 does not 3 9 we can multiply or divide 108 to
have a second pair. Hence, 108 is not a 3 3 get a square number, what should
perfect square number. 1 we do?
1.7.2 Finding the square root of a number by Long Division Method

When we come across numbers with large number of digits, finding their square roots
by factorisation becomes lengthy and difficult. Use of long division helps us in such cases.
Let us look into the method with a couple of illustrations.
Numbers 29

www.tntextbooks.in
Illustration 1
Find the square root of 576 by long division method.
Step 1:
Group the digits in pairs, starting with the digit in the unit’s place. Each pair
5 76
and the remaining digit (if any) is called a period. Put a bar over every pair of digits
starting from the right of the given number. If there are odd number of digits, the
extreme left digit will be without a bar sign above it.
So, here we have 5 76
Step 2:
Think of the largest number whose square is equal to or just less than 2 × 2 2
the first period. Take this number as the divisor and also as the quotient. The
2 5 76
left extreme number here is 5. The largest number whose square is less than or
equal to 5 is 2. This is our divisor and the quotient. 4
1
Step 3: 2
Bring 76 down and write it down to the right of 2 5 76
the remainder 1. 4
Now, the new dividend is 176. 1 76
Step 4: 2
×2
To find the new divisor, multiply the earlier quotient (2) by 2 (always) 2 5 76
and write it leaving a blank space next to it. 4
Step 5: 4 1 76
2
The new divisor is 4 followed by a digit. We should choose ×2
this digit next to 4 such that the new quotient multiplied by the 2 5 76
new divisor will be less than or equal to 176. 4
4 ? 1 76 ≤ Product
Step 6:
Clearly, the required digit here has to be 4 or 6. (Why?) 2 4
When we calculate, 46 6 276 whereas 44 4 176 . 2 5 76
Therefore, we put 4 in the blank space and write 44 4 176 below 176 and 4 4 1 76
1 76
subtract to get the remainder 0 and the quotient at the top, that is 24 is the
0
square root of 576.
576 24 .
Illustration 2
In the following example, follow the figures one after another and try to understand what
each figure explains, the stage by stage and the gradual computation of computing the square root
of 288369.

www.tntextbooks.in
1 2 3
5 5
28 83 69 5 28 83 69 5 28 83 69
25 25
3 10 3 83
4 5 6
5 3 5 3 5 3 7
5 28 83 69 5 28 83 69 5 28 83 69
25 25 2
25
103 3 83 103 3 83 103 3 83
3 09 3 09 2 3 09
74 106 74 69 1067 74 69
74 69
0
We find that 288369 =537.
Example 1.25
Find the square root of 459684 by long division method.
Solution:
By long division method, we can find the square root of 459684 as given below:
6 7 8
6 45 96 84
2
36
127 9 96
2 8 89
1348 1 07 84
1 07 84
0
459684 678
Example 1.26
The area of a square field is 3136 m2. Find its perimeter.
3136 m² ?
Solution:
Given that the area of the square field = 3136 m2.
5 6
∴The side of square field = 3136 m
= 56 m ?
5 31 36
∴The perimeter of the square field = 4 × side 25
= 4 × 56 106 6 36
= 224 m 6 36
Numbers 31

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.27
A real estate owner had two plots, a square plot of side 39 m and a rectangular plot of
dimensions 100 m length and 64 m breadth. He sells both of these plots and acquires a new
square plot of the same area. What is the length of side of his new plot?
Solution:
The transactions can be visualised as follows:
Plots sold New plot bought
39
39
?
64
?
100
Area of the Area of the Area of the 8 9

= +
square plot bought square plot sold rectangular plot sold 8 79 21
= 39 × 39 + 100 × 64 64
= 1521 + 6400 169 15 21
15 21
= 7921 m 2
0
Length of a side of the new square plot = 7921 = 89 m
Try these
Find the square root by long division method: 1. 400 2. 1764 3. 9801
1.7.3 Number of digits in the square root of a perfect square number

We made use of bars to find the square root in the division method. This marking bars
help us to find the number of digits in the square root of a perfect square number. Observe
the following examples (with bars shown as if we compute square root by division procedure).
Square root of No. of No. of digits in Square root of No. of No. of digits in
numbers bars the square root numbers bars the square root
169 = 13 2 2 4356 = 66 2 2
441 = 21 2 2 6084 = 78 2 2
12544 = 112 3 3 27225 = 165 3 3
Hence, we conclude that the number of bars indicates the number of digits in the square root.
Try these
Without calculating the square root, guess the number of digits in the square root of
the following numbers: 1. 14400 2. 390625 3. 100000000

www.tntextbooks.in
1.7.4 Square root of decimal numbers

To compute the square root of numbers in the decimal form, we simply follow the
following steps:
Step 1:
Make even number of decimal places even by affixing a zero on
To find 42.25
the extreme right of the digit in the decimal part (only if required).
Step 2:
The number has an integral part and a decimal part. In
the integral part, mark the bars as done in the case of division We put the bars as 42.25
method to find the square root of a perfect square number.
Step 3:
In the decimal part, mark the bars on every pair of digits beginning with the first decimal
place. 6 5
6 42 25
Step 4: 36
125 6 25
Now, calculate the square root by long division method. 6 25
Step 5: 0
Put the decimal point in the square root as soon as the integral part is
exhausted. 42.25 6.5
1.7.5 Square root of product and quotient of numbers
For any two positive numbers a and b. we have
a a
(i) ab = a × b and (ii) (b 0) Try these
b b
Example 1.28 Find the square root of
Find the value of 256 . 1. 5.4756 2. 19.36 3. 116.64
Solution:
256 16 16 16 16 4 4 16.(or) 256 64 4 64 4 8 2 16.
Think
Try to fill in the blanks using ab = a × b .
36 = 6 9 × 4 = 3×2 = 6 Is 36 = 9 × 4 ? 81= ? 9 × 9 = __× __ = __ Is 81 = 9 × 9 ?
144 = ? 9 × 16 = __× __ = __ Is 144 = 9 × 16 ? 144 = ? 36 × 4 = __× __ = __ Is 144 = 36 × 4 ?
100 = ? 25 × 4 = __× __ = __ Is 100 = 25 × 4 ? 1225 = ? 25 × 49 = __× __ = __ Is 1225 = 25 × 49 ?
Activity
Attempt to prepare a table of square root problems as in the above case to show that
if a and b are two perfect square numbers, then a a (b 0) . We can use this idea to
b b
compute certain square-root problems easily.
Numbers 33

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.29
Find the value of 42.25 .
Solution:
4225 4225
We can write this as 42.25 = =
100 100
Now, it is easy to compute the square root of the whole number 4225 by long division method
4225 4225 65
as 4225 = 65 and so, we now get 42.25 = = = = 6. 5
100 100 10
This is another way of tackling problems of square root of
Try these
decimal numbers without any botheration of decimal symbol.
Using this method,
Example 1.30 find the square root of
98 the numbers 1.2321 and
Simplify: (i) 12 × 3 (ii)
162 11.9025.
Solution:
a a
(i) Remembering the rule, a b ab (ii) Remembering the rule, (b 0)
b b
2 98 2 49 49 72 7
12 3 12 3 36 6 6
162 2 81 81 92 9
Example 1.31
7 9
Simplify: (i) 2 (ii) 1
9 16
Solution:
7 25 52 5 2 9 25 52 5 1
(i) =
2 = = = 1 (ii) 1= = = = 1
9 9 32 3 3 16 16 42 4 4
Remark: In the case of the (ii) problem one may be tempted to give the answer immediately
3
as 1 , but this is not correct since you have to convert the mixed fraction into an improper
4
a a
fraction and then use the rule (b 0)
b b
1.7.6 Approximating square roots Try these
Can you write the given numbers 40 , 6 and 7 in Write the numbers in
ascending order? Here 40 is not a square number and ascending order.
so we cannot determine its root easily. However, we can 1. 4, 14 , 5 2. 7, 65 , 8
estimate an approximation to 40 and use it here.
We know that the two closest squares surrounding 40 are 36 and 49.
Thus, 36 < 40 < 49 which can be written as 62 < 40 < 72.
Considering the square root, we have 6 < 40 < 7.

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 1.4
(i) The ones digit in the square of 77 is___________.
(ii) The number of non-square numbers between 242 and 252 is ______.
(iii) The number of perfect square numbers between 300 and 500 is ______.
(iv) If a number has 5 or 6 digits in it, then its square root will have ___________ digits.
(v) The value of 180 lies between integers ______ and ______.

(i) When a square number ends in 6, its square root will have 6 in the unit’s place.
(ii) A square number will not have odd number of zeros at the end.
(iii) The number of zeros in the square of 91000 is 9.
(iv) The square of 75 is 4925.
(v) The square root of 225 is 15.
3. Find the square of the following numbers.
(i) 17 (ii) 203 (iii) 1098
4. Examine if each of the following is a perfect square.
(i) 725 (ii) 190 (iii) 841 (iv) 1089
5. Find the square root by prime factorisation method.
(i) 144 (ii) 256 (iii) 784 (iv) 1156 (v) 4761 (vi) 9025
6. Find the square root by long division method.

(i) 1764 (ii) 6889 (iii) 11025 (iv) 17956 (v) 418609
7. Estimate the value of the following square roots to the nearest whole number:
(i) 440 (ii) 800 (iii) 1020
8. Find the square root of the following decimal numbers and fractions.
144 18
(i) 2.89 (ii) 67.24 (iii) 2.0164 (iv ) (v ) 7
225 49
9. Find the least number that must be subtracted to 6666 so that it becomes a perfect square.
Also, find the square root of the perfect square thus obtained.
10. Find the least number by which 1800 should be multiplied so that it becomes a perfect square.
Also, find the square root of the perfect square thus obtained.

11. The square of 43 ends with the digit ______.
(A) 9 (B) 6 (C) 4 (D) 3
Numbers 35

www.tntextbooks.in
12. _______ is added to 242 to get 252.

(A) 42 (B) 52 (C) 62 (D) 72
13. 48 is approximately equal to ______.

(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 7 (D) 8
14. 128 98 18 = ______.
(A) 2 8 2(B)
48 8 32 248 8(C)32 2 48 8 3248(D) 32
15. The number of digits in the square root of 123454321 is ______.
(A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 7
1.8 Cubes and Cube Roots

If you multiply a number by itself and then by itself again, the result is a cube number.
This means that a cube number is a number that is the product of three identical numbers.
If n is a number, its cube is represented by n3.
Cube numbers can be represented visually as 3D cubes comprising of single unit cubes.
Cube numbers are also called as perfect cubes. The perfect cubes of natural numbers are
1, 8, 27, 64, 125, 216, ... and so on.
Geometrical Product Notation Perfect cube

Representation Representation
1×1×1 13 1
23 8
2×2×2
33 27
3×3×3
4×4×4 43 64
Ramanujan Number - 1729 = 123+13 = 103+93

Once Professor Hardy went to see Ramanujan when he was ill at Putney, riding in taxi cab
number 1729 and said that the number seemed a dull one, and hoped it was not an unfavourable
omen. “No,” replied Ramanujan and he completed saying “It is a very interesting number.
Infact, it is the smallest number expressible as the sum of two cubes in two different ways.”
4104, 13832, 20683 are a few more examples of Ramanujan-Hardy numbers.

www.tntextbooks.in
1.8.1 Properties of cubes of numbers

S. No. Properties Examples
1. The cube of a positive number is
positive. 63 6 6 6 216.
2. The cube of a negative number is

7 7 7 7 343
3
negative.
3. The cube of every even number is
83 = 8 × 8 × 8 = 512 is even
even.
4. The cube of every odd number is odd. 93 = 9 × 9 × 9 = 729 is odd
5. I f a natural number ends with 0, 1, 4, 103 = 1000, 113 = 1331, 143 = 2744
5, 6 or 9, its cube also ends with the
same 0,1, 4, 5, 6 or 9 respectively. 153 = 3375, 163 = 4096, 193 = 6859
6. If a natural number ends with 2 or 8,
its cube ends with 8 or 2 respectively. 123 = 1728, 183 = 5832
7. If a natural number ends with 3 or 7,

its cube ends with 7 or 3 respectively. 133 = 2197, 173 = 4913
8. The sum of the cubes of first n natural 13 23 33 ..... n3 (1 2 3 ..... n)2

numbers is equal to the square of Check that,
their sum.
13 23 33 43 (1 2 3 4)2
Note
Try these
• A perfect cube does not end with
Find the ones digit in the cubes
two zeroes.
of each of the following numbers.
• The cube of a two digit number may have
1. 12 2. 27 3. 38
4 or 5 or 6 digits in it.
4. 53 5. 71 6. 84
1.8.2 Cube root
The cube root of a number is the value that Cube Cube
Cubes Cubes
when cubed gives the original number. Roots Roots
For example, the cube root of 27 is 3 because when 3 1 1 729 9
is cubed we get 27. 8 2 1000 10
Notation: 27 3 1331 11
The cube root of a number x is denoted as
1 64 4 1728 12
3
x (or ) . x3 125 5 2197 13
Here are some more cubes and cube roots: 216 6 2744 14
3 3
3
1 = 1 since 1 = 1, 8 = 2 since 2 = 8,
3
343 7 3375 15
3
27 = 3 since 33 = 27, 3 64 = 4 since 43 = 64, 512 8 4096 16
3
125 = 5 since 53 = 125 and so on.
Numbers 37

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1.32
Is 400 a perfect cube?
Solution:
By prime factorisation, we have 400 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 5 × 5.
There is only one triplet. To make further triplets, we will need two more 2’s and one more 5.
Therefore, 400 is not a perfect cube.
Example 1.33
Find the smallest number by which 675 must be multiplied to obtain a perfect cube.
Solution: 3 675
We find that, 675 = 3 × 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 …………….(1) 3 225
Grouping the prime factors of 675 as triplets, we are left over with 5 × 5. 3 75
We need one more 5 to make it a perfect cube. 5 25
5 1
To make 675 a perfect cube, multiply both sides of (1) by 5.
1
675 × 5 = 3 × 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 × 5
3375 = 3 × 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 × 5 Think
Now, 3375 is a perfect cube. Thus, the smallest In this question, if the word
required number to multiply 675 such that the new ‘multiplied’ is replaced by the word
number perfect cube is 5. ‘divided’, how will the solution vary?
1.8.3 Cube root of a given number by Prime Factorisation

Step 1: Resolve the given number into the product of prime factors.
Step 2: Make triplet groups of same primes.
Step 3: Choosing one from each triplet, find the product of primes to get the cube root.
Example 1.34
Find the cube root of 27000.
Solution:
By prime factorisation, we have 27000 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3× 3× 3× 5× 5× 5
∴ 3 27000 = 2 × 3× 5 = 30.
Example 1.35
Evaluate: (i) 3
9261 (ii) 3
1728
8000 729
Solution: 1 1
9261 3
9261 (21 )
(21×21×21) 21
3 1
3 3
(i)
3 = = 1 1 = =1
=
8000 3
8000 20 20
(20×20×20)3 (20 )3 3
1 1
1728 3
1728 (12 ×12 ×12) 3 (12 )3 12 4 1 3
(ii)
3 = = = = = =1
1 1
729 3
729 9 3 3
(9×9×9) 3
(9 )3 3

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 1.5
(i) The ones digits in the cube of 73 is____________.
(ii) The maximum number of digits in the cube of a two digit number is _______.
(iii) The smallest number to be added to 3333 to make it a perfect cube is ___________.
(iv) The cube root of 540×50 is ___________.
(v) The cube root of 0.000004913 is ___________.
(i) The cube of 24 ends with the digit 4.
(ii) Subtracting 103 from 1729 gives 93.
(iii) The cube of 0.0012 is 0.000001728.
(iv) 79570 is not a perfect cube.
(v) The cube root of 250047 is 63.
3. Show that 1944 is not a perfect cube.
4. Find the smallest number by which 10985 should be divided so that the quotient is a
perfect cube.
5. Find the smallest number by which 200 should be multiplied to make it a perfect cube.
6. Find the cube root of 24 × 36 × 80 × 25.
7. Find the cube root of 729 and 6859 by prime factorisation.
8. What is the square root of cube root of 46656?
9. If the cube of a squared number is 729, find the square root of that number.
10. Find the two smallest perfect square numbers which when multiplied together gives a
perfect cube number.
Activity
Observe that Observe that
23 − 13 = 1 + 2 × 1 × 3 13 = 1 = 1
33 − 23 = 1 + 3 × 2 × 3 23 = 8 = 3 + 5
43 − 33 = 1 + 4 × 3 × 3 33 = 27 = 7 + 9 + 11
Find the value of 153 −143 in the above Continue this pattern to find the value of
pattern. 73 as the sum of consecutive odd numbers.
1.9 Exponents and Powers

We know how to express some numbers as squares and cubes. For
example, we write 52 for 25 and 53 for 125.

In general terms, an expression that represents repeated multiplication
of the same factor is called a power. The number 5 is called the base and the

number 2 is called the exponent (more often called as power). The exponent

corresponds to the number of times the base is used as a factor.
Numbers 39

www.tntextbooks.in
1.9.1 Powers with positive exponents

Value of powers given by positive whole number exponents quite often increase rapidly.
Observe the following example:
21 = 2
22 = 2 × 2 = 4
23 = 2 × 2 × 2 = 8
24 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 16
25 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 32
26 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 64
27 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 128
28 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 256
29 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 512
210 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 1024
At this rate of increase, what do you think 2100 will be?
In fact, 2100=1267650600228229401496703205376
Thus, we understand that the positive exponential notation with positive power could be useful
when we come across with large numbers.
1.9.2 Powers with zero and negative exponents
Observe this pattern:
25 = 32 Starting from the beginning, what happens in the successive steps? We
find that the result is half of that of the previous step. So, what can we say about
24 = 16
20 ? If we prepare a table like this for 35, 34, 33, and so on what will it tell us
23 = 8 about 30? We can use the same process as in this pattern, to conclude that any
22 = 4 non-zero number raised to the zero exponent must result in 1. Thus,
21 = 2 a0 = 1, where a ≠ 0
20 = ?
Let us see what happens if we extend the above pattern further downward.
As before, starting from the beginning, in the successive steps, we find that 23 = 8
the result is half of that of the previous step. Since 20 = 1, the next step is 2–1, 22 = 4
whose value is the previous step’s value 1, divided by 2, that is 1 . Next is 2–2, 21 = 2
2
which is the same as
1 1
divided by 2, that is and so on. Thus, 20 = 1
2 4 1
2–1 =
2
1 1
In general, a − m = m , where m is an integer 2–2 = 4
a
1
2–3 =
8

www.tntextbooks.in
1.9.3 Expanded form of numbers using exponents

In the lower classes, we have learnt how to write a whole number in the expanded form.
For example, 5832 = 5´1000 + 8´100 + 3´10 + 2´1
= 5´103 + 8´102 + 3´101 + 2 (when we use exponential notation).
What shall we do if we get decimal places? Powers of 10 with negative exponents
come to our rescue!
3 2 Try these
Thus, 58.32 = 50 + 8 + +
10 100
Expand the following
1 1 numbers using exponents:
= 5´10 + 8´1 + 3´ + 2´
10 100 1. 8120 2. 20305
= 5´101 + 8´100 + 3´10–1 + 2´10–2 3. 3652.01 4. 9426.521
1.9.4 Laws of Exponents
Laws of exponents arise out of certain basic ideas. A positive exponent of a number
indicate how many times we use that number in a multiplication whereas a negative
exponent suggests us how many times we use that number in a division, since the opposite of
multiplying is dividing.
zz Product law
According to this law, when multiplying two powers that have the same base, we can add
the exponents. That is,
am × an = am + n
where a (a≠0), m, n are integers. Note that the base should be the same in both the quantities.
Examples:
a) 23 × 22 = 25 by law(meaning 8´4 = 32 and note that it is not 2 )
3´2
(−2)−4 ×(−2)−3 = (−2)(−4 )+(−3) by law and so = (−2)−7

(or)
b)
1 1 1 1 1
(−2)−4 ×(−2)−3 = 4
× 3
= 4 3
= 4+3
= = (−2)−7
(−2) (−2) (−2) ×(−2) (−2) (−2)7
c) (−5)3 ×(−5)−3 = (−5)3−3 by law and so = (−5)0 =1
zz Quotient law
According to this law, when dividing two powers that have the same base we can subtract
the exponents. That is,
am
n
= a m-n
a
where a (a ¹ 0), m, n are integers. Note that the base should be the same in both the quantities.
How does it work? Study the following examples.
Numbers 41

www.tntextbooks.in
Examples:
(3)5
2
(3)52 by law and (3)3 27
(3)
(or )
(3)5
a) 2
(3)5 (3)2 (3)52 (3)3
(3)
(or )
(3)5 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
2
(3) (3) (3) (3)3
(3) (3) (3)
(−7)100
98
=(−7)100−98 by law and (−7)2 =49
(−7)
b) (or)
(−7)100 (−7) × (−7) × (−7) × ...100 times
= = (−7) × (−7) = 49
(−7)98 (−7) × (−7) × (−7) × ... 98 times
zz Power law
According to this law, when raising a power to another power, we can just multiply the
exponents.
(am)n = amn
where a (a ¹ 0), m, n are integers.
Examples:
[(-2)3 ]2 = (-2)3×2 by law and(-2)6 = 64
(or)
[(-2)3 ]2 = [(-2) × (-2) × (-2)]2 = [-8]2 = 64
Try these
Verify the following rules (as we did above). Here, a,b are non-zero integers and
m, n are any integers.
1. Product of same powers to power of product rule: am × bm = (ab)m
m
a m  a 
2. Quotient of same powers to power of quotient rule: m =  
b b 
3. Zero exponent rule: a = 1.
0
Example 1.36
1 32
Find the value of (i) 4 −3 (ii) (iii) (−2)5
× (−2)−3
(iv)
2−3 3−2
Solution:
1 1 1 1
(i) 4−3 = 3
= = (ii) 3
23 2 2 2 8
4 4 × 4 × 4 64 2

www.tntextbooks.in
32 2 2
(iii) (2)5 (2)3 (2)53 (2)2 2 2 4 (iv) -2 = 3 ×3 = 9 × 9 = 81
3
Example 1.37
Simplify and write the answer in exponential form:
4
5
(ii) (−3) ×  
5 8 5 –5 4
(i) (3 ÷ 3 ) × 3
3
Solution:
5
35 5 58 5 5 3 5 5 35 5 15 5 155 1
(i) 8 3 (3 ) 3 (3 ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 320 20
3 3
4 4
5 4 5
(ii) 3 3 4 54 625
4
3 3
Example 1.38
x+2 5 10
Find x so that ( −7 ) × ( −7 ) = ( −7 )
Solution:
x+2 5 10
(-7) ´(-7) = (-7)
x 2 5 10
7 7
Since the bases are equal, we equate the exponents to get
x 7 10
x 10 7 3
1.9.5 Standard Form and Scientific Notation

Standard form of a number is just the number as we normally write it. We use
expanded notation to show the value of each digit. That is, it is exhibited as a sum of each
digit duly multiplied by its matching place value (like ones, tens, hundreds etc.,). For example,
195 is in standard form. It can be expanded as 195 = 1 × 100 + 9 × 10 + 5 × 1.
Astronomers, biologists, engineers, physicists and many others come across quantities
whose measures require very small or very large numbers. If they write the numbers in standard
form, it may not help us to understand or make computations easily. Scientific notation is a
way to make these numbers easier to work with.
To write in scientific notation, follow the form S × 10a. where S is a number (integer or
integer with decimal) between 1 and 10, but not 10 itself, and a is a positive or negative integer.
Thus, a number in scientific notation is written as the product of a number (integer or integer
with decimal) and a power of 10. We move the decimal place forward or backward until we
have a number from 1 to 9. Then, we add a power of ten that tells how many places you moved
the decimal forward or backward.
Numbers 43

www.tntextbooks.in
Examples:
Standard Form Scientific Notation Standard Form Scientific Notation
0.00123 1.23 × 10−3 123 1.23 × 102
0.0123 1.23 × 10−2 1230 1.23 × 103
0.123 1.23 × 10−1 12300 1.23 × 104
1.23 1.23 × 100 123000 1.23 × 105
12.3 1.23 × 101 1230000 1.23 × 106
Some more examples:
(a) The diameter of the earth is 12756000 miles. This can be easily written in scientific
form as 1.2756 ´107 miles.
(b) The volume of Jupiter is about 143300000000000 km3. This can be easily written in scientific
form as 1.433 × 1014 km3 .
(c) The size of a bacterium is 0.00000085 mm. This can be easily written in scientific
form as 8.5 × 10 −7 mm.
Note
1. The positive exponent in 1.3 ×1012 indicates that it is a large number.
2. The negative exponent in 7.89 × 10–21 indicates that it is a small number.
Example 1.39

Combine the scientific notations: (i) 7 102 5.2 107 (ii) 3.7 105 2 103
Solution:

(i) 7 102 5.2 107 = 36.4 × 109 = 3.64 × 1010
(ii) 3.7 105 2 103 = 7.4 × 10–8
Example 1.40
Write the following scientific notations in standard form:
(i) 2.27 104 (ii) Light travels at 1.86 × 105 miles per second.
Solution:
(i) 2.27 104 0.000227.
(ii) Light travels at 1.86 × 105 miles per second = 186000 miles per second
Try these
1. Write in standard form: Mass of planet Uranus is 8.68 ´ 1025 kg.
2. Write in scientific notation: (i) 0.000012005 (ii) 4312.345 (iii) 0.10524
(iv)The distance between the Sun and the planet Saturn 1.4335´1012 miles.

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 1.6
7
(i) (−1)even integer is _____________. (iv) 2 ____________.
5
(ii) For a ¹ 0, a0 is ______________. 1
(v) ____________.
3 3 3
(iii) 4 5 __________.
1
(i) If 8 x = , the value of x is 22.
64
−1
1
(ii) The simplified form of (256) 4 × 42 is .
4

2
(iii) Using the power rule, 37 35 .
(iv) The standard form of 2 × 10–4 is 0.0002.
(v) The scientific form of 123.456 is 1.23456 ×10−2 .
3 -5 -3
  æ1ö æ -5 ö
3. Evaluate: (i)  1  (ii) çç ÷÷÷ (iii) ççç ÷÷÷ (iv) (2-5 ´27 ) ¸ 2-2 (v) (2-1 ´3-1 ) ¸ 6-2
 2  èç 2 ø è 6 ø
4 -2 -2 -3 -3
æ2ö æ5ö æ4ö æ4ö æ1ö
4. Evaluate: (i) çç ÷÷÷ ´ çç ÷÷÷ (ii) çç ÷÷÷ ¸ çç ÷÷÷ (iii) 27 ´ çç ÷÷÷
èç 5 ø èç 2 ø èç 5 ø èç 5 ø çè 2 ø
0
(ii) (2 + 3 ) ÷ 6 (iii) (3-1 + 4-2 + 5-3 )
−1 −1 −1
5. Evaluate: (i) (50 + 6-1 ) ´ 32
2 3 5 –2 2 92 ´73 ´25 28 × 2187

6. Simplify: (i) (3 ) × (2×3 ) × (18) (ii) (iii)
843 35 × 32
22 x-1 55 ´5-4 ´ 5x
7. Solve for x : (i) x +2 = 4 (ii) 12
= 5-5
2 5
8. Expand using exponents: (i) 6054.321 (ii) 897.14
9. Find the number in standard form for the following expansions:
(i) 8 ´104 + 7 ´103 + 6 ´102 + 5´101 + 2 ´1 + 4 ´10-2 + 7 ´10-4
(ii) 53103 1 53101 1 5310–1 1 5310–3
(iii) The radius of a hydrogen atom is 2.5 × 10–11 m
10. Write the following numbers in scientific notation:

(i) 467800000000 (ii) 0.000001972 (iii) 1642.398
(iv) Earth’s volume is about 1,083,000,000,000 cubic kilometres
(v) If you fill a bucket with dirt, the portion of the whole Earth that is in the bucket will be
0.0000000000000000000000016 kg
Numbers 45

www.tntextbooks.in

−1
11. By what number should (−4) be multiplied so that the product becomes 10-1 ?
2 −2 5 −5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 5 2 2
12. ( −2) × ( −2) = ____________.
−3 −2
−1 1
(A) (B) (C) 32 (D) –32
32 32
13. Which is not correct?
2 2 4 2 2
 −1  −1  1   −1  1
 −2
(A)   = 4 (B)   =   (C)   = 16 −1 (D) −   = 16 −1
 4   4   2  4  4
10 x
14. If -3
=109 , then x is ____________.
10
(A)4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 7
15. 0.0000000002020 in scientific form is ____________.
(A) 2.02 ´109 (B) 2.02 ×10−9 (C) 2.02 ×10−8 (D) 2.02 ×10−10
Exercise 1.7
Miscellaneous Practice Problems
3
1. If of a box of apples weighs 3 kg and 225 gm, how much does
4
a full box of apples weigh?
4 2
2. Mangalam buys a water jug of capacity 3 litre. If she buys another jug which is 2
5 3
times as large as the smaller jug, how many litre can the larger one hold?
25 16 10
3. Ravi multiplied and and he says that the simplest form of this product is
8 15 1 3
and Chandru says the answer in the simplest form is 3 . Who is correct? (or)
3
Are they both correct? Explain.
153 11
4. Find the length of a room whose area is sq.m and whose breadth is 2 m.
10 20
5. There is a large square portrait of a leader that covers an area of 4489 cm2. If each
side has a 2 cm liner, what would be its area?
6. A greeting card has an area 90 cm2. Between what two whole numbers is the length
of its side?
7. 225 square shaped mosaic tiles, each of area 1 square decimetre exactly cover a square
shaped verandah. How long is each side of the square shaped verandah?
8. If 3 1906624 ´ x = 3100, find x.
9. If 2m-1 + 2m+1 = 640, then find m.

www.tntextbooks.in
10. Give the answer in scientific notation:

A human heart beats at an average of 80 beats per minute. How many times does it beat
in i) an hour? ii) a day? iii) a year? iv) 100 years?
Challenging Problems
11. In a map, if 1 inch refers to 120 km, then find the distance between two cities B and
1 1
C which are 4 inches and 3 inches from the city A which lies between the cities
6 3
B and C.
12. Give an example and verify each of the following statements.
(i) The collection of all non-zero rational numbers is closed under division.
(ii) Subtraction is not commutative for rational numbers.
(iii) Division is not associative for rational numbers.
(iv) Distributive property of multiplication over subtraction is true for rational
numbers. That is, a (b − c ) = ab − ac .
(v) The mean of two rational numbers is rational and lies between them.
13. If 1 of a ragi adai weighs 120 grams, what will be the weight of 2 of the same
4 3
ragi adai?
2 1
14. If p + 2q = 18 and pq = 40 , find + .
p q
x 3
15. Find x if 5 × 3 = 21.
5 4
 1
1  
10
16. By how much does exceed ?
 10 
  11
11
17. A group of 1536 cadets wanted to have a parade forming a square design. Is it possible?
If it is not possible, how many more cadets would be required?
18. Evaluate: 286225 and use it to compute 2862.25 + 28.6225
19. Simplify: (3.769 × 105) + (4.21 × 105)
20. Order the following from the least to the greatest: 1625 , 8100 , 3500 , 4 400 , 2600
SUMMARY
a
zz A number that can be expressed in the form where a and b are integers and
b
b ≠ 0 is called a rational number.
zz All natural numbers, whole numbers, integers and fractions are rational numbers.
zz Every rational number can be represented on a number line.
zz 0 is neither a positive nor a negative rational number.
zz A rational number a is said to be in the standard form if its denominator b is a
b
positive integer and HCF (a,b)=1
Numbers 47

www.tntextbooks.in
zz There are unlimited numbers of rational numbers between two rational numbers.
zz Subtracting two rational numbers is the same as adding the additive inverse of the
second number to the first rational number.
zz Multiplying two rational numbers is the same as multiplying their numerators
and denominators separately and then writing the product in the standard form.
zz Dividing a rational number by another rational number is the same as multiplying
the first rational number by the reciprocal of the second rational number.
zz The following table is about the properties of rational numbers( ).
Multiplication is
Closure Commutative Associative
distributive over +/2
+    
2  × × 
×    -
÷ × × × -
zz 0 and 1 are respectively the additive and the multiplicative identities of rational
numbers.
zz The additive inverse for a is −a and vice – versa.
b b
zz The reciprocal or the multiplicative inverse of a rational number a is b since a × b = 1.
b a b a
zz A natural number n is called a square number, if we can find another natural
number m such that n = m2. 1
zz The square root of a number n, written as n (or) n 2 , is the number that gives n
when multiplied by itself.
zz The number of times a prime factor occurs in the square is equal to twice the
number of times it occurs in the prime factorization of the number.
zz For any two positive numbers a and b. we have
a a
(i) ab = a × b and (ii) (b 0)
b b
zz If you multiply a number by itself and then by itself again, the result is a cube number.
zz The cube root of a number is the value that when cubed gives the original number.
zz An expression that represents repeated multiplication of the same factor is called
a power.
zz The exponent corresponds to the number of times the base is used as a factor.
am
zz Laws of Exponents: (i) am × an = am + n (ii) n = a m-n (iii) (am)n = amn
a m
−m 1 m m m a m  a 
zz Other results: (i) a = 1 (ii) a = m
0
(iii) a × b = (ab) (iv) m =  
a b  b 
a
zz To write in scientific notation, we follow the form S × 10 where S is a number (integer
or integer with decimal) between 1 and 10, but not 10 itself, and a is a positive or
negative integer.

www.tntextbooks.in
ICT CORNER
Step-1 Open the Browser and type www.Geogebra.com (or) Through this activity you will know about
scan the QR CODE given below. the rational numbers, operations on them
and study their properties as well.
Step-2 Type Rational Numbers on the search column
Step-3 Move the numerator and denominator slide to show
the different rational numbers and click the number
line models to show the number line.
Step 1 Step 2
Web URL rational numbers (rational number links)

Web URL https://www.geogebra.org/m/n92AKzBF#material/ca5D7VbZ
*Pictures are indicatives only.
*If browser requires, allow Flash Player or Java Script to load the page.
ICT CORNER
Step-1 Open the Browser type the URL Link given below
Expected Outcome
(or) Scan the QR Code. GeoGebra work sheet named
“8th Standard III term” will open. Select the work
sheet named “Square root_prime factors”
Step-2 Click on “ NEW PROBLEM” and check the calculation.
Step 1 Step 2
Browse in the link

Numbers:
https://www.geogebra.org/m/xmm5kj9r or Scan the QR Code.
Numbers 49

www.tntextbooks.in
2 MEASUREMENTS
Learning Objectives
To know the parts of a circle.

To calculate the length of arc, area and circumference of a sector.
To calculate the area and the perimeter of combined plane figures.
To understand the representation of 3-D shapes in 2-D.
To understand the representation of 3-D objects with cubes.
2.1 Introduction
An important aspect in everyone’s day-to-day life is ‘to measure’. Measuring the
length of a rope, the distance between two places, finding the perimeter and area of plots
and lands, building the structures under specified measures etc., are a few of the many
situations where the concept of ‘measure’ is used.
It is said that the biggest invention by man is the wheel. The wheel is otherwise called
as the ‘cradle of invention’. What is the shape of a wheel? Circle, isn’t it? In the things we use,
apart from circles, we can also see different shapes like triangles, squares, rectangles etc.,
Measurements play a vital role in everyone’s life. Not only the persons who learns
proper mathematics in schools, but also the layman uses his logical thinking to apply the
concept of measurements when he needs. For example, a carpenter who carves out the
wooden wheels of a temple car wants to protect the outer surface by an iron strap. With
all his experience, he says that a 22 feet strap will be required for a 7 feet high (diameter)
wooden wheel.
MATHEMATICS ALIVE – AREA AND PERIMETER IN REAL LIFE
Sectors are used in manufacturing Combined shapes are used in the

the dining table construction of building
02_8th_Maths_Measurements_Chap 2.indd 50 20/11/2022 12:54:13

www.tntextbooks.in
We have already learnt how to find the perimeter and the area of shapes like circles,
triangles, squares, rectangles, trapeziums, parallelograms etc. In this chapter, we shall see
the parts of a circle and how to find the perimeter and the area of a sector and some
combined shapes.
Recap
The teacher asks the students to calculate the area of the circle of radius 7 cm. Many
students have solved it as in Method 1, but a few of them have done it as in Method 2.
Method 1: Method 2:
Area of the circle, A = pr 2 sq.units Area of the circle, A = pr 2 sq.units
22
= ×7×7 = 3.14×7×7
7
= 154 sq.cm = 153.86 sq.cm
Then, they had the following conversation:

Sudha : Which of these two answers is correct, Teacher ?
Teacher : Both answers are correct but only approximate.
Sudha : We get two answers for the same question. How is it possible, teacher?
Teacher : We can infact solve this exactly as π×7×7= 49π sq.cm.
Meena : When we find the area of a square, a rectangle etc., we all get unique answers,
but why is the area of a circle not unique ? Think
Teacher : What is the value of π ? 22
22 1. and 3.14 are
Meena : The value of π is or 3.14 7
7 rational numbers. Is ‘π’
22 a rational number? Why?
Teacher : Actually it is neither nor 3.14. They are
7 2. When is the ‘π’ day
only approximate values.
celebrated? Why?
Meena : Then, what is the exact value of π?
Teacher : Though π is the constant, it is a non-terminating and non-recurring decimal
number. So, we are not able to use its exact value and to make the calculations
22
easy, or 3.14 is used as the approximate value of π.
7
Meena : Is the area of a circle always approximate, teacher?
22
Teacher : No, it is an exact answer unless we substitute the value of π as or 3.14.
7
Meena : Then, for the above problem, 49π sq.cm is an exact answer whereas 154 sq.cm
and 153.86 sq.cm. are approximate answers. Am I right, teacher?
Teacher : Yes, you are right Meena.
Measurements 51

www.tntextbooks.in
The circumference of a circle is 2πr units, which can also be written as

πd units. As π =3.14 (approximately) and it is slightly more than 3, for some quick
guess, we shall say that a circle whose diameter is d units shall have its circumference
slightly more than three times its diameter.
For example,
If a round table of diameter of 3m is to be decorated by flower strings
around it, it will require a little more than 9m of flower strings.
2.2 Parts of a Circle

A circle is the path traced by a moving point so that its distance
from a fixed point is always constant. The fixed point of the circle is called
its ‘centre’ and the constant distance is called its ‘radius’.
Fig. 2.1
Further, if any two points on a circle are joined by a line
A
segment, then the line segment is called a ‘chord’. A chord divides a
us
di
Ra
circle into two parts. A chord which passes through the centre of a O
C
circle is called as a ‘diameter’. A diameter of a circle divides it into B Diameter
Chord
two equal parts. It is also the ‘longest chord’ of a circle. D E
Activity Fig. 2.2
1. Using a bangle, draw a circle on the paper and cut it. Then mark any two
points A and B on it and fold the circle so that the fold has A and B on it.
Now, this line segment represents a chord.
2. By paper folding, find two diameters and hence the centre of a circle.
3. Check whether the diameter of a circle is twice its radius.
2.2.1 Circular Arc and Circular Sector

Look at the glass bangle and the pizza given in
Fig. 2.3 carefully.
Though both are of circular shapes, what we
understand is that, the bangle indicates the boundary of
Fig. 2.3
the circle, whereas the pizza indicates the plane enclosed
within the boundary of the circle. Thus, it is clear that the
bangle indicates the circumference of the circle whereas A2
the pizza indicates the area of the circle.
From them, cut a part as shown in Fig. 2.4. B
A A1
Each of the glass bangle pieces represents the
circular arcs. Here, arc AB AB ( )
 is the smaller one and Fig. 2.4

www.tntextbooks.in
 ) is the larger one. Each of the parts of the pizza represents

arc BA ( BA Arc
the circular sectors. Here A1 is the minor sector and A2 is the major
sector. Sector
A part of the circumference of a circle is called a circular arc. D
t
en
The plane surface that is enclosed between two radii and the
gm
Se
circular arc of a circle is called a sector.
Fig. 2.5
Each part of a circle which is divided by a chord is called a segment.
Note Think
The part which The given circular
has a smaller arc is called figure is divided into
Major
as the ‘minor segment’ six equal parts. Can we
Segment
and the part which has a
call the equal parts as
larger arc is called as the Minor sectors? Why?
‘major segment’. Segment Fig. 2.6
Central Angle
The angle formed by a sector of a circle at its centre is called the central angle. The
vertex of the central angle of the sector is the centre of the circle. The two arms of it are
the radii. In the Fig. 2.7, the shaded sector has the central angle, AOB = q  (read as theta)
and its two arms OA and OB are the radii of the circle. B
The central angle of a circle is 360°. If a circle is divided into ‘n’

360
equal sectors, the central angle of each of the sectors is q° = . q°
n O r A
360
For example, the central angle of a semicircle = = 180 and
2
360
= = 90 .
the central angle of a quadrant of a circle
4 Fig. 2.7
Try these
Fill the central angle of the shaded sector (each circle is divided into equal
sectors)
q°
q° q° q°
Sectors
Central angle
 360 
θ° = q° =120°
 n 
Measurements 53

www.tntextbooks.in
2.2.2 Length of the arc and Area of the sector 90°

135° 45°
We have already learnt that a circle of radius ‘r’ units has
Central angle = 360°
Circumference of the circle = 2πr units 180° 0° or 360°
Area of the circle = πr Sq.units.
2
First, let us take a circle . If a circle is divided into

2 equal sectors we will get 2 semi-circles. The length of a 225° 315°
270°
semi-circular arc is half of the circumference of the circle
Fig. 2.8
and the area of the semi-circle is half of the area of the circle.
1 180
Length of the semi-circular arc = × 2pr = × 2pr units. 180° 180°
2 360
1 180
Area of the semi-circle = × pr 2 = 
× pr 2 sq.units.
2 360
Fig. 2.9
Smilarly, if a circle is divided into 3 equal sectors,
1 120
Length of the arc of this sector = × 2pr = × 2pr units
3 360 120°
1 2 120
Area of the sector = × pr = 
× pr 2 sq. units.
3 360
In the same way, if a circle is divided into 4 equal sectors, Fig. 2.10
1 90
Length of the arc of the circular quadrant = × 2pr = × 2pr units.
4 360 90°

1 90
Area of the quadrant = × pr 2 = 
× pr 2 sq.units
4 360
What do we know from this?
Fig. 2.11
If the ratio of the central angle of a sector to the central angle of
a circle is multiplied with the circumference and the area of the circle, we can find the
length of the arc of that sector and its area respectively.
That is, if we assume that the central angle of a sector of radius ‘r’ units as θ°,
q°
then, the ratio of the central angle q° to 360° is .
360
θ
Length of the arc, l = × 2πr units
360
θ
Area of the sector, A = 
× πr 2 sq.units.
360
Think
1 1 1 180° 120°
Instead of multiplying by , and , we shall multiply by ,
2 3 4 360° 360°
90°
and respectively. Why?
360°

www.tntextbooks.in
Note
1. If a circle of radius r units divided into n equal sectors, then the

1
Length of the arc of each of the sectors = × 2pr units and
n
1
Area of each of the sectors = × pr 2 sq.units
n
θ°
2. Also, the area of the sector is derived as = × πr 2
360°
1  θ° 
=  × 2πr  × r
2  360° 
1  lr
=  × l  × r = sq.units
2  2
B
2.2.3 Perimeter of a sector r
We already know that the total length of the boundary of a l
closed part is its perimeter, Isn’t it? What is the boundary of a O
sector? Two radii (OA and OB) and an arc AB .
( ) r
Fig. 2.12 A
So, the perimeter of a sector = length of the arc + length of two radii
P = l + 2r units
∴ Perimeter of a sector, P = l + 2r units
Tamil people always have a prominent role in the history of Mathematics.

They had recorded in the form of a song on how to find the area of a circle, a few
thousand years before itself, in the book titled ‘Kanakkathikaram’. (கணக்கதிகாரம்). The
song is as follows:
“வட்டத்தரை க�ொண்டு விட்டத்தரை தாக்கச்
சட்டெனத் த�ோன்றும் குழி ”
Meaning:
‘வட்டத்தரை’ represents half of the circumference and ‘விட்டத்தரை’ represents half
of the diameter which is the radius and ‘குழி’ represents the area. In this song, the Tamil
people had recorded that, if half the circumference is multiplied by half the diameter, the
area of the circle can be calculated.
Area of the circle = வட்டத்தரை × விட்டத்தரை
1 1 1 
= of circumference × of diameter =  × 2pr  × r
2 2 2
∴ Area of the circle, A = pr 2 sq.units
Measurements 55

www.tntextbooks.in
Note
r u n it s
l=p
1. The perimeter of a semi-circle
P = l+2r units
pr 2r (p 2)r units A r O r B B pr
l= units
2
2. The perimeter of a circular quadrant r
pr p 
P = l + 2r = + 2r =  + 2 r units O r A
2 2 
Example 2.1
The radius of a sector is 21cm and its central angle is 120 °. Find (i) the length of
 22  B
the arc (ii) area of the sector (iii) perimeter of sector.  p =  m
 7 21 c
Solution: O
Radius, r = 21 cm and central angle, θ = 120 °. 120°
θ°
(i) Length of the arc, l = × 2πr units
360°
120 22
2 21
360 7
= 44 cm (approximately) A
θ° Fig. 2.13
(ii) Area of the sector, A = × πr 2 sq.units.
360° Aliter:
120 22 Area of the sector
21 21
360 7 lr
A = sq.units
A = 462 sq.cm (approximately) 2
44 × 21
(iii) Perimeter of the sector, P = l + 2r units = = 462 cm2
2
= 44+2×21
= 44+42 = 86 cm (approximately)
Example 2.2
A circular shaped gymnasium ring of radius 35cm is divided into 5 equal arcs shaded
with different colours. Find the length of each of the arcs.
Solution:
Radius, r = 35 cm and n = 5.
1
Length of each of the arcs, l = × 2pr units
n
1
= × 2 × p × 35 = 14p cm. Fig. 2.14
5

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 2.3
A spinner of radius 7.5 cm is divided into 6 equal sectors. Find the area of each of the
sectors.
Solution:
Radius, r = 7.5 cm and n = 6.
1
Area of each of the sectors, A = × pr 2 sq. units
n
1
= × p × 7. 5 × 7. 5
6
= 9.375p sq. cm Fig. 2.15
Example 2.4
Kamalesh has a dining table, circular in shape of radius 70 cm whereas Tharun has
a circular quadrant dining table of radius 140 cm. Whose dining table has a greater
 22 
area?  p = 
 7
Solution:
Area of the dining table with Kamalesh = pr 2 sq. units
22
= × 70 × 70
7 Fig. 2.16
A = 15400 sq.cm (approximately.)
Area of the circular quadrant dining table with Tharun
1 1 22
= pr 2 = × × 140 × 140
4 4 7
A = 15400 sq.cm (approximately.)
We find that, the area of the dining tables of both of
them have the same area.
Fig. 2.17
Think
If the radius of a circle is doubled, what will happen to the area of the new circle
so formed?
Example 2.5
Four identical medals, each of diameter 7cm are placed as shown in
 22 
Fig. 2.18. Find the area of the shaded region between the medals.  p = 
 7
Fig. 2.18
Measurements 57

www.tntextbooks.in
1
= a2 − 4 × pr 2
Solution: 4
 1 22 7 7 
Diameter, d==( 7 ×cm,  4 × 4 × 7r =× 2 ×cm.
7) −therefore 
2
Area of the shaded region = Area of the square – 4 × Area of the circular quadrant
1
= a2 − 4 × pr 2
4

 1 22 7 7 
= (7 × 7) −  4 × × × × 
 4 7 2 2
= 49 –38.5 = 10.5 sq.cm. (approximately)
Exercise 2.1
(i) The ratio between the circumference and diameter of any circle is _______.
(ii) A line segment which joins any two points on a circle is a ___________.
(iii) The longest chord of a circle is __________.
(iv) The radius of a circle of diameter 24 cm is _______.
(v) A part of circumference of a circle is called as _______.
2. Match the following:
1 2
(i) Area of a circle - (a) pr
4
(ii) Circumference of a circle - (b) (p + 2)r
(iii) Area of the sector of a circle - (c) pr 2
(iv) Circumference of a semicircle - (d) 2 p r
θ°
(v) Area of a quadrant of a circle - (e) × πr 2
360°
3. Find the central angle of the shaded sectors (each circle is divided into equal sectors).
q° q° q°
Sectors q°
Central angle of each sector (q°)
4. For the sectors with given measures, find the length of the arc, area and perimeter.
(π=3.14)
(i) central angle 45º, r = 16 cm (ii) central angle 120º, d =12.6 cm
5. From the measures given below, find the area of the sectors.
(i) length of the arc = 48 m, r = 10 m (ii) length of the arc = 50 cm, r = 13.5 cm

www.tntextbooks.in
 22 
6. Find the central angle of each of the sectors whose measures are given below.  p = 
 7
(i) area = 462 cm2, r = 21 cm (ii) length of the arc = 44 m, r = 35 m
7. A circle of radius 120 m is divided into 8 equal sectors. Find the length of the arc of
each of the sectors.
8. A circle of radius 70 cm is divided into 5 equal sectors. Find the area of each of the
sectors.
9. Dhamu fixes a square tile of 30 cm on the floor. The tile has a sector
design on it as shown in the figure. Find the area of the sector.
(p = 3.14) .
10. A circle is formed with 8 equal granite stones as shown in the
figure each of radius 56 cm and whose central angle is 45º. Find

 22 
the area of each of the granite stones.  p = 
 7
2.3 Combined shapes

In our day-to-day life, we use infinitely many things with shapes like circle, triangle,
square, rectangle, rhombus etc., don’t we? We use them separately as well as with two or
three or more shapes combined together as shown in the following figures.
Glass window Model house Invitation card Locker
What do we observe from the above figures?

The shape of a glass window is like a semi-circle placed over a rectangle whereas the
front – facing wall of a model house looks like a triangle over a square.
Likewise, list the shapes used to make an invitation card and a locker.
Thus, two or more plane figures joined with the sides of same measure give rise to
combined shapes.
Measurements 59

www.tntextbooks.in
2.3.1 Perimeter of combined shapes

The perimeter of a combined shape is the sum of all the lengths of the sides that form
a closed boundary.
For example, observe the Fig. 2.19 which has a square of side a units and an equilateral
triangle of side a units combined together.
Though a square has 4 sides and an equilateral triangle has 3 sides,
when they are combined together, we will have a total of only 5 sides as the
boundary of the combined shape and not 7 sides. Isn’t it? So, the perimeter of
the combined shape, here is 5a units. a
2.3.2 Area of combined shapes Fig. 2.19
To find the area of a combined shape, split the combined shape into known
simpler shapes, find their area separately and then add them up. That is, the area of
combined shapes is nothing but the sum of all the areas of the simple shapes in it.
To find the area of the Fig.2.20, find the area of the square and the area of
the equilateral triangle separately and then add them up.
The combined shapes that we come across mostly in our day-to-day life a
Fig. 2.20
are irregular polygons. To find the area of the given irregular polygon, we must
identify the simple shapes in it, find their areas separately and then add them up.
For example, an irregular polygonal field given below can be split into known simpler
shapes as under and then its area can be found.
E D E D
(ii)
(i)
A G (iii)
C A C
F (iv) (v) H
B B
Fig. 2.21 Fig. 2.22
A closed plane figure formed by three or more sides is called a ‘polygon’ .Based
on the sides, some of the polygons are named as given below.
Number of sides 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Quadrilateral
Heptagon
Pentagon
Nonagon
Hexagon
Decagon
Octagon
Triangle
Name of the
Polygon
If all sides and all angles of a polygon are equal, then it is called as a regular polygon.
Examples: equilateral triangle, square etc., Other polygons are irregular polygons.
Examples: scalene triangle, rectangle etc.,

www.tntextbooks.in
Think
All the sides of a rhombus are equal. Is it a regular polygon?
The formulae to find the area and the perimeter of some plane figures learnt in the earlier class
are tabulated below and it will be helpful to find the area and the perimeter of combined figures.
S.No Shape Name Area Perimeter
(sq.units) (units)
A
1 Sum of all
1 h Triangle ×b×h three sides
2
B b C
A
Equilateral
2 3 2 3  3a
h
triangle a h = a
4  2 
B a C
C
D
d
1 Sum of all the
3 h1
h2 Quadrilateral × d × (h1 + h2 ) four sides
2
A B
D C
4 h a Parallelogram b×h 2(a + b)

A b B
D C
5 b Rectangle l ×b 2(l + b)
A l B
D b C
1 Sum of all the

6 h Trapezium × h × (a + b) four sides
2
A a B
D C
d1
7 Rhombus 1 4a
d2 ×d ×d
2 1 2
A a B
D C
8 Square a2 4a
A a B
Measurements 61

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 2.6
 22 
Find the perimeter and area of the given Fig.2.23.  p = 
 7
Solution: 3.5 cm
Radius of a circular quadrant, r = 3.5 cm and side of a square, a = 3.5 cm.

The given figure is formed by the joining of 4 quadrants of a circle
Fig. 2.23
with each side of a square. The boundary of the given figure consists of
4 arcs and 4 radii.
(i) Perimeter of the given combined shape
= 4 × length of the arcs of the quadrant of a circle + 4 × radius
 1 
=  4 × × 2pr  + 4r
 4 
 1 22 
=  4 × × 2 × × 3.5 + (4 × 3.5)
 4 7 
= 22 + 14 = 36 cm (approximately)
(ii) Area of the given combined shape
= area of the square + 4 × area of the quadrants of the circle
 1 
= a2 +  4 × pr 2 
 4 
 22 
= (3.5 × 3.5) +  × 3.5 × 3.5
 7 
A = 12.25+38.5 = 50.75 cm (approximately)
2
Example 2.7
Nishanth has a key-chain which is in the form of an equilateral triangle
and a semicircle attached to a square of side 5 cm as shown in the Fig. 2.24. Find
(
its area. p = 3.14, 3 = 1.732 )
Solution: 5 cm
Side of the square = 5 cm

Diameter of the semi-circle = 5 cm ⇒ Radius = 2.5 cm Fig. 2.24
Side of the equilateral triangle = 5 cm
∴ Area of the key-chain = area of the semi circle + area of the square
+ area of the equilateral triangle
1 2 3 2
pr + a2 + a =
2 4
1   3 
=  × 3.14 × 2.5 × 2.5 + (5 × 5) +  × 5 × 5
2   4 
= 9.881 + 25 + 10.83
= 45.64 cm2 (approximately)

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 2.8
A 3-fold invitation card is given with measures as in
the Fig. 2.25. Find its area.
16 cm
III
II
I
5 cm
Solution: 8 cm 8 cm 8 cm
Fig. 2.25
Figures I and II are trapeziums separately as well as combinedly.
The parallel sides of the combined trapezium (I and II) are 5 cm and 16 cm and its
height, h = 8 + 8 = 16 cm , length of the rectangle (III) = 16 cm and its breadth = 8 cm
∴ Area of the combined invitation card
= area of the combined trapezium + area of the rectangle

1
= × h ×(a + b) + l ×b
2

1
= ×16 ×(5 + 16) +16 × 8
2
= 168 + 128 = 296 cm2
Aliter:
Area of the invitation card
= area of the outer rectangle –

16 cm
area of the right angled triangle
11 cm
1
= l ×b − ×b × h
16 cm
III
2 II
I
5 cm
1
= 24 ×16 − ×11×16
2 8 cm 8 cm 8 cm
Fig. 2.26
= 384 − 88 = 296 cm2
Example 2.9
Seenu wants to buy a floor mat for his kitchen at home as
given in Fig. 2.27. If the cost of the mat is ` 20 per square foot, 7 feet
9f
ee
what will be the cost of the entire mat? t
et
2 fe
Solution:
The mat given in the figure can be split into two rectangles Fig. 2.27
as follows:
Measurements 63

www.tntextbooks.in
∴ Area of the entire mat
= area of the I rectangle + area of the II rectangle 5 ft 9 ft
2 ft
= l1 ×b1 + l2 ×b2
2 ft
= 5× 2 + 9 × 2 = 10 + 18 = 28 sq.feet
Fig. 2.28
Cost per sq. foot = ` 20
∴ The total cost of the entire mat = 28 × ` 20 = ` 560.
Try these
In the above example split the given mat into two trapeziums and verify your answer.
Example 2.10
Find the area of the shaded region in the square of side 10 cm as given in the
 22 
Fig. 2.29.  p = 
 7 III
Solution:
IV II
Mark the unshaded parts of the given figure as I, II, III and IV
I
Area of the I and III parts = Area of the square – Area of 2 semicircles 10 cm
Fig. 2.29
 1 
= a −  2 × pr 2  2
 2 
22
= 10 ×10 − × 5× 5 = 100 – 78.57 = 21.43 cm .
2
7
Similarly, the area of the II and IV parts = 21.43 cm2 .
∴ Area of the unshaded parts (I, II, III and IV)
= 21.43 ×2 = 42.86 cm2 (approximately)
∴ Area of the shaded part = area of the square – area of the unshaded parts
= 100 – 42.86 = 57.14 cm2 (approximately)
1. The
area of the unshaded regions in each of the squares of side a units are the
same in all the cases given below.

www.tntextbooks.in
2. If the biggest circle is cut from a square of side ‘a’ units, then the remaining area in
3 2  22 
the square is approximately a sq.units.  p = 
14  7
11 2
3. The area of the biggest circle cut out from the square of ‘a’ units = a sq. units
14
(approximately)
22
4. In the given figure if p = , the area of the unshaded part of a square
7
3
of side a units is approximately a2 sq.units and that of the shaded part
7
4 2
is approximately a sq.units.
7
E
Example 2.11 D
(I) 6 m (II) 4 m (III)
Find the area of an irregular polygon field whose
5m 8m 5m 8m
measures are as given in the Fig. 2.30. A F G H C
(V) (IV)
Solution: 10 m
The given field has four triangles (I, III, IV and V)

and a trapezium (II). B
1 1 Fig. 2.30
Area of the triangle (I) = × b × h = × 5 × 6 = 15 m2
2 2
1 1
Area of the trapezium (II) = h (a + b ) = × 13 × (6 + 4 ) = 65 m2
2 2
1 1 32
Area of the triangle (III) = ×b×h = ×8× 4 = = 16 m2
2 2 2
1 1
Area of the triangle (IV) = × b × h = × 13 × 10 = 65 m2
2 2
1 1
Area of the triangle (V) = × b × h = × 13 × 10 = 65 m2
2 2
∴ The total area of the field = 15 + 65 + 16 + 65 + 65 = 226 m2
Exercise 2.2
 22 
1. Find the perimeter and area of the figures given below.  p = 
 7
3.5 cm
(i) (ii)
7m
6 cm
10 m
Measurements 65

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Find the area of the shaded part in the following figures. ( p = 3.14 )
7 cm
(i) (ii)
10 cm 8 cm
3. Find the area of the combined figure given which is got by the
6 cm
joining of two parallelograms.
4. Find the area of the combined figure given, formed by joining a semicircle 6 cm
of diameter 6 cm with a triangle of base 6 cm and height 9 cm. ( p = 3.14 )
9 cm
70 cm
5. The door mat which is hexagonal in shape has the following 90 cm
70 cm
measures as given in the figure. Find its area.
6. A rocket drawing has the measures as given in the 20 cm

50 cm
30 cm
20 cm
figure. Find its area.
120 cm
7. Find the area of the irregular polygon shaped fields given below.
E
8m
10m
H
6m F 8m
A G 5m D
3m
8m
2.4 Three dimensional (3-D) shapes

Trace the outline of a ` 2 coin, ` 10 note and a square shaped biscuit on a paper.
Fig. 2.31

www.tntextbooks.in
What shapes have you traced? A circle, a rectangle and a square. Isn’t it? These shapes
represents the plane figures. Also, these plane figures have two dimensions namely length and
breadth. Now, you place some two rupee coins, some ten rupee notes and some square shaped
biscuits respectively on the drawn shapes as shown in the figure.
Fig. 2.32
What do you get now? A cylinder, a cuboid and a cube. Isn’t it? These shapes do not
lie completely on the plane and they occupy some space also. That is, they have the third
dimension namely the height along with the dimensions length and breadth. Thus, the shapes
which have three dimensions namely length, breadth and height (depth) are called three
dimensional shapes, simply called as 3-D shapes. Some examples of 3-D shapes are
Cube Cuboid Prism Triangular Pyramid
Square Pyramid Cylinder Cone Sphere

Fig. 2.33
2.4.1 Faces, Edges and Vertices

Observe the following shape. What is it? A cube. A cube is made of six square shaped
planes. These 6 square shaped planes of the cube are known as its faces.
Top
Back
Right
Left Bottom Right Top
Front
Front
Fig. 2.34
A line segment which connects any two faces of a cube is called as Edge and each
corner point where three edges meet is called as Vertex. So, a cube has 6 faces, 12 edges and
8 vertices.
Measurements 67

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
Tabulate the number of faces (F), vertices (V) and edges (E) for the following
polyhedrons. Also find F+V–E
Solid Name F V E F+V–E
Cube 6 8 12
Cuboid
Triangular Prism
Square Pyramid
Triangular Pyramid
What do you observe from the above table? We observe that, F+V–E = 2 in all
the cases. This is true for any polyhedron and this relation F+V–E = 2 is known as
Euler’s formula.
2.4.2 Nets for building three dimensional (3-D) shapes

When we buy sweets, a shop keeper picks a flat
shaped card which has some flips and makes a
rectangular shaped box (cuboid) by folding it as
shown in the figure. Then, he arranges the sweets
in the box and gives it to us.
The flat shaped card already designed for
making the box excluding flaps (dotted lines) is
known as a net.
For example, from the following nets we
Fig. 2.35
can build cubes and square pyramids.
Nets for cubes Nets for square pyramids

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
Draw a line to match the following shapes to their relevant nets.
2.4.3 Drawing 3-D shapes using isometric dot sheets and grid sheets
Activity
1. Draw each of the given solid figures on an isometric dot sheet
2. Draw each of the given solid figures on a grid paper
Measurements 69

www.tntextbooks.in
2.4.4 Cross section of solid shapes

When we cut the vegetables in cross section for
cooking purpose, we see some plane figures in it. For
example, the cross section of a carrot and a plantain
stem is a circle. Fig. 2.36
In the same way, we can see squares and
rectangles in the cross section of a bread loaf and
bricks etc.,
Fig. 2.37
Activity
Draw and name the two dimensional shapes (2-D) which you get in the cross
section of the following solid shapes.
Solids
2-D Shape
Name Square
2.4.5 3-D shapes in different views

A 3-D object may look different from different positions. View of a 3D shape is what
you see while observing the object from different positions. Some of the views are front view,
top view and side view. The different views of some of the objects are as shown below.
Object Front View Top View Side View
T
S
F
T
F
T

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 2.3
(i) The three dimensions of a cuboid are ____, _____ and ____.
(ii) The meeting point of more than two edges in a polyhedron is called as ______.
(iii) A cube has __________ faces.
(iv) The cross section of a solid cylinder is __________.
(v) If a net of a 3-D shape has six plane squares, then it is called ______.
2. Match the following:
(i) - (a) Cylinder
(ii) - (b) Cuboid
(iii) - (c) Triangular Prism
(iv) - (d) Square Pyramid
3. Which 3-D shapes do the following nets represent? Draw them.

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)
4. For each solid, three views are given. Identify for each solid, the corresponding Top,
Front and Side (T, F and S) views.
Solid Three views
T
F
T
S
F
T
Measurements 71

www.tntextbooks.in
5. Verify Euler’s formula for the table given below.

S.No. Faces Vertices Edges
(i) 4 4 6
(ii) 10 6 12
(iii) 12 20 30
(iv) 20 13 30
(v) 32 60 90
Exercise 2.4
1. Two gates are fitted at the entrance of a library. To open the
gates easily, a wheel is fixed at 6 feet distance from the wall
to which the gate is fixed. If one of the gates is opened to
90º, find the distance moved by the wheel (p = 3.14) .
2. With his usual speed, if a person covers a circular track of radius 150 m in 9 minutes,
find the distance that he covers in 3 minutes (p = 3.14) .
5c
3. Find the area of the house drawing given in the figure.
m
10 cm
6 cm 8 cm
4. Draw the top, front and side view of the following solid shapes
T
T
(i) (ii)
S S
F F
Challenging problems
5. Guna has fixed a single door of width 3 feet in his room where as Nathan has fixed a
double door, each of width 1 1 feet in his room. From the closed position, if each of
2
the single and double doors can open up to 120 , whose door takes a minimum area?
6. In a rectangular field which measures 15 m × 8m, cows are tied with a rope of length
3m at four corners of the field and also at the centre. Find the area of the field where
no cows can graze. (p = 3.14)
7. Three identical coins each of diameter 6 cm are placed as shown. Find
the area of the shaded region between the coins. (p = 3.14) ( 3 =1.732)

www.tntextbooks.in
8. Using Euler’s formula, find the unknowns.
S.No. Faces Vertices Edges

(i) ? 6 14
(ii) 8 ? 10
(iii) 20 10 ?
SUMMARY
zz If any two points on a circle are joined by a line segment, then the line segment is called
a ‘chord’.
zz A diameter of a circle divides it into two equal parts. It is the longest chord of a circle.
zz A part of the circumference of a circle is called the circular arc.
zz The plane surface that is enclosed between two radii and the circular arc of a circle is
called a ‘sector’.
zz The angle made by the sector with the centre of the circle is called the ‘central angle’.
zz The perimeter of a combined shape is the sum of all the lengths of the sides that form a
closed boundary.
zz The area of combined shapes is nothing but the sum of all areas of the simpler shapes in it.
zz The shapes which have three dimensions namely length, breadth and height are called
three dimensional shapes (or) simply called as 3-D shapes.
zz A cube has 6 faces, 12 edges and 8 vertices.
ICT CORNER
“Through this activity you will

Step-1 Open the Browser and type www.Geogebra.com (or)scan the know about how to find the
QR CODE given below. perimeter and area of the sectors.”
Step-2 Type Area of sector on the search column

Step-3 Move the radius slide and degree slide. You will get various
results.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Go through the remaining worksheets given for this chapter
Web URL Measurement (measurements links)

https://www.geogebra.org/m/FSqNDNxN
Measurements 73

www.tntextbooks.in
Y
2
II Quadrant I Quadrant
(-,+) 1 (+,+)
3 ALGEBRA
(0,0)
X' -2 -1 O 1 2 X
-1
III Quadrant IV Quadrant
(-,-) -2 (+,-)
Y'
Learning Objectives
To recall addition and subtraction of expressions.

To know how to multiply algebraic expressions with integer co-efficients
To know how to divide algebraic expressions by monomials.
To recall the identities (a + b)2 ,(a − b)2 ,(a2 − b2 ) and (x + a)(x + b) and able to apply
them in problems.
To understand the identities (a + b)3 ,(a − b)3 ,(x + a)(x + b)(x + c) and apply them in
problems.
3
To recognize expressions that are factorizable of the type (a + b) and (a − b)3 .
To solve word problems that involve linear equations.
To know how to plot the points in the graph.
To draw graphs of simple linear equations.
Recap
In our earlier classes, we have learnt about constants, variables, like terms, unlike
terms, co-efficients, numerical and algebraic expressions. Later, we have done some basic
operations like addition and subtraction on algebraic expressions. Now, we shall recollect
them and extend the learning.
Further, we are going to learn about multiplication and division of algebraic

expressions and algebraic identities.
Answer the following questions :

1. Write the number of terms in the following expressions
(i) x + y + z − xyz (ii) m2n2c
(iii) a2b2c − ab2c 2 + a2bc 2 + 3abc (iv) 8 x 2 − 4 xy + 7 xy 2
2. Identify the numerical co-efficient of each term in the following expressions.

x 2y
(i) 2 x 2 − 5xy + 6 y 2 + 7 x − 10 y + 9 (ii) + − xy + 7
3 5
8th_Maths_English Medium_Chapter 3.indd 74 23/11/2022 15:39:48

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Pick out the like terms from the following:
Like Terms
x 2 , 3 y , 3a2b2 , 4 x , x 2 y , 9 p2 ,
The variables of the
2
−3 y , 4ba , 9ab, 7q, 8 p, − 25x terms along with their
−5x 2 , 2 x , 9 x 2 y , − 9 p2 , qp2 , 2xy2 respective exponents must be same
2 Examples : x 2 , 4 x 2
−10 p2 , q, 3 y 2 x ,
p, − x 2 , a 2b2,
3 a2b2 , −5a2b2
−ab, a 2b, 2ba, m3n2 , 5m3n2
2m, −7m
4. Add : 2x, 6y, 9x, – 2y

5. Simplify : (5x 3 y 3 − 3x 2 y 2 + xy + 7) + (2 xy + x 3 y 3 − 5 + 2 x 2 y 2 )
6. The sides of a triangle are 2 x − 5 y + 9, 3 y + 6 x − 7 and −4 x + y + 10 . Find the perimeter
of the triangle .
b )
7. Subtract −2mn from 6mn. (2a −
?
8. Subtract 6a2 − 5ab + 3b2 from 4a2 − 3ab + b2 .
9. The length of a log is 3a + 4b − 2 and a piece (2a − b) is removed − 2
4b
from it. What is the length of the remaining log? 3a
+
10. A tin had x litres of oil. Another tin had (3x 2 + 6 x − 5) litres of oil.
The shopkeeper added (x+7) litres more to the second tin. Later, he sold (x2+6) litres
of oil from the second tin. How much oil was left in the second tin?
MATHEMATICS ALIVE – ALGEBRA IN REAL LIFE
Linear equations are used for speed, Graphs are used for drawing
distance, time and average speed
Algebra 75

www.tntextbooks.in
3.1 Introduction
Let us consider the given situation that Ganesh planted saplings
in his garden. He planted 10 rows each with 5 saplings. Can you say
how many saplings were planted?
Yes, we know that, the total number of saplings is the product
of number of rows and number of saplings in each row.
Hence, the total number of saplings = 10 rows × 5 saplings in each row = 10 × 5 = 50 saplings
Likewise, David planted some saplings. Not knowing the total number of rows and saplings
in each row, how will you express the total number of saplings?
For the unknown quantities, we call them as ‘x’ and ‘y’. Therefore, the total number
of saplings = ‘x’ rows × ‘y’ sapling in each row
= ‘x × y’ = xy saplings
Let us extend this situation, Rahim planted saplings where the number of rows are
(2 x + 5x − 7) and each row contains 3 y 2 saplings. Now the above idea will help us to find
2
the total number of saplings planted by Rahim.

The total number of saplings = (2 x 2 + 5x − 7) rows × 3 y 2 saplings in each row.
= 3 y 2 × (2 x 2 + 5x − 7)
How do we find the product of the above algebraic expression?
Now,we will learn to find the product of algebraic expressions.
Note
A polynomial is an expression containing two or more algebraic terms. In a
polynomial all variables are raised to only whole number powers.
a2 + 2ab + b2 4 x 2 + 3x − 7
A polynomial cannot contain :
2 5
Polynomial 1) Division by a variable. Eg. 4 x is not a polynomial.
1 x
2) Negative exponents. Eg. 7x–2 + 5x – 6 is not a polynomial.
1
3) Fractional exponents. Eg. 3x + 3
4x 2 + 5 is not a polynomial.
An expression which contains only one term is called a monomial. Examples:
Monomial
4 x , 3x 2 y , − 2 y 2 .
An expression which contains only two terms is called a binomial.
Binomial Examples: 2 x + 3, 5 y 2 + 9 y , a2b2 + 2b .
An expression which contains only three terms is called a trinomial.
Trinomial Examples : 2a2b −8ab + b2 , m2 −n2 + 3 .

www.tntextbooks.in
3.2 Multiplication of Algebraic Expressions

While doing the product of algebraic expressions, we should follow the steps given below.
Step 1: Multiply the signs of the terms. That is, the product of two like signs are positive
and the product of two unlike signs are negative.
Like signs (+ ) × (+ ) = + ( −) × ( −) = +
Unlike signs (+ ) × ( −) = − ( −) × (+ ) = −
Step 2: Multiply the corresponding co-efficients of the terms. Think

Step 3: Multiply the variable factors by using laws of exponents. Every algebraic
If ‘x’ is a variable and m, n are positive integers then, expression is a
polynomial. Is this
m n m+n
x ×x =x statement true? Why?
For example, x 3 × x 4 = x 3+ 4 = x 7
A polynomial is a special kind of algebraic expression. The difference between

an algebraic expression and a polynomial is,
Algebraic Expression Polynomial

May contains whole numbers,
contains only whole numbers
fractions, negative numbers as the
as the power of their variables.
power of their variables.
Example: 4 x 2 − 3x + 9
Example: 4 x 3/2 − 3x + 9
5 2 2 y6 + 5 y3 − 3
2 y 2 + − 3 , 3x − 4 x + 1
y
Note
Product of two terms is represented by the symbols ( ), dot (.) or × .
For example,
multiplying 4 x 2 and xy can be written in any one of the following ways.
(4 x 2 )(xy ) 4 x 2 × xy 4 x 2 (xy ) (4 x 2 ) × xy 4 x 2 ⋅ xy
3.2.1 Multiplication of two or more monomials

Consider that, Geetha buys 3 pens each @ `5, how much she has
to pay to the shopkeeper?
Geetha has to pay to the shopkeeper = 3 × `5
= `15
Algebra 77

www.tntextbooks.in
If there are ‘x’ pens and the cost of each pen is ` ‘y’,
then the cost of (3x 2 ) pens bought by Geetha @ ` 5y @ - at the rate of
= (3x 2 ) × 5 y
= (3 × 5)(x 2 × y )
= ` 15x2y
Example 3.1
If the length and breadth of a rectangular painting are
3
4 xy and 3x 2 y . Find its area.
Solution:
Area of the rectangular painting, A = (l × b) sq.units
3x 2 y
= (4 xy 3 ) × (3x 2 y )
= (4 × 3)(x × x 2 )( y 3 × y )
4 xy 3
A = 12 x 3 y 4 sq.units
Example 3.2
Find the product of 2 x 2 y 2 , 3 y 2 z and – z 2 x 3 Try these
Solution:
Find the product of
We have, (2 x 2 y 2 ) × (3 y 2 z ) × ( − z 2 x 3 )
(i) 3ab2 , −2a2b3
2 3 2 2 2
= (+ ) × (+ ) × (−)(2 × 3 × 1)(x × x )( y × y )(z × z ) (ii) 4 xy , 5 y 2 x ,(− x 2 )
= −6 x 5 y 4 z 3 (iii) 2m, −5n, −3 p
3.2.2 Multiplication of a polynomial by a monomial
If there are ‘a’ shops and each shop has ‘x’ apples in 8 baskets and ‘y’ oranges in 3 baskets
and ‘z’ bananas in 5 baskets, then the total number of apples, oranges and bananas are
= a × (8 x + 3 y + 5z )
= a(8 x ) + a(3 y ) + a(5z ) monomial × monomial = monomial
binomial × monomial = binomial
(using distributive law).
binomial × binomial = binomial/polynomial
= 8ax + 3ay + 5az polynomial × monomial = polynomial
Note
If a is a constant, x and y are variables then a(x + y ) = ax + ay
Distributive law For example, 5(x + y ) = 5x + 5 y

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.3
Think
Multiply 3x 2 y and (2 x 3 y 3 − 5x 2 y + 9 xy ) Why 3+(4x–7y)≠ 12x−21y ?
Solution:
Now, (3x 2 y ) × (2 x 3 y 3 − 5x 2 y + 9 xy )
= 3x 2 y(2 x 3 y 3 ) − 3x 2 y(5x 2 y ) + 3x 2 y(9 xy )

multiplying each term of the polynomial by the monomial
= (3 × 2)(x 2 × x 3 )( y × y 3 ) − (3 × 5)(x 2 × x 2 )( y × y ) + (3 × 9)(x 2 × x )( y × y )

= 6 x 5 y 4 − 15x 4 y 2 + 27 x 3 y 2
Example 3.4
Ram deposited ‘x’ number of `2000 notes, ‘y’ number of `500 notes, ‘z’ number
of `100 notes in a bank and Velan deposited ‘3xy’ times of amount of what Ram had
deposited. How much amount did Velan deposit in the bank?
Solution:
Amount deposited by Ram
= (x × ` 2000 + y × ` 500 + z × ` 100)
= `( 2000 x + 500 y + 100z )
Amount deposited = 3xy times × Amount deposited
by Velan by Ram
= 3xy × (2000 x + 500 y + 100z )
=`

= (3 × 2000)(x × x × y ) + (3 × 500)(x × y × y ) + (3 × 100)(x × y × z )
= `(6000 x 2 y + 1500 xy 2 + 300 xyz )
Try these
Multiply
(i) (5x + 7x – 3) by –4x2
2
(ii) (10x – 7y + 5z) by 6xyz
(ii) (ab+3bc –5ca) by 3a2bc (iv) (4m2 – 3m + 7) by –5m3
3.2.3 Multiplication of two binomials

Consider that a rectangular flower bed whose length is decreased by 5 units from the
original length and whose breadth is increased by 3 units to the original breadth. What is
the area of the rectangular flower bed?
Area of the rectangle = l × b
Here, area of the rectangular flower bed A = (l − 5) × (b + 3) sq.units
b+3
How do we multiply this?

Now, let us learn how to multiply two binomials. l–5
Algebra 79

www.tntextbooks.in
If (x + y ) and ( p + q) are two binomials, we can find their product as given below,
(i) H
orizontal distributive (ii) V
ertical distributive (iii) Grid approach
approach approach
x+y × x y
( x + y ) ( p + q) = x ( p + q) + y ( p + q) p+q p xp yp
xq + yq q xq yq
= xp + xq + yp + yq xp + yp
= xp +xq + yp +yq = xp + xq + yp + yq
(iv) FOIL approach

Outer Last
We can do it directly like, (x+y) (p+q) = x(p)+ x(q)+ y(p)+ y(q)
Firsts Inner
Aliter
So, the above area of the rectangle = (l − 5) × (b + 3)
By grid approach
(By horizontal distributive approach) = l(b + 3) − 5(b + 3)
× l –5
A = (lb + 3l − 5b − 15) sq.u
b lb –5b
Let us consider one more example. Consider the given 3 3l –15
figure , In the square OABC,
= (lb + 3l − 5b − 15)
OA= 4 units ; OC =4 units
The area of the square OABC = 4 × 4
F E
A = 16 sq.units
y 4 B
C
If the sides of the square are increased by ‘x’ units and
4+y
‘y’ units respectively,then we get the rectangle ODEF whose sides 4 4

are OD=(4+x) units and OF=(4+y) units.
Now, the area of the rectangle ODEF = (4+x) (4+y) O 4 A x D
4+x
(by FOIL approach) A = 16+ 4y + 4x + xy sq. units.
(all are unlike terms andso, we can’t add)
Example 3.5
Aliter
Multiply (2 x + 5 y ) and (3x − 4 y )
By grid approach
Solution: × 2x 5y
By horizontal distributive approach, 3x 6x2 15xy
–4y –8xy –20y2
(2 x + 5 y ) (3x − 4 y ) = 2 x (3x − 4 y ) + 5 y (3x − 4 y ) = 6 x 2 − 8 xy + 15xy − 20 y 2
= 6 x 2 − 8 xy + 15xy − 20 y 2 = 6 x 2 + 7 xy − 20 y 2
= 6 x 2 + 7 xy − 20 y 2 (simplify the like terms)

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
Think
Multiply
(i) (a − 5) and (a + 4) (iv) (2 x + 3)(x + 4) (i) In 3x2 (x4–7x3+2),
what is the highest power
(ii) (a + b) and (a − b) (v) (3x + 7)( x −5) in the expression?
(ii) Is –5y2 +2y–6 = –(5y2 +2y–6)?
(iii) (m4 + n4 ) and (m − n) (vi) (x − 2)(6 x − 3)
If not, correct the mistake.
Exercise 3.1
1. Complete the table.
× 2x 2 −2xy x 4 y3 2xyz (__)xz 2
x4
(___) 4x5 y 4
−x 2 y
2 y 2z −10 xy 2 z 3
−3xyz
(___) −14 xyz 2
2. Find the product of the terms.

(i) −2mn , (2m)2 , −3mn (ii) 3x 2 y , −3xy 3 , x 2 y 2
3. If l = 4 pq 2 , b = −3 p2q , h = 2 p3q 3 then, find the value of l × b × h .
4. Expand
(i) 5x(2 y − 3) (ii) −2 p(5 p2 − 3 p + 7)
(iii) 3mn(m3n3 − 5m2n + 7mn2 ) (iv) x 2 (x + y + z ) + y 2 (x + y + z ) + z 2 (x − y − z )
5. Find the product of

(i) (2 x + 3)(2 x − 4) (ii) ( y 2 − 4)(2 y 2 + 3 y )
(iii) (m2 − n)(5m2n2 − n2 ) (iv) 3(x − 5) × 2(x − 1)
6. Find the missing term.

(i) 6 xy × _________ = −12 x 3 y (ii) _________ × (−15m2n3 p) = 45m3n3 p2
(iii) 2 y(5x 2 y − ___ + 3 ___) = 10 x 2 y 2 − 2 xy + 6 y 3
Algebra 81

www.tntextbooks.in
7. Match the following.

a) 4 y 2 × −3 y (i) 20 x 2 y − 20 x
b) −2 xy(5x 2 − 3) (ii) 5x 3 − 5xy 2 + 5x 2 y
c) 5x(x 2 − y 2 + xy ) (iii) 4x2 − 9
d) (2 x + 3)(2 x − 3) (iv) −12 y 3
e) 5x(4 xy − 4) (v) −10 x 3 y + 6 xy
A) iv, v, ii, i, iii B) v, iv, iii, ii, i C) iv, v, ii, iii, i D) iv, v, iii, ii, i
8. A car moves at a uniform speed of ( x + 30) km/hr. Find the distance covered by the
car in ( y + 2) hours. (Hint: distance = speed × time).

9. The product of 7 p3 and (2 p2 )2 is
(A) 14 p12 (B) 28 p7 (C) 9 p7 (D) 11 p12
10. The missing terms in the product −3m3n × 9(__) = _________ m4n3 are
(A) mn2 , 27 (B) m2n, 27 (C) m2n2 , −27 (D) mn2 , −27
11. If the area of a square is 36 x 4 y 2 then, its side is ____________

(A) 6 x 4 y 2 (B) 8 x 2 y 2 (C) 6 x 2 y (D) −6 x 2 y
12. If the area of a rectangle is 48m2n3 and whose length is 8mn2 then, its breadth is__.
(A) 6 mn (B) 8m2n (C) 7m2n2 (D) 6m2n2
13. If the area of a rectangular land is (a2 − b2 ) sq.units whose breadth is (a − b) then, its
length is__________
(A) a − b (B) a + b (C) a2 − b (D) (a + b)2
3.3 Division of Algebraic Expressions

In the previous sessions, we have learnt how to add, subtract and multiply algebraic
expressions. Now, we are going to learn about another basic operation ‘division’ on
algebraic expressions. We know that the division is the reverse operation of multiplication.
Now, the cost of 10 balls at the rate of `5 each = 10 × 5
= `50
whereas if we have `50 and we want to buy 10 balls then,
50
the cost of each ball is =
10
= `5

www.tntextbooks.in
What we have seen above is division on numbers. But how will you divide an algebraic
expression by another algebraic expression?
Of course, the same procedure has to be followed for the algebraic expressions with
the help of laws of exponents.
If x is a variable and m, n are constants, then x m ÷ x n = x m−n where m > n .
3.3.1 Division of a monomial by another monomial Think

4
Dividing a monomial 10 p by another monomial Are the following correct?
3
2 p , we get x3 8 3 5
(i) 8 x x
x
10p4 ÷ 2p3 10m4
5 (ii) =0
10 p 4 10 × p × p × p × p 10m4
= (expansion of power)
2 p3 2× p× p× p (iii) When a monomial is divided
=5p by itself, we will get 1?
However, to divide we can also follow laws of exponents as,
5
10 p 4
= 5 p 4 −3 xm
2p 3
n
= x m −n
x
= 5p
Example 3.6
Velu pastes ‘ 4xy ’ pictures in one page of his scrap book.
How many pages will he need to paste 100 x 2 y 3 pictures? (x, y are
positive integers)
Solution:
Total number of pictures = 100 x 2 y 3
Pictures in one page = 4xy
Total number of pictures
Total number of pages needed =
pictures in one page
25
100 x 2 y 3
= = 25x 2−1 y 3−1
4 xy
= 25xy 2 pages
Try these
Divide
(i) 12x 3y 2 by x2y (ii) −20a5b2 by 2a 3b 7 (iii) 28a 4 c 2 by 21ca 2
22 33
√6 x62xy2 3y 3
(iv) (3(x3xy )y )√by mm
(v) 6464 4 4 2 23 3
(n(n) )÷by÷4m2 22 2
4mnn 2 22 23 3
÷(8(x82xy22y)2 )2
(vi) (8(x8 xy y) )÷by
2 2
2 23 30 0 (x(3x)3 )
(vii) 8181 2 24 4
p pq q÷by p pq q
÷ 8181 2 24 4 (vii) (4(x4 xy y) )÷by÷ 6 6
xx
Algebra 83

www.tntextbooks.in
3.3.2 Division of an algebraic expression (polynomial) by a monomial

To divide a polynomial by a monomial, divide each term of the polynomial by the
monomial.
Example 3.7 Think

Divide : (5 y 3 − 25 y 2 + 8 y ) by 5y Are the following divisions correct?
Solution: 4y + 3 5m2 + 9
(i) =y+3 (ii) =5m2
We have, (5 y 3 − 25 y 2 + 8 y ) ÷ 5 y 4 9
3 2 2x 2 + 8
5 y − 25 y + 8 y (iii) = 2x2 + 2. If not , correct it.
= 4
5y
3 5 2
5y 25 y 8y
= − +
5y 5y 5y
8 Try these
= y 3−1 − 5 y 2−1 +
5 (i) (16 y 5 − 8 y 2 ) ÷ 4 y
8
= y2 − 5 y +
5 (ii) ( p5q 2 + 24 p3q − 128q 3 ) ÷ 6q
2 2
(iii) (4m n + 9n m + 3mn) ÷ 4mn
3.4 Avoid Some Common Errors
S.No Error Correct Reason
1. 2 xx = 2 x 2 xx = 2 × x1 × x1 = 2 x 2 Product of variables
2. −3x − 4 x = −1x −3x − 4 x = −7 x Same sign factors should be
added and put the same sign.
3. 4 y + 3y + y = 7 y 4 y + 3y + y = 8y y is same as 1y,co-efficient
1 of a term is usually not
written.
4. 5x + 3x = 8 x 2 5x + 3x = 8 x When we add or subtract
like terms, add or subtract
only the co-efficient of the
like terms, keep the variable
as it is.
5. 9 x + 1 = 10 x 9x + 1 = 9x + 1 Unlike terms cannot be
added or subtracted
6. 3x + 4 y = 7 xy 3x + 4 y = 3x + 4 y Unlike terms cannot be
added
7. 3(4 x + 9) 3(4 x + 9) = 12 x + 27 3 is common factor multiply
= 12 x + 9 both the terms.
8. 5 + (3 y − 4) 5 + (3 y − 4) Addition symbol is in
= 15 y − 20 = 5 + 3y − 4 between the terms, not
multiplication

www.tntextbooks.in
9. (−7 x 2 + 2 x + 3) −7 x 2 + 2 x + 3 Taking (–1) as common, we

= −(7 x 2 + 2 x + 3) = −(7 x 2 − 2 x − 3) will have change in sign for
all the terms.
10. (2 x )2 = 2 x 2 (2 x )2 = 22 × x 2 = 4 x 2 Power is common for all
the basic factors within the
bracket
11. (2 x − 5)(3x − 4) (2 x − 5)(3x − 4) Distributive law should be
= 2 x(3x − 4) − 5(3x − 4) followed
= 6 x 2 + 20
= 6 x 2 − 8 x − 15x + 20
= 6 x 2 − 23x + 20
12. (x − 9)2 = x 2 − 92 (x − 9)2 = (x − 9)(x − 9) Product of binomials (a+b) ,
2
= x 2 − 2(x )(9) + 92 (a-b)2 use identities

= x 2 − 18 x + 81
13. p2 p2 1 1 Law of exponents
5
= p5−2 = p3 5
= 5−2 = 3 x m ÷ x n = x m−n when m > n
p p p p
14. x2 + 5 x2 + 5 x2 5 Divide each term of the
= x2 = + expressions by the
5 5 5 5
denominator
x2
= +1
5
15. 5m2 5m2 a term divided by itself
=0 =1 gives 1
5m2 5m2
Exercise 3.2
18m4 (__) 5 l 4m5n(__) l 3m2n 42a 4b5 (__)
(i) = _____ mn (ii) = (iii) = (__)b(__)c 2
2m3n3 2lm(__)n6 (__) 4 2
6a b
2. Say True or False 3. Divide
(i) 8 x 3 y ÷ 4 x 2 = 2 xy (i) 27 y 3 by 3 y (ii) x 3 y 2 by x 2 y
(ii) 7ab3 ÷ 14ab = 2b2 (iii) 45x 3 y 2 z 4 by (−15xyz ) (iv) (3xy )2 by 9 xy
4. Simplify
3m2 2m4 1414p5pq53q 3 1212p3pq34q 4
(i) + 3 (ii) −−−
m m 2 2p2pq2q 3q32q 2
5. Divide:
(i) (32 y 2 − 8 yz ) by 2y (ii) (4m2n3 + 16m4n2 − mn) by 2mn
(iv) 81( p 4q 2r 3 + 2 p3q 3r 2 − 5 p2q 2r 2 ) by (3 pqr )
2
(iii) 5xy 2 18 x 2 y 3 6 xy by
6 xy
6xy
Algebra 85

www.tntextbooks.in
6. Identify the errors and correct them.

(i) 7 y 2 − y 2 + 3 y 2 = 10 y 2 (ii) 6 xy + 3xy = 9 x 2 y 2
(iii) m(4m − 3) = 4m2 − 3 (iv) (4n)2 − 2n + 3 = 4n2 − 2n + 3
2 2
(v) (x − 2)(x + 3) = x 2 − 6 (vi) 3 p 4 p 7 (3 p 4 p 7)
7. Statement A: If 24p2q is divided by 3pq, then the quotient is 8p.
(5 x + 5)
Statement B: Simplification of is 5x.
5
(i) Both A and B are true (ii) A is true but B is false
(iii) A is false but B is true (iv) Both A and B are false
3x
8. Statement A: 4x 2 + 3x -2 = 2(2x 2 + –1)
-1)
2
Statement B: (2m–5)–(5–2m) = (2m–5) + (2m–5)
(i) Both A and B are true (ii) A is true but B is false
(iii) A is false but B is true (iv) Both A and B are false
3.5 Identities
We have studied in the previous class about standard algebraic identities. An identity
is an equation satisfied by any value that replaces its variable(s). Now, we shall recollect
four known identities, which are,
(a + b)2 =
≡ a 2 + 2ab + b2 (a − b)2 =
≡ a 2 − 2ab + b2
((aa22−−bb22))=≡=((aa++bb)()(aa−−bb)) ((xx++aa)()(xx++bb))=≡= xx22 ++((aa++bb))xx++ab
ab
Instead of the symbol ≡, we use = to represent an identity without any confusion.
Try these
Expand the following
(i) ( p + 2)2 = ........................ (ii) (3 − a)2 = .......................
(iii) (62 − x 2 ) = ....................... (iv) (a + b)2 − (a − b)2 = ..........
(v) (a + b)2 = (a + b) × ............ (vi) (m + n)(.....) = m2 − n2
(vii) (m ...)2 m2 14m 49 (viii) (k 2 49) (k )(k )
(ix) m2 − 6m + 9 = .............. (x) (m − 10)(m + 5) = ..........
Note
x=1 is the only solution for 7x + 3=10 whereas any value of x satisfies (x+2)2 =
x2 + 4x + 4. So 7x + 3=10 is an equation (x+2)2 = x2 + 4x + 4 is an identity. An identity is
an equation but vice versa is not true.
3.5.1 Application of Identities

The identities give an alternative method of solving problems on multiplication of
algebraic expressions and also of numbers.

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.8
Find the value of (3a + 4c)2 by using (a+b)2 identity.
Solution:
Comparing (3a + 4c)2 with (a + b)2 , we have= a 3= a , b 4c
Now (a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2
∴ (3a + 4c)2 = (3a)2 + 2(3a)(4c) + (4c)2 (replacing a and b values)

= 32 a2 + (2 × 3 × 4)(a × c) + 42 c 2
(3a + 4c)2 = 9a2 + 24ac + 16c 2
Example 3.9 Think
Find the value of 9982 by using (a−b)2 identity. Which is corrcet?

Solution: (3a)2 is equal to
We know, 998 can be expressed as (1000 − 2) (i) 3a2 (ii) 32a
∴ (998)2 = (1000 − 2)2 (iii) 6a2 (iv) 9a2
This is in the form of (a − b)2 , we= =

get a 1000, b 2
Now (a − b)2 = a 2 − 2ab + b2
(1000 − 2)2 = (1000)2 − 2(1000)(2) + (2)2
(998)2 == 996004
1000000 − 4000 + )42 = 996004
(998
Example 3.10
Simplify (3x + 5 y )(3x − 5 y ) by using (a+b) (a−b) identity.
Solution:
We have (3x + 5 y )(3x − 5 y )
Comparing it with (a + b)(a − b) we get

= a 3=
x b 5y
Now (a + b)(a − b) = a2 − b2
(3x + 5 y )(3x − 5 y ) = (3x )2 − (5 y )2 (replacing a and b values)
= 32 x 2 − 52 y 2
(3x + 5 y )(3x − 5 y ) = 9 x 2 − 25 y 2
Example 3.11
Expand y 2 − 16 by using a2−b2 identity
Solution:
y 2 − 16 can be written as y 2 − 42
Comparing it with a2 − b2 , we get=
a y=
,b 4
Now a2 − b2 = (a + b)(a − b)
y 2 − 42 = ( y + 4)( y − 4)
y 2 − 16 = ( y + 4)( y − 4)
Algebra 87

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.12
Simplify (5x + 3)(5x + 4) by using (x+a) (x+b) identity.
Solution:
We have (5x + 3)(5x + 4)
Comparing it with (x + a)(x + b) , we get x = 5x and =
a 3=
,b 4
We know (x + a)(x + b) = x 2 + (a + b)x + ab (replacing x, a and b values)
(5x + 3)(5x+4) = (5x)2 + (3+4) (5x) + (3) (4)
= 52 x 2 + (7)(5x ) + 12
(5x + 3)(5x + 4) = 25x 2 + 35x + 12
Try these
Expand using appropriate identities.
(i) (3 p + 2q)2 (ii) (105)2 (iii) (2 x − 5d )2
(iv) (98)2 (v) ( y − 5)( y + 5) (vi) (3x )2 − 52
(vii) (2m + n)(2m + p) (viii) 203 × 197
(ix) Find the area of the square whose side is (x − 2) units.
(x) Find the area of the rectangle whose length and breadth are ( y + 4) units and
( y − 3) units.
3.6 Cubic Identities

I. (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 Aliter
× a2 2ab b2
We shall prove it now,
a a3 2a2b ab2
3
LHS = (a + b)
b a 2b 2ab2 b3
= [(a + b)(a + b)](a + b) (expanded form)
2
= a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3
= (a + b) (a + b)
= (a2 + 2ab + b2 )(a + b) (using identity)
= a(a2 + 2ab + b2 ) + b(a2 + 2ab + b2 ) (using distributive law)
= a3 + 2a2b + ab2 + ba2 + 2ab2 + b3
= a3 + (2a 2b + ba 2 ) + (ab2 + 2ab2 ) + b3 (grouping ‘like’ terms)
= a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 Activity
= RHS You can visualize
(a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 the geometrical proof of
Hence, we proved the cubic identity by direct (a+b)3 with the help of
multiplication. your teacher.

www.tntextbooks.in
II. (a – b)3 = a3 – 3a2b + 3ab2 – b3 Aliter

We can prove this identity by direct multiplication × a2 –2ab b2
We have (a − b)3 = (a − b)(a − b)(a − b) a a3 –2a2b ab2
= (a − b)2 × (a − b) –b –a2b 2ab2 –b3
= (a2 − 2ab + b2 )(a − b)
= a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3
= a(a2 − 2ab + b2 ) − b(a2 − 2ab + b2 )
= a3 − 2a2b + ab2 − ba2 + 2ab2 − b3
a3 2a 2b ba 2 ab2 2ab2 b3 a2b = ba2
= a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3 Multiplication
= RHS is commutative
(a – b)3 = a3 – 3a2b + 3ab2 – b3
Hence, we proved.
III. ( x + a)(x + b)( x + c ) = x 3 + (a + b + c )x 2 + (ab + bc + ca)x + abc

We know that the identity (x + a)(x + b) = x 2 + (a + b)x + ab . Let us multiply this by a
binomial ( x + c ) . Then we get.
(x + a)(x + b)(x + c) = [(x + a)(x + b)](x + c)
= (x 2 + (a + b)x + ab) × (x + c)
= x  x 2 + (a + b)x + ab  + c  x 2 + (a + b)x + ab  (distributive law)
= x 3 + (a + b)x 2 + abx + cx 2 + (a + b)xc + abc
= x 3 + ax 2 + bx 2 + abx + cx 2 + acx + bcx + abc
= x 3 + (a + b + c)x 2 + (ab + bc + ca)x + abc (Combine x 2 , x terms)
( x + a)(x + b)(x + c ) = x 3 + (a + b + c )x 2 + (ab + bc + ca)x + abc
Thus, we summarise the cubic identities as :
zz (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3

zz (a − b)3 = a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3
zz (x + a)(x + b)(x + c) = x 3 + (a + b + c)x 2 + (ab + bc + ca)x + abc
Deductions:
The above identities give the following deductions:
(i) (ii)
(a + b)3 = a3 + b3 + 3ab(a + b) (
a3 + b3 = (a + b) a2 − ab + b2 )
(iii) (iv)
(a − b)3 = a3 − b3 − 3ab(a − b) a 3 − b3 = (a − b) (a 2
+ ab + b )2
How? Try it!

Algebra 89

www.tntextbooks.in
3.6.1 Application of Cubic Identities

I. Using the identity (a + b)3 = a 3 + 3a 2b + 3ab2 + b3
Example 3.13
Expand (x + 4)3
Solution:
Comparing (x + 4)3 with (a + b)3 , we get a = x , b = 4 (4)2 = 4 × 4 = 16
We know (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 (4)3 = 4 × 4 × 4 = 64
(x + 4)3 = (x )3 + 3(x )2 (4) + 3(x )(4)2 + (4)23 (replacing a, b values)
= ( x )3 + 3x 2 (4) + 3(x )(16) + 16
64 Try to expand this by using
(x + 4)3 = x 3 + 12 x 2 + 48 x + 16
64
(a + b)3 = a3 + b3 + 3ab(a + b)
Example 3.14
Find the value of (103)3
Solution:
Now, (103)3 = (100 + 3)3
Comparing this with (a + b ) , we get a = 100 , b = 3

3
(a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 replacing a, b values,
(100 + 3)3 = (100)3 + 3(100)2 (3) + 3(100)(3)2 + (3)3
= 1000000 + 3(10000)(3) + 3(100)(9) + 27
= 1000000 + 90000 + 2700 + 27
(103)3 = 1092727
II. Using the identity (a b)3 = a 3 3a 2b 3ab2 b3
Example 3.15
Expand: ( y − 5)3
Solution:
Comparing ( y − 5)3 with (a − b)3 , we get a = y , b = 5
(a–b)3 = a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3
(y–5)3 ( y )3 3( y )2 (5) 3( y )(5)2 (5)3

( y )3 3 y 2 (5) 3( y )(25) 125 Try to expand this by using
(y–5)3 = y 3 − 15 y 2 + 75 y − 125 (a − b)3 = a3 − b3 − 3ab(a − b)

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.16
Find the value of (98)3
Solution:
Now, (98)3 = (100 − 2)3
Comparing this with (a − b ) , we get a = 100 , b = 2
3
(a − b)3 = a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3

(100 − 2)3 = (100)3 − 3(100)2 (2) + 3(100)(2)2 + 2)23
– ((2)
= 1000000 − 3(10000)(2) + 3(100)(4) − 8
= 1000000 − 60000 + 1200 − 8
(98)3 = 941192
III. Using the identity ( x + a)( x + b)( x + c ) = x 3 + (a + b + c ) x 2 + (ab + bc + ca) x + abc
Example 3.17
Expand: (x + 3)(x + 5)(x + 2)
Solution:
Given (x + 3)(x + 5)(x + 2)
Comparing this with (x + a)(x + b)(x + c) , we get x = x , a = 3 , b = 5 , c = 2

3 2
(x + a)(x + b)(x + c) = x + (a + b + c)x + (ab + bc + ca)x + abc
(x + 3)(x + 5)(x + 2) = (x )3 + (3 + 5 + 2)(x )2 + (3 × 5 + 5 × 2 + 2 × 3)x + (3)(5)(2)
= x 3 + 10 x 2 + (15 + 10 + 6)x + 30
(x + 3)(x + 5)(x + 2) = x 3 + 10 x 2 + 31x + 30
Try these
Expand : (i) (x + 5)3 (ii) ( y − 2)3 (iii) (x + 1)(x + 4)(x + 6)
Exercise 3.3
1. Expand
(i) (3m + 5)2 (ii) (5 p − 1)2 (iii) (2n − 1)(2n + 3) (iv) 4 p2 − 25q 2
2. Expand
(i) (3 + m)3 (ii) (2a + 5)3 (iii) (3 p + 4q)3 (iv) (52)3 (v) (104)3
3. Expand
(i) (5 − x )3 (ii) (2 x − 4 y )3 (iii) (ab − c)3 (iv) (48)3 (v) (97 xy )3
4. Simplify ( p − 2)( p + 1)( p − 4)
5. Find the volume of the cube whose side is (x + 1) cm
6. Find the volume of the cuboid whose dimensions are (x + 2),(x − 1) and (x − 3)
Algebra 91

www.tntextbooks.in

7. If x2–y2 = 16 and (x+y) = 8 then (x–y) is ___________
(A) 8 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1
(a + b)(a −b )
3 3
8. = ___________
(a 2 −b 2 )
(A) a2–ab+b2 (B) a2+ab+b2 (C) a2+2ab+b2 (D) a2–2ab+b2
9. (p+q)(p2–pq+q2) is equal to _____________
(A) p3+q3 (B) (p+q)3 (C) p3–q3 (D) (p–q)3
10. (a–b)=3 and ab=5 then a3–b3 = ____________
(A) 15 (B) 18 (C) 62 (D) 72
11. a3+b3 = (a+b)3 – __________
(A) 3a(a+b) (B) 3ab(a–b) (C) –3ab(a+b) (D) 3ab(a+b)
3.7 Factorisation
Expressing any number as the product of Note
two or more numbers is called as factorisation. A number which is divisible
The number 12 can be expressed as the product by 1 and itself (or) A number which
of prime factors like 12 = 2 × 2 × 3. This is called has only 2 factors are called prime
prime factorisation. How will you factorise an numbers. Example: 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, ...
algebraic expression? Yes. Expressing an algebraic A number which has more
expression as the product of two or more than 2 factors are called composite
expressions is called the Factorisation. numbers.Example: 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, ...
For example, (i) a2 − b2 = (a + b)(a − b) Here, (a + b) and (a − b) are the two factors of a2 − b2
(ii) 5 y + 30 = 5( y + 6) , Here 5 and ( y + 6) are the factors of 5 y + 30
Any expression can be Factorised as (1) × (expression)
For example, a2 − b2 can also be factorised as
(1) × (a2 − b2 ) or ( −1) × (b2 − a2 )
because ‘1’ is a factor for all numbers and expressions
So, when we factorise the expressions, follow the suitable type of factorisation given
below to get two or more factors other than 1. Stop doing the factorisation process once you
have taken out all the common factors from the expression and then list out the factors.
Type 1: Factorisation by taking out the common factor from each term.
Example 3.18
Factorise: 4 x 2 y + 8 xy
Solution:
We have, 4 x 2 y + 8 xy This can be written as,
= (2 × 2 × x × x × y ) + (2 × 2 × 2 × x × y )

www.tntextbooks.in
Taking out the common factor 2, 2, x , y , we get

= 2 × 2 × x × y(x + 2)
= 4 xy(x + 2)
Type 2 : Factorisation by taking out the common binomial factor from each term
Example 3.19
(i) Factorise: (2 x + 5)(x − y ) + (4 y )(x − y ) (ii) Factorise 3n( p 2) 4(2 p)

Solution: Solution:
We have (2 x + 5)(x − y ) + (4 y )(x − y )
We have 3n( p 2) 4(2 p) (taking – as
Taking out the common binomial factor common)
(x − y ) 3n( p − 2) − 4( p − 2)
Taking out the common binomial factor ( p − 2)
we get, (x − y ) (2 x + 5 + 4 y ) we get, ( p − 2)(3n − 4)
Type 3 : Factorisation by grouping

Sometimes, the terms of a given expression are grouped suitably in such a way that they
have a common factor so that the factorisation is easy to take out common factor from those
terms.
Example 3.20
Factorise : x 2 + yz + xy + xz
Solution:
We have, x 2 + yz + xy + xz
Group the terms suitably as, = (x 2 + xy ) + ( yz + xz )
= x(x + y ) + z ( y + x )
= x(x + y ) + z (x + y ) (addition is commutative)
= (x + y ) [(x ] [taking out the common factor (x + y) ]
x ++ zz)
Type 4 : Factorisation using identities
(i) (a + b)2 = a 2 + 2ab + b2 (ii) (a − b)2 = a 2 − 2ab + b2 (iii) a2 − b2 = (a + b)(a − b)
Example 3.21
Factorise : x 2 + 8 x + 16
Solution:
Now, x 2 + 8 x + 16 can be written as x 2 + 8 x + 42
Comparing this with a2 + 2ab + b2 = (a + b)2 we get a = x ; b = 4

2 2 2
(x ) + 2(x )(4) + (4) = (x + 4)
x 2 + 8 x + 16 = (x + 4)2
(x+4), (x+4) are the two factors.
Algebra 93

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.22
Factorise 49 x 2 − 84 xy + 36 y 2
Solution:
Now, 49 x 2 − 84 xy + 36 y 2
72 x 2 − 84 xy + 62 y(27=
x )2(7−2xx2)2(7−x284 xy ))(++66(y62)y+)22(6 y )2
)((67xy
Comparing this with a2 − 2ab + b2 = (a − b)2 we get a = 7 x , b = 6 y
(7 x )2 − 2(7 x )(6 y ) + (6 y )2 = (7 x − 6 y )2
∴ 49 x 2 − 84 xy + 36 y 2 = (7 x − 6 y )2 Try these
(7x–6y), (7x–6y) are the two factors. Find the factors
Example 3.23 factor 1 factor 2 product sum
Factorise : 49 x 2 − 64 y 2 35 12
-40 -3
Solution:
60 -17
Now, 49 x 2 − 64 y 2 -51 +14
2 2 2 2 2
7 x − 8 y = (7 x ) − (8 y ) 2 -32 -4
Comparing this with a2 − b2 = (a + b)(a − b) we get a = 7 x , b = 8y
(7 x )2 − (8 y )2 = (7 x + 8 y )(7 x − 8 y )
(7x+8y), (7x–8y) are the two factors.
Type 5 : Factorisation of the expression (ax2 + bx + c)
Example 3.24
Factorise x 2 + 8 x + 15 Product = 15 Sum = 8
1×15 = 15 1+15 = 16
Solution:
3 × 5 = 15 3+5 = 8 ü
Given x 2 + 8 x + 15
This is in the form of ax 2 + bx + c +15
We get = a 1=, b 8, c = 15
×
Now, the product = a × c and sum = b
+3 +5
= 1 × 15 b=8
+
= 115× 15
+8
= x 2 + 8 x + 15
= x 2 + 3x + 5x + 15 (the middle term 8x can be written as 3x+5x)
= (x 2 + 3x ) + (5x + 15)
= x(x + 3) + 5(x + 3) taking out the common factor x+3 )
x 2 8 x 15 (x 3)(x 5) Think
Therefore, (x+3), (x+5) are the two factors. x2–4(x–2)= (x2–4)(x–2)

Is this correct? If not correct it.

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.25
Factorise 7c 2 + 2c − 5 Product = –35 Sum = 2
Solution: 1×(–35) = –35 1–35 = –34
Given 7c 2 + 2c − 5 –1 × 35 = –35 –1+35 = 34
5 × (–7) = –35 5–7 = –2
This is in the form of ax 2 + bx + c
–5 × 7 = –35 –5+7 = 2 ü
We get a = 7, b = 2, c = −5
Now, the product = a × c = 7 × (−5) = –35 and sum b = 2 –35
= 7c 2 + 2c − 5 ×
7c 2 5c 7c 5 (the middle term 2c can be
–5 +7
written as –5c+7c)
+
= (7c 2 − 5c) + (7c − 5)
= c(7c − 5) + 1(7c − 5) (taking out the common factor 7c–5 ) +2
= (7c − 5)(c + 1)
Therefore, (7c–5), (c+1) are the two factors.
Try these
Factorise the following :
1) 3 y + 6 2) 10 x 2 + 15 y 2 3) 7m(m − 5) + 1(5 − m) 4) 64 − x 2 5) x2–3x+2
6) y2–4y–32 7) p2+2p–15 8) m2+14m+48 9) x2–x–90 10) 9x2–6x–8
3.7.1 Factorisation using cubic identities

Note
The cubic identities are
(i) (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 8a3 = 2 × 2 × 2 × a3
(ii) (a − b)3 = a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3 = 23 a3 = (2a)3
I. Factorise using the identity (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3
Example 3.26 Note

Factorise: x3 + 15x2 + 75x + 125
Perfect cube numbers
Solution: A number which can be written
Given x + 15x + 75x + 125
3 2
in the form of x × x × x is called
This can be written as x3 + 15x2 + 75x + 53 perfect cube number.
Examples:
Comparing )3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 = (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b8+=32ab×2 2+×b23 = 23
(a + bwith
we get a = x , b = 5 27 = 3 × 3 × 3 = 33
The given expression can be expressed as 125 = 5 × 5 × 5 = 53
(x)3 + 3(x)2 (5) + 3(x) (5)2 + (5)3 = (x + 5)3 Here 8, 27, 125 are some of perfect
= (x + 5) (x + 5) (x + 5) are the three factors. cube numbers
Algebra 95

www.tntextbooks.in
II. Factorise using the identity (a – b)3 = a3 – 3a2b + 3ab2 – b3

Example 3.27
Factorise: 8p3 – 12p2q + 6pq2 – q3
Solution:
Given 8p3 – 12p2q + 6pq2 – q3
This can be written as (2p)3 – 12p2q + 6pq2 – (q)3
b)3 = a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3 = (a − b)3 =wea3get

(a −with
Comparing this − 3a2=b 2+p3ab
, b 2=−qb3
The given expression can be expressed as
(2p)3 – 3(2p)2(q) + 3(2p)(q)2 – (q)3 = (2p –q)3
= (2p –q), (2p –q), (2p –q) are the three factors.
Exercise 3.4
1. Factorise the following by taking out the common factor
(i) 18 xy − 12 yz (ii) 9 x 5 y 3 + 6 x 3 y 2 − 18 x 2 y (iii) x(b − 2c) + y(b − 2c)
(iv) (ax + ay ) + (bx + by ) (v) 2 x 2 (4 x − 1) − 4 x + 1 (vi) 3 y(x − 2)2 − 2(2 − x )
(vii) 6 xy − 4 y 2 + 12 xy − 2 yzx (viii) a3 − 3a2 + a − 3 (ix) 3 y 3 − 48 y (x) ab2 − bc 2 − ab + c 2
2. Factorise the following expressions
(i) x 2 + 14 x + 49 (ii) y 2 − 10 y + 25 (iii) c 2 − 4c − 12 (iv) m2 + m − 72 (v) 4 x 2 − 8 x + 3
3. Factorise the following expressions using (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3 identity
(i) 64x3+144x2 + 108x+27 (ii) 27p3+54p2q+36pq2+8q3
4. Factorise the following expressions using (a − b)3 = a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3 identity
(i) y3–18y2+108y–216 (ii) 8m3–60m2n+150mn2–125n3
Objective type Questions

5. Factors of 9x +6xy are 2
(A) 3y, (x+2) (B) 3x, (3x+3y) (C) 6x, (3x+2y) (D) 3x, (3x+2y)
6. Factors of 4–m2 are
(A) (2+m)(2+m) (B) (2–m)(2–m) (C) (2+m)(2–m) (D) (4+m)(4–m)
7. (x+4) and (x–5) are the factors of ___________
(A) x2–x+20 (B) x2–9x–20 (C) x2+x–20 (D) x2–x–20
8. The factors of x2–5x + 6 are (x–2)(x–p) then the value of p is _________
(A) –3 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D)–2
9. The factors of 1–m3
(A) (1+m), (1+m+m2) (B) (1–m), (1–m–m2)
(C) (1–m), (1+m+m2) (D) (1+m), (1–m+m2)
10. One factor of x3+y3 is
(A) (x – y) (B) (x + y) (C) (x + y)3 (D) (x – y)3

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 3.5
1. Subtract: −2(xy )2 ( y 3 + 7 x 2 y + 5) from 5 y 2 (x 2 y 3 − 2 x 4 y + 10 x 2 )
( )
2. Multiply 4 x 2 + 9 and (3x − 2)
3. Find the simple interest on Rs. 5a2b2 for 4ab years at 7b% per annum.
(
4. The cost of a note book is Rs. 10ab. If Babu has Rs. 5a2b + 20ab2 + 40ab . Then how)
many note books can he buy?
(
5. Factorise : 7 y 2 − 19 y − 6 )
6. A contractor uses the expression 4 x 2 + 11x + 6 to determine the amount of wire to
order when wiring a house. If the expression comes from multiplying the number of
rooms times the number of outlets and he knows the number of rooms to be ( x + 2) ,
find the number of outlets in terms of ‘x’. [Hint : factorise 4 x 2 + 11x + 6 ]
7. A mason uses the expression x 2 + 6 x + 8 to represent the area of the floor of a room.
If the decides that the length of the room will be represented by ( x + 4 ) , what will the
width of the room be in terms of x ?
8. Find the missing term: y 2  x 56 y 7 y 
9. Factorise : 16 p 4 − 1
10. Factorise : 3x3 – 45x2y + 225xy2 – 375y3
3.8 Linear Equation in One Variable

3.8.1 Introduction
We shall recall some earlier ideas in algebra.
What is the formula to find the perimeter of a rectangle? If we denote the length by l
and breadth by b, the perimeter P is given as P = 2(l + b). In this formula, 2 is a fixed number
whereas the literal numbers P, l and b are not fixed because they depend upon the size of
the rectangle and hence P, l and b are variables. For rectangles of different sizes, their values
go on changing. 2 is a constant (which does not change whatever may be the size of the
rectangle).
An algebraic expression is a mathematical phrase having one or more algebraic terms
including variables, constants and operating symbols (such as plus and minus signs).
Example: 4x2 + 5x + 7xy + 100 is an algebraic expression; note that the first term
4x2 consists of constant 4 and variable x2. What is the constant in the term 7xy? Is there a
variable in the last term of the expression?
The ‘number parts’ of the terms with variables are coefficients. In 4x2 + 5x + 7xy + 100,
the coefficient of the first term is 4. What is the coefficient of the second term? It is 5. The
coefficient of the xy term is 7.
Algebra 97

www.tntextbooks.in
3.8.2 Forming algebraic expressions

We now to translate a few statements into an algebraic language and recall how to frame
expressions. Here are some examples:
Statement Expression Comment

When simplified, we get a single number.
The sum of 8 and 7 8+7
This is a numerical expression
We get an algebraic expression x + 7, since x is a
The sum of x and 7 x+7
variable.
16
16 divided by y Here, y is a variable.
y
One more than thrice a

3p+1 Here p is a variable; 3 is the coefficient of p.
number p
The product of a number Note that here x stands for the same number
and the same number x(x – 3) throughout in the expression. (We use brackets
less 3 to indicate multiplication).
3.8.3 Equations
An equation is a statement that asserts the equality of two expressions; the expressions
are written one on each side of an “equal to” sign.
For example: 2x + 7 = 17 is an equation (where x is a variable). 2x + 7 forms the Left Hand
Side (LHS) of the equation and 17 is its Right Hand Side (RHS).
Linear equations
An equation containing only one variable with its highest power as one is called a linear
equation. Examples: 3x – 7 = 10.
Linear equations in one or more variables:
An equation is formed when a statement is put in the form of mathematical terms.
Here are some examples:
(i) A number is added to 5 to get 25
This statement can be written as x + 5 = 25.
This equation x + 5 = 25 is formed by one variable (x) whose highest power is 1. So it is
called a linear equation in one variable.
Therefore, an equation containing only one variable with its highest power as one is called
a linear equation in one variable.
Examples: 5 x − 2 = 8, 3 y + 24 = 0
This linear equation in one variable is also known as simple equation.

www.tntextbooks.in
(ii) Sum of two numbers is 45

This statement can be written as x + y = 45.
This equation x + y = 45 is formed by two variables x and y whose highest power is 1. Hence, we
call it as a linear equation in two variables.
Now, in this class we shall learn to solve linear equations in one variable only. You will
learn to solve other type of equations in higher classes.
Note
The equations so formed with power more than 1 of its variables, (2,3....etc.)
are called as quadratic, cubic equations and so on.
Examples: (i) x 2 + 4 x + 7 = 0 is a quadratic equation.
(ii) 5 x3 − x 2 + 3x = 10 is a cubic equation.
Try these
Identify which among the following are linear equations.
(i) 2 + x = 19 (ii) 7x2 – 5 = 3 (iii) 4p3 = 12 (iv) 6m+2 (v) n=10
6x
(vi) 7k – 12= 0 (vii) + y = 1 (viii) 5 + y = 3x (ix) 10p+2q=3 (x) x2–2x–4
8
Convert the following statements into linear equations:

Example 3.28
7 is added to a given number to give 19.
Solution:
Let the number be n.
When 7 is added to this number we get n + 7.
This result is to give 19. Think
Therefore, the equation is n + 7 = 19.
(i) Is t(t – 5)=10 a linear equation?
Example 3.29
Why?
The sum of 4 times a number and 18 is 28.
(ii) Is x2 =2x , a linear equation?
Solution:
Why?
Let the number be x.
4 times the number is 4x.
Adding 18 now, we get 18 + 4x.
Now the result should be 28.
Thus, the equation has to be 18 + 4x = 28.
Algebra 99

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
Convert the following statements into linear equations:
1. On subtracting 8 from the product of 5 and a number, I get 32.
2. The sum of three consecutive integers is 78.
3. Peter had a Two hundred rupee note. After buying 7 copies of a book he was left with `60.
4. The base angles of an isosceles triangle are equal and the vertex angle measures 80°.
5. In a triangle ABC, ∠A is 10o more than ∠B. Also ∠C is three times ∠A. Express the
equation in terms of angle B.
3.8.4 Solution of a linear equation

The value which replaces a variable in an equation so as to make the two sides of the
equation equal is called a solution or root of the equation.
Example : 2 x = 10
We find that the equation is “satisfied” with the value x = 5. That is, if we put x = 5, in
the equation, the value of the LHS will be equal to the RHS. Thus x = 5 is a solution of the
equation. Note that no other value for x satisfies the equation. Thus one can say x = 5 is “the”
solution of the equation.
(i) The DO-UNDO Method:
Statement 5 less than

You Think Twice the 2x–5
(given) Number
–5
The number needed is unknown. Twice the
5 less than Number 2x
Let it be x. Twice the number gives 2x. This is given
twice a 5 less is 2x – 5. ×2
x to be 11
number is 11. This result is given to be 11. Number
Assumed
This formation of equation can be visualized as follows:

From the number x, we
reached 2x – 5 by performing 2x–5 = 11
operations like subtraction,
multiplication etc. So when –5 +5 Add 5
subtract 5
2x – 5 = 11 is given, to get 16
2x
back to the value of x, we
have to 'undo' all that we Multiply ×2 ÷2 Divide
did! Thus, we ‘do’ to form the by 2 by 2
equation and ‘undo’ to get
the solution.
Number 8 Number
unknown obtained

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.30
(a) Solve the equation: x − 7 = 6 (b) Solve the equation: 3x = 51
Solution: Solution:
x–7=6 (Given) 3x = 51 (Given)
x – 7 +7 = 6+7 (add 7 on both sides) 3 × x = 51
x = 13 3 × x 51 (÷ 3 on both sides)
=
3 3
x = 17
(ii) Transposition method

The shifting of a number from one side of an equation to other is called transposition.
For the above example, (a) doing addition of 7 on both sides is the same as changing the
number –7 on the left hand side to its additive inverse +7 and add it on the right hand side.
x–7=6
x = 6+7
x = 13 Think
Can you get more than one
likewise, (b) doing division by 3 on both sides is the
solution for a linear equation?
same as changing the number 3 on the LHS to its
1
reciprocal and multiply it on the RHS and vice-versa.
3
For Example (i) 6 x = 12 (ii) y = 10
12 7
x= y = 10 × 7
6
x=2 y = 70
Note
Example 3.31 While rearranging the given linear equation,
Solve 2 x + 5 = 9 group the like terms on one side of the equality sign, and
then do the basic arithmetic operations according to the
Solution:
signs that occur in the expression.
2x + 5 = 9
2x = 9 −5
2x = 4 Try these
2
x= =2
4 1. Solve for ‘x’ and ‘y’
2
(i) 2x = 10 (ii) 3 + x = 5
Example 3.32 (iii) x – 6 = 10 (iv) 3x + 5 = 2
4y 2y
Solve −7 = 2x = 3
3 5 (v) (vi) –2 = 4m – 6
Solution: 7
(Rearranging the like terms) (vii) 4(3x – 1) = 80 (viii) 3x – 8 = 7 – 2x
4y 2y (ix) 7 – y = 3(5 – y) (x) 4(1 – 2y)–2(3 – y) = 0
− =7
3 5
Algebra 101

www.tntextbooks.in
20 y − 6 y Think
=7
15
1. “An equation is multiplied or divided by
14 y = 7 × 15 a non zero number on either side.” Will there be
7 × 15 any change in the solution?
y=
14 2. “An equation is multiplied or divided by two
2
15 different numbers on either side”. What will
y=
2 happen to the equation?
Exercise 3.6
(i) The value of x in the equation x + 5 = 12 is --------------------.
(ii) The value of y in the equation y − 9 = ( −5) + 7 is --------------------.
(iii) The value of m in the equation 8m = 56 is--------------------.

2p
(iv) The value of p in the equation = 10 is --------------------.
3
(v) The linear equation in one variable has -------------------- solution.
2. Say True or False.

(i) The shifting of a number from one side of an equation to other is called transposition.
(ii) Linear equation in one variable has only one variable with power 2.
3. Match the following :

x
(a) = 10 (i) x = 4
2
(b) 20= 6x – 4 (ii) x = 1
(c) 2x – 5 = 3 – x (iii) x = 20
8
(d) 7x – 4 – 8x = 20 (iv) x =
3
(e) 4 − x = −7 (v) x = –24
11 11
(A) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii), (v) (B) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii), (v)
(C) (iii), (i), (iv), (v), (ii) (D) (iii), (i), (v), (iv), (ii)
2x 10 1 2 1 x 7x 5
4. Find x and p (i) −4= (ii) y + − 3 y = (iii)
3 3 6 3 3 3 12 4
5. Find x (i) –3(4x + 9) = 21 (ii) 20 – 2 ( 5 – p) = 8 (iii) (7x – 5) – 4(2 + 5x) = 10(2 – x)
3 x − 2 ( x − 3) m+9 5
6. Find x and m (i) − = −1 (ii) =
4 5 3m + 15 3

www.tntextbooks.in
3.8.5 Word problems that involve linear equations

The challenging part of solving word problems is translating the statements into equations.
Collect as many such problems and attempt to solve them.
Example 3.33
The sum of two numbers is 36 and one number exceeds another by 8. Find the numbers.
Solution:
Let the smaller number be x and the greater number be x+8
Given: the sum of two numbers = 36
x + (x+8) = 36
2 x +8 = 36
2x = 36 − 8 Hence,
2x = 28 (i) The smaller number, x =14
28
x = = 14 (ii) The greater number, x +8=14+8 = 22
2
Example 3.34
A bus is carrying 56 passengers with some people having `8 tickets and the remaining
having `10 tickets. If the total money received from these passengers is `500, find the number
of passengers with each type of tickets.
Solution:
Let the number of passengers having `8 tickets be y. Then, the number of passengers with
`10 tickets is (56−y).
Total money received from the passengers = `500
That is, y × 8 + (56 − y) × 10 = 500
8y +560 −10y = 500
8y−10y = 500 − 560
− 2y = − 60
y=
60 Hence, the number of passengers having,
2 (i) `8 tickets =30
y = 30 (ii) `10 tickets =56−30 =26
Example 3.35
The length of a rectangular field exceeds its breadth by 9 metres. If the perimeter of the
field is 154m, find the length and breadth of the field.
Solution:
Let the breadth of the field be ‘x’ metres; then its length (x+9) metres.
Perimeter of the P = 2(length + breadth) = 2(x + 9 + x)= 2(2x + 9)
Given that, 2(2x + 9) = 154.
4x + 18 = 154
4x = 154 − 18 Hence,
4x = 136 (i) Thus, breadth of the rectangular field = 34m
x = 34 (ii) length of the rectangular field = x+9 = 34+9 = 43m
Algebra 103

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.36
There is a wooden piece of length 2m. A carpenter wants to cut it into two pieces such that
the first piece is 40 cm smaller than twice the other piece. What is the length of the smaller piece ?
Solution:
Let us assume that the length of the first piece is x cm.
Then the length of the second piece is (200cm – x cm) i.e., (200 − x) cm.
ccording to the given statement (change m
A
to cm), Think
irst piece = 40 less than twice the Suppose we take the second
F
second piece. piece to be x and the first piece to be
x = 2× (200 − x) − 40 (200 − x), how will the steps vary? Will
the answer be different?
x = 400 − 2x − 40
x + 2x = 360
3x = 360 Hence,
x=
360 (i) Thus the length of the first piece is 120 cm
3 (ii) The length of second piece is 200cm − 120cm = 80cm,
x = 120 which happens to be the smaller.
Example 3.37
Mother is five times as old as her daughter. After 2 years, the mother will be four times as
old as her daughter. What are their present ages?
Solution:
Age / Person Now After 2 years
Daughter x x +2
Mother 5x 5 x +2
Given condition: After two years, Mother’s age = 4 times of Daughter's age
5 x + 2 = 4 ( x + 2)
5x+2 =4x+8
5 x − 4x = 8 − 2
x=6
Hence daughter’s present age = 6 years;
and mother’s present age = 5 x = 5 × 6 = 30 years
Example 3.38
The denominator of a fraction is 3 more than its numerator. If 2 is added to the numerator
5
and 9 is added to the denominator, the fraction becomes . Find the original fraction.
6
Solution:
x
Let the original fraction be .
y

www.tntextbooks.in
Given that y = x + 3. (Denominator = Numerator + 3).

x x+2 5
Therefore, the fraction can be written as . As per the given condition, =
x+3 ( x + 3) + 9 6
By cross multiplication, 6( x +2) = 5 ( x +3+9)
6 x +12 = 5( x +12)
6 x +12 = 5 x +60
6 x − 5 x = 60 − 12
x = 60 − 12
x = 48.
x 48 48
Therefore, the original fraction is = = .
x+3 48 + 3 51
Example 3.39
The sum of the digits of a two-digit number is 8. If 18 is added to the value of the number,
its digits get reversed. Find the number.
Solution:
Let the two digit number be xy (i.e., ten’s digit is x, ones digit is y)
Its value can be expressed as 10x+y.
Given, x+y = 8 which gives y =8−x
Therefore its value is 10x+y
= 10x + 8 − x
= 9x + 8.
The new number is yx with value is 10y + x
= 10(8 − x) + x
= 80 – 9x
Given, when 18 is added to the given number (xy) gives new number (yx)
(9x + 8) + 18 = 80 – 9x
This simplifies to 9x + 9x = 80 – 8 – 18
18x = 54
x =3 ⇒y=8–3=5
The two digit number is xy = 10x+y ⇒ 10(3)+5 = 30+5 = 35
Example 3.40
From home, Rajan rides on his motorbike at 35 km/hr and reaches his office 5 minutes
late. If he had ridden at 50 km/hr, he would have reached his office 4 minutes earlier. How far
is his office from his home?
Solution: Speed 1 = 35 km/hr
Distance
Let the distance be ‘x’ km. (Recall that, time = )
Speed Speed 2 = 50 km/hr
Time taken to cover ‘x’ km at 35 km/hr: T1 = x hr
35
x
Time taken to cover ‘x’ km at 50 km/hr: T2 = hr
50
Algebra 105

www.tntextbooks.in
According to the problem, the difference between two timings

= 4–(–5)
= 4+5 =9 minutes
9
= hour (changing minutes to hour)
60
9
Given, T1 – T2 =
60
x x 9
− =
35 50 60
10 x − 7 x = 9
350 60
3x 9
=
350 60
9 350
x = ×
60 3
1
The distance to his office x =17 km.
2
Exercise 3.7
(i) The solution of the equation ax+b=0 is_______.
(ii) If a and b are positive integers then the solution of the equation ax=b has to be
always_______.
(iii) One-sixth of a number when subtracted from the number itself gives 25. The number
is_______.
(iv) If the angles of a triangle are in the ratio 2:3:4 then the difference between the greatest
and the smallest angle is _______.
(v) In an equation a + b = 23. The value of a is 14 then the value of b is_______.
2. Say True or False
(i) “Sum of a number and two times that number is 48” can be written as y+2y = 48
(ii) 5(3x+2) = 3(5x−7) is a linear equation in one variable.
(iii) x = 25 is the solution of one third of a number is 10 less than the original number.
3. One number is seven times another. If their difference is 18, find the numbers.
4. The sum of three consecutive odd numbers is 75. Which is the largest among them?
1
5. The length of a rectangle is of its breadth. If its perimeter is 64m, then find the length
3
and breadth of the rectangle.
6. A total of 90 currency notes, consisting only of `5 and `10 denominations, amount to
`500. Find the number of notes in each denomination.
7. At present, Thenmozhi’s age is 5 years more than that of Murali’s age. Five years ago, the
ratio of Thenmozhi’s age to Murali’s age was 3:2. Find their present ages.

www.tntextbooks.in
8. A number consists of two digits whose sum is 9. If 27 is subtracted from the original
number, its digits are interchanged. Find the original number.
9. The denominator of a fraction exceeds its numerator by 8. If the numerator is increased
3
by 17 and the denominator is decreased by 1, we get . Find the original fraction.
2
10. If a train runs at 60 km/hr it reaches its destination late by 15 minutes. But, if it runs at
85 kmph it is late by only 4 minutes . Find the distance covered by the train.
11. Sum of a number and its half is 30 then the number is______.
(A) 15 (B) 20 (C) 25 (D) 40
12. The exterior angle of a triangle is 120° and one of its interior opposite angle 58°, then the
other opposite interior angle is________.
(A) 62° (B) 72° (C) 78° (D) 68°
13. What sum of money will earn `500 as simple interest in 1 year at 5% per annum?
(A) 50000 (B) 30000 (C) 10000 (D) 5000
14. The product of LCM and HCF of two numbers is 24. If one of the number is 6, then the
other number is ________.
(A) 6 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 8
15. The largest number of the three consecutive numbers is x+1, then the smallest number is
(A) x (B) x+1 (C) x+2 (D) x–1
3.9 Graph
3.9.1 Introduction
There was an instance in the 17th century when Rene North
Descartes, a famous mathematician became ill and from (East 4 ft, North 3 ft)
his bed, noticed an insect hovering over a corner and sitting 3
at various places on the ceiling. He wanted to identify all
Feet
the places where the insect sat on the ceiling. Immediately, 2
he drew the top plane of the room in a paper, creating the

1
horizontal and vertical lines. Based on these perpendicular
lines, he used the directions and understood that the places
of the insect can be spotted by the movement of the insect West 1 2 3 4 East
Feet
in the east, west, north and south directions. He called that South
place as (x,y) in the plane which indicates two values, one
(x) in the horizontal direction and the other (y) in the vertical direction (say east and north in this
case). This is how the concept of graphs came into existence.
3.9.2 Graph sheets
Graph is just a visual method for showing relationships between numbers. In the previous
class, we studied how to represent integers on a number line horizontally. Now take one
more number line – vertically. We take the graph sheet keeping both number lines mutually
perpendicular to each other at ‘0’zero as given in the figure. The number lines and the marking
integers should be placed along the dark lines of the graph sheet.
Algebra 107

www.tntextbooks.in
−6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0
−4 −3 −2 −1 O 1 2 3 4
−1 −1
−2 −2
−3 −3
The intersecting point of the perpendicular lines ‘O’ represent the origin (0, 0).
Cartesian system
Rene Descartes system of fixing a point with the help of two measurements, horizontal
and vertical, is named as Cartesian system, in his honour. The horizontal line is named as XOX',
called the X-axis. The vertical line is named as YOY', called the Y- axis. Both the axes are called
coordinate axes. The plane containing the X axis and the Y axis is known as the coordinate plane
or the Cartesian plane.
3.9.3 Signs in the graphs
1. X-coordinate of a point is positive along
Y
OX and negative along OX'
2. Y-coordinate of a point is positive along OY 2
and negative along OY'
3.9.4 Ordered pairs (+) 1
A point represents a position in a plane. A
point is denoted by a pair (a,b) of two numbers ‘a’ X' −2 −1 O 1 2 X
and ‘b’ listed in a specific order in which ‘a’ represents −1
(−) (+)
the distance along the X-axis and ‘b’ represents the
distance along the Y-axis. It is called an ordered (−) −2
pair (a,b). It helps us to locate precisely a point in
Y'
the plane. Each point can be exactly identified by a
pair of numbers. It is also clear that the point (b,a)

www.tntextbooks.in
is not same as (a,b) as they both

indicate different orders. Y
We have, XOX' and YOY' as the 4

co-ordinate axes and let ‘M’ be M (4,3)
(4,3) in the plane.To locate ‘M’ 3
(i) you (always) start at O, a
ordinate
2
3 Units
fixed point (which we have,
agreed to call as origin), 1
(ii) first, move 4 units along the abscissa
horizontal direction (that
X' −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 X
is, the direction of x-axis) 4 Units
−1
(iii) and then trek along the
y- direction by 3 units. −2
To understand how we have
Y'
travelled to reach M, we denote
by (4,3).
4 is called the x-coordinate of M and 3 is called the y-coordinate of M.
It is also habitual to name the
x-coordinate as abscissa and the
Think
y-coordinate as ordinate. (4,3) is as an
If instead of (4,3), we write (3,4) and try to mark
ordered pair.
it, will it represent ‘M’ again?
3.9.5 Quadrants
The coordinate axes divide the plane of the graph into four regions called quadrants.
It is a convention that the quadrants are named in the anti clock wise sense starting from the
positive side of the X axis.
Quadrant Sign Y
x>0, y>0, then the coordinates 2
I
are (+,+) II Quadrant I Quadrant
the region XOY
Examples: (5,7) (2,9) (10,15) (,+) 1 (+,+)
x<0, y>0 then the coordinates i n
II (0,0) orig
are (−,+) -7 -6
the region X'OY X' 2 1 O 1 2 X
Examples (−2,8) (−1,10) (−5,3)
1
x<0, y<0 then the coordinates are III Quadrant IV Quadrant
III
(−,−) (,) 2 (+,)
the region X'OY'
Examples: (−2,−3) (−7,−1) (−5,−7)
Y'
x>0, y<0 then the coordinates
IV
are (+,−)
the region XOY'
Examples : (1,−7) (4,−2) (9,−3)
Algebra 109

www.tntextbooks.in
Coordinate of a point on the axes:

• If y=0 then the coordinate (x, 0) lies on the ‘x’-axis.
For example (2, 0) (−5, 0) (7,0) are points on the ‘x’-axis.
• If x=0 then the coordinate (0,y) lies on the ‘y’-axis.
For example (0, 3) (0,−4) (0, 9) are points on the ‘y’-axis.
3.9.6 Plotting the given points on a graph

Consider the following points (4,3), (−4,5), (−3,−6), (5,−2), (6,0), (0,−5)
(i) To locate (4,3).
Start from origin O, Y
move 4 units along OX 6
and from 4, move 3 units N (−4,5)
5
parallel to OY to reach
M(4,3). 4
M (4,3)
(ii) To locate (−4,5) 3
From the origin, move 2

4 units along OX' and
1
from −4, move 5 units
R (6,0)
parallel to OY to reach O
X' −5 −4 -3 −2 −1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X
N(−4,5). −1
(iii) To locate ( − 3, − 6) −2

Q (5,-2)
From the origin move
−3
3units along OX' and
from −3, move 6 units −4
parallel to OY' to reach −5 S (0,−5)

P(-3,-6).
P (−3,−6) −6
(iv) To locate (5,−2)
−7
From the origin move Y'
5 points along OX and
from 5, move 2 units
parallel to OY' to reach Q(5,−2).
(v) To locate (6,0) and (0, − 5)

In the given point (6, 0), X-coordinate is 6 and Y-coordinate is zero. So the point lies on the
x-axis. Move 6 units on OX from the origin to reach R(6, 0).
In the given point (0,−5) X-coordinate is zero and Y- coordinate is (−5). So, the point lies on
Y-axis. Move 5 units on OY' from the origin to reach S (0,−5).

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
1. Complete the table given below.
S.No Point Sign of X-coordinate Sign of Y-coordinate Quadrant
1 (−7,2)
2 (10,−2)
3 (−3,−7)
4. (3,1)
5. (7,0)
6. (0,−4)
2. Write the coordinates of the points marked in the following figure
4 G
E
I
3
2
A H F B
1
J M L K T
X' −4 −3 −2 −1 O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X
Q R U
N −1
P
−2
D S C
−3
Y'
Exercise 3.8
1 Fill in the blanks:
(i) X- axis and Y-axis intersect at __________.
(ii) The coordinates of the point in third quadrant are always__________.
(iii) (0, −5) point lies on ________axis.
(iv) The x- coordinate is always ______on the y-axis.
(v) _________ coordinates are the same for a line parallel to Y-axis.
Algebra 111

www.tntextbooks.in

(i) (−10,20) lies in the second quadrant.
(ii) (−9, 0) lies on the x-axis.
(iii) The coordinates of the origin are (1,1).
3 Find the quadrants without plotting the points on a graph sheet.
(3, − 4), (5,7), (2,0), ( − 3, − 5), (4, − 3), ( − 7,2), ( − 8,0), (0,10), ( − 9,50).
4 Plot the following points in a graph sheet.

A
(5,2), B( − 7, − 3), C( − 2,4), D( − 1, − 1), E(0, − 5), F(2,0), G(7, − 4), H( − 4,0), I(2,3),
J(8, − 4), K(0,7).
5
Use the graph to determine the
coordinates where each figure is Y
located.
3
a) Star _______
b) Bird _______ 2
c) Red Circle _______ 1

d) Diamond _______
e) Triangle _______ X' −3 −2 −1 O 1 2 3 X
−1
f) Ant _______
g) Mango _______ −2
h) Housefly _______
−3
i) Medal _______ Y'
j) Spider _______
3.9.7 To obtain a straight line

Now, we know how to plot the points on the graph. The points may lie on the graph in
different order. If we join any two points we will get a straight line.
Example 3.41
Draw a straight line by joining the points A (−2,6) and B (4,−3)
Solution:
The given first point A (−2,6) lies in the II quadrant and plot it. Second point B (4,−3)
lies in the IV quadrant and plot it.
Now join the point A and point B using scale and extend it. We get a straight line.
Note:
The straight line intersects X axis at (2,0) and Y axis at (0,3).

www.tntextbooks.in
Y Scale: On the X axis 1cm = 1unit

A (2, 6) On the Y axis 1cm = 1unit
6
4
Y intercept point
3 (0, 3)
)
,0
X intercept point
(2
X' 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 X
1
2
B (4, 3)
3
Y'
Example 3.42 Scale: On the X axis 1cm = 1unit

Draw straight Y On the Y axis 1cm = 1unit
lines by joining the 5

A (2,5)
points A(2, 5) B(−5,−2)
M (5,4)
M(−5, 4) N(1,−2) 4
Intersecting point
also find the point of Q

3 (0,3)
intersection
Y
in
Solution:
te
2
rc
ep
Plot the first pair ,1)

tp
2
oi
nt
of points A and B in P( 1
,0)
,0)
(3
I and III quadrants.

(1
R S
Join the points and O
X' 5 4 3 X in 2 1 1 2 3 4 X
extend it to get AB ter T 1)
ce
pt 1 (0,
straight line. Plot the po
in
t
second pair of points B (5,2) 2 N (1,-2)
M and N in II and IV
quadrants. Join the 3
points and extend it to Y'
get MN straight line.
Algebra 113

www.tntextbooks.in
Now, both lines are intersect at P(−2,1 )

(i) The line AB intersect the coordinate axis, ie) x-axis at R(−3,0) and y-axis at Q(0,3)
(ii) The line MN intersect the coordinate axis, ie) x-axis at S(−1,0) and y-axis at T(0,−1)
3.9.8 Line parallel to the coordinate axes
• If a line is parallel to the X-axis, its distance from X axis is the same and it is represented
as y = c .
• If a line is parallel to the Y-axis, its distance from Y axis is the same and it is represented
as x = k. (Here c and k are constants)
Example 3.43
Draw the graph of x = 5
Solution:
x=5 means that x-coordinate is always 5 for whatever value of y-coordinate. So we may
give any value for y-coordinate and this is tabulated as follows.
X 5 5 5 5 5 x =5 is given (fixed)
Y −2 −1 0 2 3 Take any value for y (Why?)
Scale: On the X axis 1cm = 1unit

Y On the Y axis 1cm = 1unit
4
5 Units Note
3 D (5,3)
2 C (5,2) x =0 represents the Y axis

y =0 represents the X axis
1 B (5,1)
A (5,0)
X' 2 1 O 1 2 3 4 5 6 X
Think
1 E (5,1)
Which of the points

2 F (5,2)
(5, −10) (0, 5) (5, 20) lie
G (5,3) on the straight line X = 5?
3
5 Units
4
Y'
The points are (5,−2) (5,−2) (5,0) (5,2) (5,3). Plot the points in the graph and join them.We get
a straight line parallel to Y axis at a distance of 5 units from the Y axis.
3.9.9 Scale in a graph
There will be situations in drawing a graph where ‘y’ is a big multiple of ‘x’ and the usual
graph in units may not be enough to locate the ‘y’ coordinate and vice-versa. In this situation,

www.tntextbooks.in
we use the concept of scale in both the axes as per the need. Represent a convenient scale at the
right side corner of the graph. A few examples are given below.
Y Y
6 150
4 100
2 50
X'−15 −10 −5 O 5 10 15 X X'−30 −20 −10 O 10 20 30 X

−2 −50
−4 −100
Y' Y'
On the X axis 1 cm = 5 units. On the X axis 1 cm = 10 units.

Example 1 On the Y axis 1 cm = 2 units. Example 2
On the Y axis 1 cm = 50 units.
3.10 Linear Graph

Y
On the Y axis 1cm = 1unit
3.10.1 Linear pattern
7
Plot the following points on a
coordinate plane: (0, 2), (1, 3), (2, 4), (3, 5), 6 (4,6)
(4, 6).What do you find? They all lie on
a line! There is some pattern in them. 5 (3,5)
Look at the y- coordinate in each ordered
4 (2,4)
pair: 2 = 0+2; 3 = 1+2; 4 = 2+2; 5 = 3+2;
6 = 4+2 In each pair, the y- coordinate 3 (1,3)
is 2 more than the x- coordinate. The
coordinates of each point have the 2 (0,2)
same relationship between them. All
1
the points plotted lie on a line!
In such a case, when all the points
O
plotted lie on a line, we say ‘a linear X' -1 1 2 3 4 5 6 X
pattern’ exists. -1
In this example, we found that in Y'
each ordered pair y value = x value +2.
Therefore the linear pattern above can be denoted by the algebraic equation y = x + 2. Such
an equation is called a linear equation and the line graph for linear equation is called a
linear graph.
Algebra 115

www.tntextbooks.in
Linear equations use one (or more) variables where one variable is dependent on the other(s).
The longer the distance we travel by a taxi, the more we have to pay. The distance travelled
is an example of an independent variable. Being dependent on the distance, the taxi fare is
called the dependent variable.
The more one uses electricity, greater will be the amount of electricity bill. The amount of
electricity consumed is an example for independent variable and the bill amount is naturally
the dependent variable.
3.10.2 Graph of a linear function in two variables

We have talked about parallel lines, intersecting lines etc., in geometry but never actually
looked at how far apart they were, or where they were .Drawing graphs helps us place lines. A
linear equation is an equation with two variables (like x and y) whose graph is a line. To graph
a linear equation, we need to have at least two points, but it is usually safe to use more than two
points. (Why?) When choosing points, it would be nice to include both positive and negative
values as well as zero. There is a unique line passing through any pair of points.
Example 3.44 x y = 5x
x −3 −1 0 2 3
Draw the graph of y = 5 x
y −15 −5 0 10 15 −3 y = 5 × (−3) = −15
Solution: −1 y = 5 × (−1) = −5
The given equation y = 5 x means that for any value of x, 0 y = 5 × (0) = 0
y takes five times of x value.
2 y = 5 × (2) = 10
Plot the point (−3,−15) (−1,−5) (0,0) (2,10) (3,15) 3 y = 5 × (3) = 15
Y Scale: On the X axis 1cm = 1unit

20 On the Y axis 1cm = 5units
15 (3,15)
10 (2,10)
5
5x
y=
(0,0)
X' 4 3 2 1 O 1 2 3 4 5 X
(1,-5) 5
10
(3,15)
15
Y'

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 3.45
Y
Graph the equation y = x + 1. On the Y axis 1cm = 1unit
Begin by choosing a couple of 4
values for x and y. It will firstly help
to see 3 (2,3)
(i) what happens to y when x is x+1
2 y=
zero and
(ii) what happens to x when y is 1 (0,1)
zero. (–1,0)
After this we can go on to find one
X' –3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3 4 X
or two more values.
Let us find at least two more (–2,–1) –1
ordered pairs. For easy graphing,
–2
let us avoid fractional answers.
We shall make suitable guesses. Y'
x y = x+1
−2 y = −2+1 = -1 Note
−1 y = −1+1 = 0
The orientation of the graph
0 y = 0+1 = 1
x −2 −1 0 1 2 will be different according to the
1 y = 1+1 = 2 scale chosen.
y −1 0 1 2 3 2 y = 2+1 = 3
We have now five points of the graph: (−2,−1) (−1, 0) (0, 1) (1, 2) and (2, 3).
Try these
Identify and correct the errors
Y Y Y
Scale: X axis 1cm = 1unit
9 3 3
8
Y axis 1cm = 1unit (3,2)
7
6
5 2 2 (2,0)
4
3
2 1 1
1 O (–2,1)
–7 –6 –5 –4–3–2 –1 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 (0,1)
X' –1 X
–2 X' –3 –2 –1 O 10 20 30 X X' –3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3 X
–3
–4 –1
–5
–6 (–1,–2)
–7
–8 –1 –2
(–2,2)
Y' Y' Y'
(i) (ii) (iii)
Exercise 3.9
(i) y = p x where p ∈z always passes through the__________.
(ii) The intersecting point of the line x = 4 and y = − 4 is__________.
Algebra 117

www.tntextbooks.in
(iii) Scale for the given graph , Y

75
On the x-axis 1 cm = ------- units
50
y-axis 1 cm = ------- units
25
X' −9 −6 −3 O 3 6 9 X
(i) The points (1,1) (2,2) (3,3) lie on a same straight line. −25
(ii) y =−9 x not passes through the origin.
−50
3. Will a line pass through (2, 2) if it intersects the axes at Y'
(2, 0) and (0, 2).
4. A
line passing through (4, −2) and intersects the Y-axis at (0, 2). Find a point on the line in
the second quadrant.
5. If the points P(5, 3) Q(−3, 3) R(−3, −4) and S form a rectangle, then find the coordinate of S.
6. A
line passes through (6, 0) and (0, 6) and an another line passes through (−3,0) and
(0, −3). What are the points to be joined to get a trapezium?
7. F
ind the point of intersection of the line joining points (−3, 7) (2, −4) and (4,6) (−5,−7). Also
find the point of intersection of these lines and also their intersection with the axis.
8. Draw the graph of the following equations, (i) x = −7 (ii) y = 6
9. Draw the graph of (i) y = −3 x ii) y = x−4 iii) y = 2x+5
10. Find the values.
a) b) c)
y=x+3 2x + y − 6 = 0 y = 3x+1
x 0 –2 x 0 –1 x –1 0 1 2
y 0 –3 y 0 –2 y
Exercise 3.10
1. The sum of three numbers is 58. The second number is three times of two-fifth of the first
number and the third number is 6 less than the first number. Find the three numbers.
2. In triangle ABC, the measure of ∠B is two-third of the measure of ∠A. The measure of
∠C is 20° more than the measure of ∠A. Find the measures of the three angles.
3. Two equal sides of an isosceles triangle are 5y−2 and 4y+9 units. The third side is 2y+5
units. Find ῾y᾿ and the perimeter of the triangle.
4. In the given figure, angle XOZ and angle ZOY form a Z
linear pair. Find the value of x.
5. Draw a graph for the following data:
Side of a square (cm) 2 3 4 5 6 (5x+6)˚

(3x-2)˚
Area (cm2) 4 9 16 25 36 Y O X
Does the graph represent a linear relation?


www.tntextbooks.in
6. Three consecutive integers, when taken in increasing order and multiplied by 2, 3 and 4
respectively, total up to 74. Find the three numbers.
7. 331 students went on a field trip. Six buses were filled to capacity and 7 students had to
travel in a van. How many students were there in each bus?
8. A mobile vendor has 22 items, some which are pencils and others are ball pens. On a
particular day, he is able to sell the pencils and ball pens. Pencils are sold for `15 each and
ball pens are sold at `20 each. If the total sale amount with the vendor is `380, how many
pencils did he sell?
9. Draw the graph of the lines y = x, y = 2x, y = 3x and y = 5x on the same graph sheet.
Is there anything special that you find in these graphs?
10. Consider the number of angles of a convex polygon and the number of sides of that polygon.
Tabulate as follows:
Name of Polygon No. of angles No. of sides
Use this to draw a graph illustrating the relationship between the number of angles and the
number of sides of a polygon.
SUMMARY
� When the product of two algebraic expressions we follow,
Multiply the signs of the terms,
Multiply the corresponding co-efficients of the terms.
Multiply the variable factors by using laws of exponents.
For dividing a polynomial by a monomial, divide each term of the polynomial by a
�
monomial.
� Identity: An identity is an equation is satisfied by any value that replaces its variables (s).
(a + b)2 = a 2 + 2ab + b2 (x + a)(x + b) = x 2 + (a + b)x + ab
2 2
(a b) a 2ab b 2
(a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3
a 2 − b 2 = (a + b ) (a − b ) (a − b)3 = a3 − 3a2b + 3ab2 − b3
( x + b) ( x + b) ( x + c ) = x 3 + (a + b + c ) x 2 + (ab + bc + ca ) x + abc
� Factorisation: Expressing an algebraic expression as the product of two or more
expression is called Factorisation.
� An equation containing only one variable with its highest power as one is called a linear
equation in one variable.
� The value which replaces a variable in an equation so as to make the two sides of the equation
equal is called a solution or root of the equation.
� Graphing is just a visual method for showing relationships between numbers.
� The horizontal line is named as XOX’, called the X-axis. The vertical line is named as YOY’,
called the Y-axis. Both the axes are called coordinate axes. The plane containing the x axis
and the y axis is known as the coordinate plane or the Cartesian plane.
� A point is denoted by a pair (a,b) of two numbers ‘a’ and ‘b’ listed in a specific order in which
‘a’ represents the distance along the X-axis and ‘b’ represents the distance along the Y axis. It
is called an ordered pair (a,b).
� The coordinate axes divide the plane of the graph into four regions called quadrants.
� The line graph for the linear equation is called a linear graph.
Algebra 119

www.tntextbooks.in
ICT CORNER
Step-1 Open the Browser and type the URL given below. Through this activity you will know
about the Algebra, operations on
Step-2 Click on any one of the link in the items to know about the them and study their properties as
basics in algebra, exponents, polynomial, quadric equation etc. well.
Step-3 For example, click on the “Balance While adding and
subtracting”, link under the Basic menu. A new tab will open in
the browser where you can see the interactive game on adding
and subtracting algebra.
Step-4 Likewise you can learn all the concepts in algebra.
Step 1 Step 2
Step 3 Step 4
Web URL Algebra:

https://www.mathsisfun.com/algebra/index.html
ICT CORNER
Step-1 Open the Browser type the URL Link given below (or) Scan the Expected Outcome
QR Code. GeoGebra work book named “ALGEBRA” will open.
Click on the worksheet named “Point Plotting”.
Step-2 In the given worksheet you can get new point by clicking on
“New point”.Enter the correct point in the input box and press
enter.
Step 1 Step 2
Browse in the link

Algebra:
https://www.geogebra.org/m/fqxbd7rz#chapter/409574 or Scan the QR Code.

www.tntextbooks.in
LIFE
4 MATHEMATICS
Learning Objectives
To recall the concepts of percentage, profit, loss and simple interest.

To solve problems involving percentage, applications of percentage
in profit, loss, overhead expenses, discount and GST.

To know what compound interest is and to be able to find the compound interest
through patterns and formula and use them in simple problems.

To find the difference between compound interest and simple interest for
2 years and 3 years.
To recall direct and inverse proportions.
To know about compound variation and do problems on it.
To solve time and work problems.
4.1 Introduction
The following conversation happens in a Math class of VIII Std.
Teacher : Dear students, money collection is being made for the Flag Day and so far 32 out
of 40 students in VII Std and 42 out of 50 students from our class have contributed.
Can anyone of you say, whose contribution is better?
32 42
Sankar :
Teacher, 32 out of 40 is and 42 out of 50 is . The corresponding like fractions
40 50
160 168
of them are and respectively. So, our class students’ contribution is better.
200 200
Teacher : Very Good, Sankar. Students, is there any other way to compare?
32 32
Bumrah : Yes Teacher, percentages will help. Here, = × 100 = 80 % and
40 40
42 42
= × 100 = 84 % Clearly, our class contribution is 4 % more than VII Std.
50 50
Teacher : Well done, Bumrah. You are exactly correct. Can anyone of you say where the use
of percentages is seen more?
Bhuvi : Yes Teacher. My father told me that percentages are used in the calculation of
profit, loss, discount, calculation of tax (eg: GST), interest on investment, growth in
population and depreciation of machines and almost everywhere where comparison
is made. He also had told me that it is an easy tool which is helpful to compare values.
Teacher : Well said, Bhuvi. These are the topics what we are going to see in this chapter
using percentages.
Life Mathematics 121
04_8th_Maths_Life Mathematics_Chap 4.indd 121 20/11/2022 13:12:05

www.tntextbooks.in
The above conversation leads the way to know the application of percentages in various
situations and in the commonly seen problems in our day-to-day life. We will also see direct
and inverse proportions, compound variation and time and work problems topics later.
MATHEMATICS ALIVE – LIFE MATHEMATICS IN REALITY
Money grows faster by The growth of a giraffe over time is an example for direct
compound interest. proportion and see-saw is an example for inverse proportion
Try these
Find the indicated percentage value of the given numbers.
Number
% 60 240 660 852 1200
10 %
20 %
25 %
33 1 %
%
3
4.2 Applications of Percentage in Word Problems
We know that Per Cent means per hundred or out of a hundred. It is denoted by the symbol %.
x% denotes the fraction x . It is very useful in comparing quantities easily. Let us see its uses
100
in the following word problems.
Example 4.1
If x % of 600 is 450, then find the value of x.
Solution:
Given, x % of 600 = 450
x
× 600 = 450
100
450
x=
6
x = 75

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 4.2
When a number is decreased by 25 % , it becomes 120. Find the number.
Solution:
Let the number be x . If we start with a quantity A and then
decrease that quantity by x% , we will get
Given, x − 25 x = 120 the decreased quantity as,
100
100 x − 25 x  x 
D = 1 − A
= 120  100 
100
75 x
= 120 Aliter: Using the above formula,
100
25 75
120 × 100 D = 1 A 120 A
⇒ x = 100 100
75
100
⇒ x = 160 A 120 = 160
75
Example 4.3
Akila scored 80 % of marks in an examination. If her score was 576 marks, then find the
maximum marks of the examination.
Solution:
Let the maximum marks be x .
Now, 80 % of x = 576
80
× x = 576
100
100
⇒ x = 576 × = 720 marks
80
Therefore, the maximum marks of the examination = 720.
Example 4.4
If the price of Orid dhall after 20% increase
If we start with a quantity A
is ₹96 per kg, then find the original price of
and then increase that quantity by
Orid dhall per kg.
x% , we will get the increased quantity as,
Solution:
 x 
I = 1 + A
Let the original price of Orid dhall be ₹ x .  100 
ew price after 20% increase
N
Aliter: Using the above formula,
20 120 x
= x + x = 20
100 100 I = 1 A
120 x 100
Given that, = 96 120
100 96 A
96 × 100 100
∴x = 100
120 A 96
120
∴ Original price of Orid dhall per kg, x = ₹80 A = ₹80

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
1. What percentage of a day is 10 hours?
2. Divide ₹350 among P, Q and R such that P gets 50% of what Q gets and Q gets 50% of
what R gets.
Think
With a lot of pride, the traffic police commissioner
of a city reported that the accidents had decreased by 200%
in one year. He came up with this number by stating that
the increase in accidents from 200 to 600 is clearly a 200%
rise and now that it had gone down from 600 last year to
200 this year should be a 200% fall. Is this decrease from
600 to 200, the same 200% as reported by him? Justify.
Example 4.5
The income of a person is increased by 10 % and then decreased by 10 % . Find the change
in his income.
Solution:
Let his initial income be ₹ x .
Income after 10% increase is
Aliter:
 10  110 11 Let his income be ₹100
₹x+ ×x = ₹ x (or) ₹ x
100  100 10
(or) Income after 10% increase is
Now, income after 10% decrease is,
10
11x 10  11x  100 + 100 × = ₹110.
₹ −   100
10 100  10 
11x 11x 110 x − 11x 99 x Now, income after 10% decrease is,
− = =₹
10 100 100 100 10
110 – 110 × = 110 – 11 = ₹99
99 x x 100
∴ Net change in his income = x − =
100 100 ∴ Net change in his income = 100 – 99 = 1
x x x
1100
= 100
∴ Percentage change = 100 %
× 100
× 100 = 1%
= 1% ∴ Percentage change = = × 100 %
× 100 = 1% .
= 1%
x x 100x
That is, income of the person is reduced by 1%. That is, income of the person is reduced by 1%.
Note
For any given number, when it is increased first by x % and then decreased by y %,
 xy 
then the value of the number is increased or decreased by  x + y +  % . Use ‘negative’
 100 
sign for decrease and also assume ‘decrease’ if the sign is negative. Use this note to check
the answer for the Example 4.5.

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 4.1
(i) If 30 % of x is 150, then x is _________.
(ii) 2 minutes is _________ % to an hour.
(iii) If x % of x = 25, then x = ________.
(iv) In a school of 1400 students, there are 420 girls. The percentage of boys in the school
is ________.
(v) 0.5252 is ________ % .
2. Rewrite each underlined part using percentage language.
(i) One half of the cake is distributed to the children.
(ii) Aparna scored 7.5 points out of 10 in a competition.
(iii) The statue was made of pure silver.
(iv) 48 out of 50 students participated in sports.
(v) Only 2 persons out of 3 will be selected in the interview.
3. 48 is 32% of which number?
4. What is 25% of 30% of 400?
5. If a car is sold for ₹200000 from its original price of ₹300000, then
find the percentage of decrease in the value of the car.
6. If the difference between 75% of a number and 60% of the same
number is 82.5, then find 20% of that number.
7. A number when increased by 18% gives 236. Find the number.
8. A number when decreased by 20% gives 80. Find the number.
9. A number is increased by 25% and then decreased by 20%. Find the percentage change in
that number.
10. The ratio of boys and girls in a class is 5:3. If 16% of boys and 8% of girls failed in an
examination, then find the percentage of passed students.
11. 12% of 250 litre is the same as ________of 150 litre.
(A) 10% (B) 15% (C) 20% (D) 30%
12. If three candidates A, B and C in a school election got 153,245 and 102 votes respectively,
then the percentage of votes got by the winner is___________.
(A) 48% (B) 49% (C) 50% (D) 45%
13. 15% of 25% of 10000 =___________.
(A) 375 B) 400 C) 425 (D) 475
14. When 60 is subtracted from 60% of a number to give 60, the number is
(A) 60 (B) 100 (C) 150 (D) 200
15. If 48% of 48 = 64% of x , then x =
(A) 64 (B) 56 (C) 42 (D) 36

www.tntextbooks.in
4.3 Profit, Loss, Discount, Overhead Expenses and GST

4.3.1 Profit and Loss
Try these
1. I f the selling price of an article is less than the cost price of the article, then there
is a ________.
2. A
n article costing ₹5000 is sold for ₹4850. Is there a profit or loss? What percentage
is it?
3. I f the ratio of cost price and the selling price of an article is 5:7, then the profit/ gain
is_________%.
Cost Price (C.P)

The amount for which an article is bought is called its Cost Price (C.P).
Selling Price (S.P)
The amount for which an article is sold is called its Selling Price (S.P).
Profit or Gain
When the S.P is more than the C.P, then there is a profit or gain.
Therefore, Profit/Gain = S.P − C.P
Loss
When the S.P is less than the C.P, then there is a loss.
Therefore, Loss = C.P − S.P
It is to be noted that the profit or loss is always calculated on the cost price.
Formulae:
 Profit 
(i) Profit or Gain % =  × 100 %
 C .P 
 Loss 
(ii) Loss % =  × 100 %
 C .P 
(100 + Profit%)  
 100
 ×× S.P
(iii) Selling Price, S.P = × C.P (or) Cost Price, C.P =
100  ( 100 + Profit% )
(iv) Selling Price, S.P =
(100 − Loss%) × C.P (or) Cost Price, C.P = 100
× S.P
100 (100 − Loss%)
4.3.2 Discount
During the month of Aadi and festival seasons, shopkeepers offer a certain percentage of
rebate on the marked price of the articles in order to increase the sales and also to clear the old
stock. This rebate is known as discount.

www.tntextbooks.in
Marked price
In big shops and departmental stores, we see that every product is tagged with a card
and a price marked on it. This price marked on the card is called the marked price.
Based on this marked price, the shopkeeper offers a certain percentage of discount. The
price payable by the customer after deduction of discount is called the selling price.
That is, Selling Price = Marked Price – Discount
4.3.3 Overhead Expenses
Traders, retailers and shopkeepers are involved in the buying and selling of goods.
Sometimes, when articles like machinery, furniture, electronic items etc., are bought, a few
expenses may happen on their repairs, transportation and labour charges etc., These expenses
are included in the cost price and are called as overhead expenses.
Total Cost Price = Cost Price + Overhead Expenses
Discount
Discount % = × 100%
marked price
4.3.4 Goods and Services Tax (GST)
The goods and services tax (GST) is the only common tax in India levied on almost
all the goods and the services meant for domestic consumption. The GST is remitted by
the traders and the consumers alike and is also one of the main sources of income to both
the Central and State Governments.There are 3 types of GST namely Central GST (CGST),
State GST (SGST) and Integrated GST (IGST). For union territories, there is UTGST.
The GST is shared by the Central and the State Governments equally. There are also
many products like Egg, Honey, Milk, Salt etc., which are exempted from GST. Products like
Petrol, Diesel etc., do not come under GST and they are taxed separately. The GST council has
fitted over 1300 goods and 500 services under four tax slabs namely 5%, 12%, 18% and 28%.
Example 4.6
Ranjith bought a washing machine for ₹16150 and paid ₹1350 for its transportation.
Then, he sold it for ₹19250. Find his gain or loss percentage.
Solution:
Total C.P of the washing machine
= C.P + Overhead Expenses
= 16150 + 1350 = ₹17500
S.P = ₹19250
Here, S.P > C.P. Hence, there is a gain.
 Gain   19250 − 17500 
Gain % =  × 100 % =  × 100 %
 C .P   17500 
 Gain   19250 − 17500
175000571 − 05291   niaG 
 × 100 % =  = 001 × × 100 =%
% = 10%
10%  = % 001 × 
C .P    17500 00571
17500   P. C 

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 4.7
5
If the selling price of an LED TV is equal to of its cost price, then find the gain / profit
percentage. 4
Solution:
Let the C.P of the LED TV be ₹x.
5
∴ S.P = x
4
5 x
Profit = S.P – C.P = x − x =
4 4
 Profit 
Profit % =  × 100 %
 C .P 
 x/4  1 
∴ Profit %=  × 100 % =  × 100 % = 25 %
 x  4 
Example 4.8
The cost price of 16 boxes of strawberries is equal to the selling price of 20 boxes of
strawberries. Find the gain or loss percentage.
Solution:
Let the C.P of one strawberry box be ₹ x .
C.P of 20 strawberry boxes = 20 x and
S.P of 20 strawberry boxes = C.P of 16 strawberry boxes = 16 x (given)
Here, S.P < C.P, hence there is a loss.
Loss = C.P –S.P = 20 x − 16 x =4 x
 Loss 
Loss % =  × 100 %
 C .P 
 4x 
= × 100 %
 20 x 
∴ Loss % = 20 %
If the cost price of x articles = selling price of y articles, then profit %

 x− y 
= × 100 % .If the answer is negative, then it is treated as loss. Check and verify this
 y 
for Example 4.8.
Example 4.9
By selling a bicycle for ₹4275, a shopkeeper loses 5%. For how much should he sell it to
have a profit of 5%?

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
S.P of the bicycle = ₹4275
Loss = 5%
100
∴ C.P = × S.P
(100 − Loss%)
100
= ₹4500
× 4275 = Rs. 4500
95
Now, C.P = ₹4500 and the desired profit = 5%
∴ Desired S.P =
(100 + Profit%) C.P
×
100
100 + 5
= × 4500 = 105 × 45 = ₹4725
100
∴ To have a profit of 5%, he should sell the bicycle for ₹4725.
Example 4.10
The price of a rain coat was slashed from ₹1060 to ₹901 by a
shopkeeper in the rainy season to boost the sales. Find the rate of
discount given by him.
Solution:
Discount = Marked Price –Selling Price
= 1060 – 901
= ₹159
 Gain   19250 − 159 00571 − 05291 
17500  niaG 
 ∴ Discount
× 100 % =  % =% 001 × ×× 100
100 %%  = % 001 × 
C .P 175001060 
00571   P. C 
= 15%
Think
A shopkeeper marks the price of a marker board 15% above the cost price and then
allows a discount of 15% on the marked price. Does he gain or lose in the transaction?
Example 4.11
Find the single discount in percentage which is equivalent to two successive discounts of
25% and 20% given on an article.
Solution:
Let the marked price of an article be ₹100.
25
First discount of 25% = 100 × = ₹25
100
Price after first discount = 100 − 25 = ₹75
20
Second discount of 20% = 75 × = ₹15
100

www.tntextbooks.in
Price after second discount = 75 − 15 = ₹60

∴ Net selling price = ₹60
∴ Single discount in percentage equivalent to two given successive discounts = (100–60)% = 40%.
Note
If there are 2 successive discounts of a % and b % respectively, then
�
 a  b 
S.P = 1 −  1 −  × M.P.
 100 100 
zz Single discount in % equivalent to 3 successive discounts of a %, b % and c % respectively
  a  b  c 
= 1 − 1 −  1 −  1 −   × 100% .
  100 100 100  
(Use this formula for the Example 4.11 and check the answer).
Example 4.12
A water heater is sold by a trader for ₹10502 including GST at 18%. Find the marked price
of the water heater and GST.
Solution:
Let the marked price be ₹ x .
18 x
Now, x += 10502
100
118 x
= 10502
100
∴ Marked price, x = ₹8900
GST at 18% = ₹10502 – ₹8900 = ₹1602
(or)
18
= 8900 × = ₹1602
100
Example 4.13
A family went to a hotel and spent ₹350 for food and paid extra 5% as GST. Calculate the
CGST and SGST.
Solution:
Cost of food = ₹350
Extra 5% paid as GST is equally shared by the Central and the State Governments at 2.5% each.
2.5
∴ CGST = SGST = 350 × = ₹8.75
100
Exercise 4.2
(i) Loss or gain percentage is always calculated on the__________.
(ii) A mobile phone is sold for ₹8400 at a gain of 20%. The cost price of the mobile phone
is________.

www.tntextbooks.in
1
(iii) An article is sold for ₹555 at a loss of 7 %. The cost price of the article is ________.
2
(iv) A mixer grinder marked at ₹4500 is sold for ₹4140 after discount. The rate of discount
is __________.
(v) The total bill amount of a shirt costing ₹575 and a T-shirt costing ₹325 with GST of 5%
is_______.
2. If selling an article for ₹820 causes 10% loss on the selling price, then find its cost price.
3. I f the profit earned on selling an article for ₹810 is the same as loss on selling it for ₹530,
then find the cost price of the article.
4. I f the selling price of 10 rulers is the same as the cost price of 15 rulers, then find the profit
percentage.
5. Some articles are bought at 2 for ₹15 and sold at 3 for ₹25. Find the gain percentage.
6. B
y selling a speaker for ₹768, a man loses 20%. In order to gain 20%, how
much should he sell the speaker?
7. Find the unknowns x, y and z.
S.No Name of the item Marked Price Selling Price Discount
(i) Book ₹225 x 8%
(ii) LED TV y ₹11970 5%
(iii) Digital clock ₹750 ₹615 z
8. Find the total bill amount for the data given below:
S.No Name of the item Marked Price Discount GST
(i) School bag ₹500 5% 12 %
(ii) Hair dryer ₹2000 10 % 28 %
9. A
branded Air-Conditioner (AC) has a marked price of ₹38000. There are 2 options given
for the customer.
(i) Selling Price is the same ₹38000 but with attractive gifts
worth ₹3000
(or)
(ii) Discount of 8% on the marked price but no free gifts.
Which offer is better?

www.tntextbooks.in
10. If a mattress is marked for ₹7500 and is available at two successive discounts of 10% and
20%, find the amount to be paid by the customer.

11. A fruit vendor sells fruits for ₹200 gaining ₹40. His gain percentage is
2
(A) 20% (B) 22% (C) 25% (D) 16 %
3
12. By selling a flower pot for ₹528, a woman gains 20%. At what price should she sell it to
gain 25%?
(A) ₹500 (B) ₹550 (C) ₹553 (D) ₹573
13. A man buys an article for ₹150 and makes overhead expenses which are 12% of the cost
price. At what price must he sell it to gain 5%?
(A) ₹180 (B) ₹168 (C) ₹176.40 (D) ₹88.20
14. What is the marked price of a hat which is bought for ₹210 at 16% discount?
(A) ₹243 (B) ₹176 (C) ₹230 (D) ₹250
15. The single discount in % which is equivalent to two successive discounts of 20% and 25% is
(A) 40% (B) 45% (C) 5% (D) 22.5%
4.4 Compound Interest

The most powerful force in this universe is_______. How would you complete this
quote? The world renowned physicist Albert Einstein completed this quote with the word
Compound Interest.
PNR
When money is borrowed or deposited on simple interest (II= ), then the interest is
100
calculated evenly on the principal throughout the loan or deposit period.
Try these
1. The formula to find the simple interest for a given principal is __________.
2. Find the simple interest on ₹900 for 73 days at 8 % p.a.
3. In how many years will ₹2000 become ₹3600 at 10 % p.a simple interest?
In post offices, banks, insurance companies and other financial institutions, there is
another type of interest calculation on offer. Here, the interest accrued during the first time
period (say 6 months) is added to the original principal and the amount so obtained is taken
as the principal for the second time period (that is, the next 6 months) and this keeps going
on, up to the fixed time agreement between the banker and the depositer.

www.tntextbooks.in
After a certain period, the difference between the amount and the money deposited is
called the compound interest which is abbreviated as C.I. Clearly, the compound interest will
be more than the simple interest just because the principal keeps on changing for every time
period.
We call the time period after which the interest is added to the principal, as the conversion
period. For example, if the interest is compounded say quarterly, there will be four conversion
periods in a year, every 3 months. In such cases, the interest rate will be one fourth of the annual
rate and the number of times that interest will be compounded is four times the number of
years.
In case of simple interest, the principal remains the same for the whole duration where
as in case of compound interest, the principal keeps on changing as per the conversion period.
The simple interest and the compound interest remains the same for the first conversion period.
Illustration 1
To find the compound interest on ₹20000 for 4 years at 10 % p.a compounded annually
and compare it with the simple interest obtained for the same.
Calculating Compound Interest Calculating Simple Interest
Principal for the I year = ₹20000 Recall that,
 20000 × 10 × 1 PNR
Interest for the I year 
  = ₹ 2000 Simple Interest, II=
100 100
Amount at the end of I Year (P+I) = ₹22000 Here, P = ₹20000
That is, Principal for the II year = ₹22000 N = 4 years
 22000 × 10 × 1 R = 10%
Interest for the II year   = ₹ 2200

∴ I = 20000 × 4 × 10
100

Amount at the end of II year = ₹24200 100
That is, I = ` 8000
That is, Principal for the III year = ₹24200
 24200 × 10 × 1
Interest for the III year   = ₹ 2420
 100
Amount at the end of III year = ₹26620
That is, Principal for the IV year = ₹26620

 26620 × 10 × 1
Interest for the IV year   = ₹ 2662
 100
∴ Amount at the end of IV year = ₹29282
∴ Compound Interest for 4 years = A − P = 29282 – 20000 = ₹9282
What we observe from the calculation of C.I is a repeated multiplication by the
factor 1.1 as 20000 (´1.1 ), 22000 (´1.1 ), 24200 (´1.1 ), 26620 (´1.1 ) for 4 years.
We also note that the compound interest (₹9282) grows faster and is clearly more than the
simple interest (₹8000) obtained. When the time period is longer, the above method is time

www.tntextbooks.in
consuming. So, to save time and to find the amount and the compound interest easily we have
a formula as explained in the following illustration.
Illustration 2
To calculate the amount and compound interest for ₹1000 for 3 years at 10% p.a compound
annually.
You deposit ₹ 1000
End of I year End of II year End of III year
at the beginning of I year
A=
₹13
31
0 1 2 3
Amount in account is Amount in account is Amount in account is

1000 × (1.10) 1000 × (1.10) × (1.10) 1000 × (1.10) × (1.10) × (1.10)
=1000 × (1.10)1 =1000 × (1.10)2 =1000 × (1.10)3
Flow chart showing 10% interest being compounded annually
 r   r   r 
This leads to the pattern for Amount as P 1 +  for the I year, P 1 +  1 + 
 100  100  100 
 r   r   r 
for the II year, P 1 + 1+ 1+ for the III year and so on. In general,
 100   100   100 
r n 10 3
A = P 1 for the n year. Here, the amount after 3 years, A = 1000 1 100 = `1331
th
100
and so, C.I = A − P = `331.
In 1626, Peter Minuit convinced the Wappinger

Indians to sell him the Manhattan Island for 24 dollars. If the
native Americans had put the 24 dollars into a bank account
at 5 % interest rate compounded monthly, by the year 2020
there would be well over 5.5 billion (550 crores) dollars in the
account! This is the might of compound interest!
The following formulae will be helpful in calculating the compound interest easily for
the following time periods.
(i) When the interest is compounded annually, we have
r n
A = P 1
100
where A is the amount, P is the principal, r is the rate of interest per annum and n is the
number of years and we shall get the compound interest as C.I = Amount – Principal.
(ii) When the interest is compounded half yearly, we have

 r 2n
A = P 1+ 
200 

www.tntextbooks.in
(iii) When the interest is compounded quarterly, we have

 r 4n
A = P 1 + 
 400 
(iv)
When the interest is compounded annually but rate of interest differs year by year,
we have
 a   b   c 
A = P 1 +  1 +  1 +  ...
 100 100  100 
where a, b and c are interest rates for I, II and III years respectively.
b
(v)
When interest is compounded annually but time period is in fraction say a years,
c
we have
 b 

 r a  c × r 
A = P 1 +  1 + 
 100   100 
 
 
(Use of calculators are permitted for lengthy calculations and also to verify answers).
Example 4.14
Find the C.I for the data given below:
(i) Principal = ₹4000, r = 5% p.a, n = 2 years, interest compounded annually.
1
(ii) Principal = ₹5000, r = 4% p.a, n = 1 years, interest compounded half-yearly.
2
(iii) Principal = ₹30000, r = 7% for I year, r = 8% for II year, compounded annually.
3
(iv) Principal = ₹10000, r = 8% p.a, n = 2 years, interest compounded yearly.
4
Solution: 
 r n
(i) Amount, A = P 1 + 
 100 

 5 2
= 4000 1 + 
 100 
21 21
= 4000 × ×
20 20
A = ₹4410
∴ C.I =A − P = 4410 − 4000 =₹410
3
 r 2n   2×
(ii) Amount, A = P 1 +  = 5000 1 + 4  2 = 5000 × 51 × 51 × 51
 200   200  50 50 50
= 51 × 10.2 × 10.2
= ₹5306.04
∴ C.I = A − P = 5306.04 − 5000
= ₹306.04

www.tntextbooks.in
 a   b 
(iii) Amount, A = P 1 +  1 + 
 100  100 
 7   8 
= 30000 1 +  1 + 
 100 100 
107 108
= 30000 × ×
100 100
A = ₹34668
∴ C.I = A − P = 34668 − 30000 = ₹4668
 b   3 
a  ×r  2  ×8 
   
(iv) 
Amount, A = P 1 +
r  
 1+
c 
 = 10000 1 + 8  1 + 4 

 100   100   100   100 
   
 
2
 27   53 
= 10000    
 25   50 
27 27 53
= 10000 × × ×
25 25 50
A = ₹12363.84
∴ C.I = A − P = 12363.84 − 10000 = ₹2363.84
4.4.1 Applications of Compound Interest Formula

The compound interest formula is used in the following situations.
n n
r r
(i) P 1
To find the increase 100 or decrease
P 1 in population.
100
(ii) To find the growth of cells when the rate of growth is given.
(iii) To find the depreciation in the values of machines, vehicles, utility appliances etc.,
Example 4.15
The value of a motor cycle 2 years ago was ₹70000. It depreciates at the rate of 4% p.a.
Find its present value.
Solution: n
 r 
Depreciated value = P 1 − 
 100 
 4 2
= 70000 1 − 
 100 
96 96
= 70000 × ×
100 100
= ₹64512

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 4.16
The bacteria in a culture grows by 5% in the first hour, decreases by 8% in the second
hour and again increases by 10% in the third hour. Find the count of the bacteria at the end of
3 hours, if its initial count was 10000.
Solution:
Bacteria at the end of 3 hours
 a   b   c 
A = P 1 + 1+
− 1+
 100   100   100 
 5   8   10 
= 10000 1 + 1− 1+ (‘−’ because ‘decrease’)
 100   100   100 
105 92 110
= 10000 × × ×
100 100 100
A = ₹10626
Example 4.17
The population of a town is increasing at the rate of 6% p.a. It was 238765 in the year
2018. Find the population in the year 2016 and 2020.
Solution:
Let the population in 2016 be P.
 r n
Then, A = P 1 + 
 100 
 2  53  2
6 
⇒ 238765 
= P 1 +  = P  
 100   50 
50 50
⇒ P = 238765 × ×
53 53
∴ P = 212500
Let the population in 2020 be A
r n 
Then, A = P 1 +

100  
 2
 6 
∴ A = 238765 1 +
 100 
53 53
= 238765 × ×
50 50
= 95.506 × 53 × 53
A = 268276
∴ The population in the year 2016 was 212500 and that in the year 2020 will be 268276.

www.tntextbooks.in
4.4.2 Difference between C.I and S.I

� There is no difference in C.I and S.I for the first year or the first conversion period.
� For 2 years, the difference in C.I and S.I is
2
 r 
C.I – S.I =P 
 100 
� For 3 years, the difference in C.I and S.I is
2
 r   r 
C.I – S.I = P  3+

 100   100 

Example 4.18
Find the difference in C.I and S.I for
(i) P = ₹5000, r = 4% p.a, n = 2 years.
(ii) P = ₹8000, r = 5% p.a, n = 3 years.
Solution:
 r 
2
4 4
(i) For 2 years, C.I – S.I = P   = 5000 × × = ₹8
100 100 100
 r   r 
2
(ii) For 3 years, C.I – S.I = P   3+

 100   100 

5 5  5 
= 8000 × × × 3+ 
100 100  100 
61
= 20 × = ₹61
20
Exercise 4.3
(i) The compound interest on ₹5000 at 12 % p.a for 2 years, compounded annually is
____________.
(ii) The compound interest on ₹8000 at 10 % p.a for 1 year, compounded half yearly is
____________.
(iii) The annual rate of growth in population of a town is 10 % . If its present population
is 26620, then the population 3 years ago was_________.
(iv) If the compound interest is calculated quarterly, the amount is found using the
formula __________.
(v) The difference between the C.I and S.I for 2 years for a principal of ₹5000 at the rate
of interest 8 % p.a is ___________.

www.tntextbooks.in

 r n
(i) Depreciation value is calculated by the formula, P  1 −  .
100 
(ii) If the present population of a city is P and it increases at the rate of r % p.a, then the
 r n
population n years ago would be P 1 +  .
 100 
(iii) The present value of a machine is ₹16800. It depreciates at 25 % p.a. Its worth after
2 years is ₹9450.
(iv) The time taken for ₹1000 to become ₹1331 at 20 % p.a, compounded annually
is 3 years.
(v) The compound interest on ₹16000 for 9 months at 20 % p.a, compounded quarterly
is ₹2522.
3. Find the compound interest on ₹3200 at 2.5 % p.a for 2 years, compounded annually.
1
4. Find the compound interest for 2 years on ₹4000 at 10 % p.a, if the interest is
2
compounded yearly.
5. A principal becomes ₹2028 in 2 years at 4 % p.a compound interest. Find the principal.
1
6. In how many years will ₹3375 become ₹4096 at 13 % p.a if the interest is compounded
3
half-yearly?
7. Find the C.I on ₹15000 for 3 years if the rates of interest are 15 % , 20 % and 25 % for the
I, II and III years respectively.
8. Find the difference between C.I and S.I on ₹5000 for 1 year at 2 % p.a, if the interest is
compounded half yearly.
9. Find the rate of interest if the difference between C.I and S.I on ₹8000 compounded
annually for 2 years is ₹20.
10. Find the principal if the difference between C.I and S.I on it at 15 % p.a for 3 years is ₹1134.

11. The number of conversion periods in a year, if the interest on a principal is compounded
every two months is___________.
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 12
12. The time taken for ₹4400 to become ₹4851 at 10 % , compounded half yearly is _______.
y 2 4 10 24 30
k= = = = = =
x 1 2 5 12 15
=2
(A) 6 months (B) 1 year (C) 1 years (D) 2 years

2
13. The cost of a machine is ₹18000 and it depreciates at 16 % annually. Its value after
3
2 years will be___________.
(A) ₹12000 (B) ₹12500 (C) ₹15000 (D) ₹16500

www.tntextbooks.in
14. The sum which amounts to ₹2662 at 10 % p.a in 3 years, compounded yearly is_______.
(A) ₹2000 (B) ₹1800 (C) ₹1500 (D) ₹2500
15. The difference between compound and simple interest on a certain sum of money for
2 years at 2 % p.a is ₹1. The sum of money is __________ .
(A) ₹2000 (B) ₹1500 (C) ₹3000 (D) ₹2500
4.5 Compound Variation
Before we could learn about compound variation, let us recall the concepts on direct and
inverse proportions.
If two quantities are such that an increase or decrease in one quantity makes a
corresponding increase or decrease (same effect) in the other quantity, then they are said
to be in direct proportion or said to vary directly. In other words, x and y are said to vary
directly if y=kx always, where k is called the proportionality constant and k > 0 assuming
y
that y depends on x and so k = .
x
For example, let us assume that one of you plan to give 2 pens to each of your friends in
the birthday party. Then the number of pens to be bought will be in direct proportion with
the number of friends who will attend the party. Isn’t it? The following table will help you
understand this clearly.
Number of friends (x) 1 2 5 12 15
Number of pens (y) 2 4 10 24 30
y 2 4 10 24 30
In this case, we find that the proportionality constant, k = = = = = = =2.
x 1 2 5 12 15
Few more examples of Direct Proportion:
1. Distance –Time (under constant speed): If the distance increases, then the time taken to
reach that distance will also increase and vice- versa.
2. Purchase – Spending: If the purchase on utilities for a family during the festival time
increases, then the spending limit also increases and vice versa.
3. WorkTime – Earnings: If the number of hours worked is less, then the pay earned will
also be less and vice-versa.
Similarly, if two quantities are such that an increase or decrease in one quantity makes a
corresponding decrease or increase (opposite effect) in the other quantity, then they are said
to be in inverse (indirect) proportion or said to vary inversely. In other words, x and y are said
to vary inversely, if xy = k always, where k is called proportionality constant and k > 0.
For example, let us assume that a class of 30 students in a school walks on streets in
a village for health awareness campaign in an orderly manner, then we can see an inverse
proportion in the number of rows and columns they walk. The following table will help you
understand this clearly.
Number of students in columns (x) 1 2 3 5 6

Number of students in rows (y) 30 15 10 6 5

www.tntextbooks.in
We can map a few of these arrangements as (5 rows/6 columns) and (6 rows/5 columns)
and see the opposite variations in rows and columns.
In this case, we find that the proportionality constant, k is 30.
Few more examples of Inverse Proportion:
1. Price – Consumption: If the price of consumable products increases, then naturally its
consumption will decrease and vice-versa.
2. Workers – Time: If more workers are employed to complete a work, then the time
taken to complete the work will be less and vice-versa.
3. Speed – Time (Fixed Distance): If we travel with less speed, then the time taken to
cover a given distance will be more and vice-versa.
Now, use the concept of direct and inverse proportions and try to answer the following
questions:
Try these
1. Classify the given examples as direct or inverse proportion:
(i) Weight of pulses to their cost.
(ii) Distance travelled by bus to the price of ticket.
(iii) Speed of the athelete to cover a certain distance.
(iv) Number of workers employed to complete a construction in a specified time.
(v) Area of a circle to its radius.
2. A student can type 21 pages in 15 minutes. At the same rate, how long will it take the
student to type 84 pages?
3. If 35 women can do a piece of work in 16 days, in how many days will 28 women do the
same work?
Let us now see what a Compound Variation is? There will be problems which may
involve a chain of two or more variations in them. This is called as Compound Variation.
The different possibilities of two variations are:
Direct-Direct, Direct-Inverse, Inverse-Direct, Inverse-Inverse.
Note
There are situations where neither direct proportion nor indirect proportion can
be applied. For example, if one can see a parrot at a distance through one eye, it does not
mean that he can see two parrots at the same distance through both the eyes. Also, if it takes
5 minutes to fry a vadai, it does not mean that it will take 100 minutes to fry 20 vadais!
Let us now solve a few problems on compound variation. Here, we compare the known
quantity with the unknown (x). There are a few methods in practice by which problems on
compound variation are solved. They are given as follows:

www.tntextbooks.in
4.5.1 Proportion Method

In this method, we shall compare the given data and find whether they are in direct or
inverse proportion. By finding the proportion, we can use the fact that
the product of the extremes = the product of the means
and get the value of the unknown (x).
4.5.2 Multiplicative Factor Method
Illustration:
Men Hours Days
a c e
D I D I
x d f
Here, the unknown (x) is in men and so it is compared to the known, namely hours and
d
days. If men and hours are in direct proportion (D), then take the multiplying factor as .
c
(take the reciprocal). Also, if men and days are in inverse proportion ( I ), then take the multiplying
e d e
factor as .(no change). Thus, we can find the unknown (x) in men as x a .
f c f
4.5.3 Formula Method
Identify the data from the given statement as Persons (P), Days (D), Hours (H) and
Work (W) and use the formula,
P1 × D1 × H1 P × D2 × H 2
= 2
W1 W2
where the suffix 1 contains the complete data from the first statement of the given problem
and the suffix 2 contains the unknown data to be found out in the second statement of the
problem. That is, this formula says, P1 men doing W1 units of work in D1 days working H1
hours per day is the same as P2 men doing W2 units of work in D2 days working H 2 hours
per day. Identifying the work W1 and W2 correctly is more important in these problems. This
method will be easy for finding the unknown (x) quickly.
Example 4.19 (Direct – Direct Variation)
If a company pays `6 lakh for 15 workers for 20 days, how much would it need to pay for
5 workers for 12 days?
Solution:
Proportion Method
Workers Pay (Work) Days
15 6 20
D D D D
5 x 12
Here, the unknown is the pay (x). It is to be compared with the workers and the days.

www.tntextbooks.in
Step 1:
Here, less days means less pay. So, it is in direct proportion.
∴ The proportion is 20 : 12 :: 6 : x 1
Step 2:
Also, less workers means less pay. So, it is in direct proportion again.
Step 3:
Combining 1 and 2 ,
20 : 12
:: 6 : x
15 : 5
We know that, the product of the extremes = the product of the means
Extremes Means Extremes
20 : 12 : 6 : x
15 : 5
12×6×5
So, 20×15× x = 12×6×5 ⇒ x = = ` 1.2 lakh.
20×15
Multiplicative Factor Method
Workers Pay (Work) Days
15 6 20
D D x D D
5 12
Here, the unknown is the pay (x). It is to be compared with the workers and the days.
Step 1:
Here, less days means less pay. So, it is in direct proportion.
12
∴ The multiplying factor is (take the reciprocal).
20
Step 2:
Also, less workers means less pay. So, it is in direct proportion again.
5
15
Step 3:
12 5 = ` 1.2 lakh.
∴ x = 6× ×
20 15
Formula Method
Here, P1 = 15, D1 = 20 and W1 = 6 . Also, P2 = 5, D2 = 12 and W2 = x
P1 × D1 P × D2
Using the formula, = 2
W1 W2

www.tntextbooks.in
⇒ 15×20 = 5×12
6 x
5×12×6
⇒x = = ` 1.2 lakh.
15×20
Example 4.20 (Direct – Inverse Variation)

A mat of length 180 m is made by 15 women in 12 days. How
long will it take for 32 women to make a mat of length 512 m?
Solution:
Proportion Method
Length (Work) Women Days
180 15 12
D I D I
512 32 x
Here, the unknown is the days (x). It is to be compared with the length and the women.
Step 1:
Here, more length means more days. So, it is in direct proportion.
Step 2:
Also, more women means less days. So, it is in inverse proportion.
Step 3:
Combining 1 and 2 ,
180 : 512
:: 12 : x
32 : 15
We know that, the product of the extremes = the product of the means
Extremes Means Extremes
180 : 512 : 12 : x
32 : 15
512×12×15
So, 180×32× x = 512×12×15 ⇒ x = = 16 days.
180×32
Length (Work) Women Days
180 15 12
D I D I
512 32 x
Here, the unknown is the days (x). It is to be compared with the length and the women.

www.tntextbooks.in
Step 1:
Here, more length means more days. So, it is in direct proportion.
512
180
Step 2:
Also, more women means less days. So, it is in inverse proportion.
15
∴ The multiplying factor is (no change).
32
Step 3:
512 15
∴ x = 12 × × = 16 days.
180 32
Formula Method:
Here, P1P=1 15,D
= 15, 1D=1 12 and
= 12
&& = 180 and P 2P=2 32
W1W=1 180 and
, D, 2D=2 x= &
= 32 x&W2W=2 512
= 512
P1 × D1 P × D2
W1 W2
15×12 32×x
⇒ =
180 512
32 × x 512
⇒ 1= ⇒ x= = 16 days.
512 32
Remark: Students may answer in any of the three given methods dealt here.
Try these
1. If x and y vary directly, find k when x= y= 5 .

2. If x and y vary inversely, find the constant of proportionality when x = 64 and y = 0.75
Activity
Draw a circle of a given radius. Then, draw its radii in such a way that the angles
between any two consecutive pair of radii are equal. Start drawing 3 radii and end with
drawing 12 radii in the circle. List and prepare a table for the number of radii to the angle
between a pair of consecutive radii and check whether they are in inverse proportion.
What is the proportionality constant?
Example 4.21 (Inverse – Direct Variation)

If 81 students can do a painting on a wall of length 448 m in 56 days, then how many
students can do the painting on a similar type of wall of length 160 m in 27 days?
Solution:
Students Days Length of the wall (Work)
81 56 448
I D I D
x 27 160

www.tntextbooks.in
Here, the unknown is the students (x). It is to be compared with the days and the length of
the wall.
Step 1:
Here, less days means more students. So, it is in inverse proportion.
56
∴ The multiplying factor is .
27
Step 2:
Also, less length means less students. So, it is in direct proportion.
160
448
Step 3:
56 160
∴ x = 81 × ×
27 448
x = 60 students.
Formula Method P1 = 81, D1 = 56 and W1 = 448

Here, P1 = 81, D1 = 56 and W1 = 448 and P2 = x , D2 = 27 and W2 = 160
P2 = x , D2 = 27 and W2 = 160
P ×D P × D2
Using the formula, 1 1 = 2
W1 W2
81×56 x ×27
⇒ =
448 160
81×56 160
⇒ x= × ⇒ x = 60 students.
448 27
Example 4.22 (Inverse – Inverse Variation)

If 48 men working 7 hours a day can do a work in 24 days, then in how many days will
28 men working 8 hours a day can complete the same work?
Solution:
Men Hours Days

48 7 24
I I I I
28 8 x
Here, the unknown is the days (x). It is to be compared with the men and the hours.
Step 1:
Here, less men means more days. So, it is in inverse proportion.
48
28

www.tntextbooks.in
Step 2:
Also, more hours means less days. So, it is in inverse proportion again.
7
8
Step 3:
48 7
∴ x = 24 × × = 36 days.
28 8
Formula Method
=
Here, =
P1 48, D1 24, H1 = 7 and W1 = 1 (Why?)
= =
P2 28, D2 x , H 2 = 8 and W2 = 1 (Why?)
P1 × D1 × H1 P × D2 × H 2
W1 W2
48 24 7 28 x 8
⇒
1 1
48 24 7
x 36 days.
28 8
Try these
Identify the different variations present in the following questions:

1. 24 men can make 48 articles in 12 days. Then, 6 men can make _____ articles in 6 days.
2. 15 workers can lay a road of length 4 km in 4 hours. Then, _____ workers can lay a road
of length 8 km in 8 hours.
3. 25 women working 12 hours a day can complete a work in 36 days. Then, 20 women must
work _____ hours a day to complete the same work in 30 days.
4. In a camp there are 420 kg of rice sufficient for 98 persons for 45 days. The number of days
that 60 kg of rice will last for 42 persons is _____.
4.6 Time and Work

How would you find the answer for the following question?
If Kani can finish a given work in 2 hours and Viji in 3 hours, then in what time can
they finish it working together? The answer for this question will be known here in this
section.
Work to be done is usually considered as one unit. Work can be in any form like
building a wall, making a road, filling or emptying a tank or even eating a certain amount
of food.
Time is measured in hours, days etc., Certain assumptions are made that the work so done
is uniform and each person shares the same work time in case of group work in completing
the work.

www.tntextbooks.in
Unitary Method
If two persons X and Y can complete some work individually in a and b days, then their
1 1
one day’s work will be and respectively.
a b 1 1 a+b
Working together, their one day’s work = + = and so,
a b ab
ab
X and Y together can complete the work in a + b days.
Example 4.23
A and B together can do a piece of work in 16 days and A alone can do it in 48 days. How
long will B take to complete the work?
Solution: Note
1
( A + B ) ’s 1 day’s work = The time taken to complete a
16 work or task depends on various factors
1 such as number of persons, their capacity
A’s 1 day’s work =
48 to do the work, the amount of work and
1 1 the time spent per day for the completion
∴ B’s 1 day’s work = −
16 48 of work.
3 −1 2 1
= = =
48 48 24
∴ B alone can complete the work in 24 days.
Example 4.24
P and Q can do a piece of work in 20 days and 30 days respectively. They started the work
together and Q left after some days of work and P finished the remaining work in 5 days. After
how many days from the start did Q leave?
Solution:
1 1
P’s 1 day’s work =
and Q’s 1 day’s work =
20 30
1 5 1
P’s work for 5 days = × 5 = =
20 20 4
1 3
Therefore, the remaining work = 1 − = (as the total work is always 1). This remaining
4 4
work was done by both P and Q.
1 1 5 1
Work done by P and Q in a day = + = =
20 30 60 12
3
Therefore, the number of days they worked together = 4 = 3 × 12 = 9 days.
1 4 1
12
So, Q left after 9 days from the day the work started.
Example 4.25
A works 3 times as fast as B and is able to complete a work in 24 days less than the days
taken by B. Find the time in which they can complete the work together.

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
If B does the work in 3 days, then A will do it in 1 day. That is, the difference is 2 days.
Here, given that the difference between A and B in completing the work is 24 days. Therefore,
24
A will take = 12 days and B will take 3 × 12 = 36 days to complete the work separately.
2
ab
Hence, the time taken by A and B together to complete the work = days.
a+b
12×36 12×36
= = = 9 days.
12 + 36 48
Note
a b
If A is times as good a worker as B, then A will only of the time taken by B
b a
to complete the work. Try to solve the above Example 4.25 using this.
4.6.1 Sharing of the money for work

When a group of people do some work together, based on their individual work they
get a share of money themselves. In general, money earned is shared by people, who worked
together, in the ratio of the total work done by each of them.
If the ratio of the time taken by A and B in doing a work is x : y, then the ratio of
•
1 1
work done by A and B is : = y : x . This is the ratio for their separate wages too.
x y
• If three persons A, B and C can do a work in x, y and z days respectively, then the ratio in
1 1 1
which their wages will be distributed to them is : : .
x y z
Example 4.26
X, Y and Z can do a piece of job in 4, 6 and 10 days respectively.
If X,Y and Z work together to complete, then find their separate
shares if they will be paid ` 31000 for completing the job.
Solution:
Since they all work together for the same number of
60
days , the ratio in which they share the money is equal to
31
the ratio of their work done per day.
1 1 1 15 10 6
That is, it is equal to : : = : : = 15 : 10 : 6
4 6 10 60 60 60
Here, the total parts = 15 + 10 + 6 = 31
15
Hence, A’ s share = ×31000 = `15000 , B’ s share = 10 ×31000 = `10000 and
31 31
C’ s share is `31000 − (`15000 + `10000)= `6000.

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
3
1. Vikram can do one-third of a work in p days. He can do th of the same
4
work in _______ days.
2. If m persons can complete a work in n days, then 4m persons can complete the work
m
in _______days and persons can complete the same work in _______ days.
4
Exercise 4.4

(i) A can finish a job in 3 days whereas B finishes it in 6 days. The time taken to complete
the job working together is __________days.
(ii) If 5 persons can do 5 jobs in 5 days, then 50 persons can do 50 jobs in ________ days.
(iii) A can do a work in 24 days. If A and B together can finish the work in 6 days, then B
alone can finish the work in ________ days.
(iv) A alone can do a piece of work in 35 days. If B is 40% more efficient than A, then B will
finish the work in ___________days.
(v) A alone can do a work in 10 days and B alone in 15 days. They undertook the work for
`200000. The amount that A will get is ________.
2. 210 men working 12 hours a day can finish a job in 18 days. How many men are required
to finish the job in 20 days working 14 hours a day?
3. A cement factory makes 7000 cement bags in 12 days with the help of 36 machines. How
many bags can be made in 18 days using 24 machines?
4. A soap factory produces 9600 soaps in 6 days working 15 hours a day. In how many days
will it produce 14400 soaps working 3 more hours a day?
5. If 6 container lorries can transport 135 tonnes of goods in 5 days, how many more lorries
are required to transport 180 tonnes of goods in 4 days?
6. A can do a piece of work in 12 hours, B and C can do it 3 hours whereas A and C can do
it in 6 hours. How long will B alone take to do the same work?
7. A and B can do a piece of work in 12 days, while B and C can do it in 15 days whereas
A and C can do it in 20 days. How long would each take to do the same work?
8. Carpenter A takes 15 minutes to fit the parts of a chair while Carpenter B takes 3 minutes
more than A to do the same work. Working together, how long will it take for them to fit
the parts for 22 chairs?

www.tntextbooks.in
9. A can do a work in 45 days. He works at it for 15 days and then, B alone finishes the
remaining work in 24 days. Find the time taken to complete 80% of the work, if they work
together.
10. A is thrice as fast as B. If B can do a piece of work in 24 days, then find the number of days
they will take to complete the work together.
Exercise 4.5
1. A fruit vendor bought some mangoes of which 10 % were rotten. He sold
33 1 % of the rest. Find the total number of mangoes bought by him initially,
3
if he still has 240 mangoes with him.
2. A student gets 31 % marks in an examination but fails by 12 marks. If the pass percentage
is 35 % , find the maximum marks of the examination.
3. Sultana bought the following things from a general store. Calculate the total bill amount
paid by her.
(i) Medicines costing ₹800 with GST at 5 %
(ii) Cosmetics costing ₹650 with GST at 12 %
(iii) Cereals costing ₹900 with GST at 0 %
(iv) Sunglass costing ₹1750 with GST at18 %
(v) Air Conditioner costing ₹28500 with GST at 28 %
4. P’s income is 25 % more than that of Q. By what percentage is Q’s income less than P’s?
5. Vaidegi sold two sarees for ₹2200 each. On one she gains 10 % and on the other
she loses 12 % . Find her total gain or loss percentage in the sale of the sarees.
6. If 32 men working 12 hours a day can do a work in 15 days, then how many
men working 10 hours a day can do double that work in 24 days?
7. Amutha can weave a saree in 18 days. Anjali is twice as good a weaver as Amutha.If both
of them weave together, then in how many days can they complete weaving the saree?

www.tntextbooks.in
8. P and Q can do a piece of work in 12 days and 15 days respectively. P started the work
alone and then after 3 days, Q joined him till the work was completed. How long did the
work last?
9.
If the numerator of a fraction is increased by 50 % and the denominator is decreased by
3
20 % , then it becomes . Find the original fraction.
5
10. Gopi sold a laptop at 12 % gain. If it had been sold for ₹1200 more, the gain
would have been 20 % . Find the cost price of the laptop.
11. A shopkeeper gives two successive discounts on an article whose marked price is ₹180 and
selling price is ₹108. Find the first discount percentage if the second discount is 25 % .
12. Find the rate of compound interest at which a principal becomes 1.69 times itself in
2 years.
13. A small–scale company undertakes an agreement to make 540 motor pumps in 150 days
and employs 40 men for the work. After 75 days, the company could make only 180 motor
pumps. How many more men should the company employ so that the work is completed
on time as per the agreement?
2
14. P alone can do 1 of a work in 6 days and Q alone can do of the same work in 4 days.
2 3
3
In how many days will they finish of the work, working together?
4
15. X alone can do a piece of work in 6 days and Y alone in 8 days. X and Y undertook the work
for `48000. With the help of Z, they completed the work in 3 days. How much is Z’s share?
SUMMARY
zz When the S.P is more than the C.P, then there is a gain or profit. Profit/Gain =S.P – C.P.
� When the S.P is less than the C.P, then there is a loss. Loss = C.P – S.P.
� The profit or loss is always calculated on the cost price.
� Selling price = Marked price – Discount.
� Formulae
 Profit 
(i) Profit or Gain % =  × 100 %
 C .P 
 Loss 
(ii) Loss % =  × 100 %
 C .P 
(100 + Profit%)  
 100
 ×× S.P
(iii) Selling Price, S.P = × C.P (or) Cost Price, C.P =
100  ( 100 + Profit% )
(iv) Selling Price, S.P =

(100 − Loss%) × C.P (or) Cost Price, C.P =
100
× S.P
100 (100 − Loss%)

www.tntextbooks.in
 r n
� When the interest is compounded annually, A= P  1 +  .
 100 
r  2n 
� When the interest is compounded half yearly, A= P 1 + .
200  
 r  4n
� When the interest is compounded quarterly, A = P  1 + .
 400 
� When the interest is compounded annually but rate of interest differs year by year,
 a   b   c 
A = P 1 +
  1 +  1 +  … where a, b and c are interest rates for the I, II and
100 100  100 
III years respectively.
b
� When interest is compounded annually but time period is in fraction say a years,
b c
a  
r  c × r
A = P 1 1+ .
100  100 
 
� C.I = A−P (Amount − Principal).
� The simple interest and the compound interest remains the same for the first year or the
first conversion period.
2
 r 
� For 2 years, the difference in C.I and S.I is C.I − S.I =P  .
 100 
2 r 
 r  
� For 3 years, the difference in C.I and S.I is C.I − S.I = P    3+ .
 100   100 
x and y are said to vary directly if y=kx always, where k is called the proportionality
�
y
constant and k > 0 assuming that y depends on x and so k = .
x
x and y are said to vary inversely, if xy = k always, where k is called the proportionality
�
constant and k > 0.
�
There will be problems which involve a chain of two or more variations in them.
This is called as compound variation.
�
By finding the proportion, we can use the fact that the product of the extremes is
equal to the product of the means to find the unknown (x) in the problem.
P1 × D1 × H1 P × D2 × H 2
�
By using the formula = 2 , we can find the unknown (x).
W1 W2
�
We can also find the unknown (x) by Multiplicative Factor Method.
�
If two persons X and Y can complete some work individually in a and b days, their
1 1
one day’s work will be and respectively and X and Y together can complete the
a b
ab
work in days.
a+b

www.tntextbooks.in
ICT CORNER
Step-1 Open the Browser type the URL Link given below (or)
Scan the QR Code. GeoGebra work book named “LIFE Expected Outcome
MATHEMATICS” will open. Click on the worksheet
named “Percentage”.
Step-2 In the given worksheet you can drag the red points E
and F to change the Blue rectangle. Find the ratio of Blue
with the whole by counting the squares and check the
ratio and percentage.
Step 1 Step 2
Go through the remaining worksheets given for this chapter
Browse in the link

Life Mathematics:
ICT CORNER
Expected Outcome
Scan the QR Code. GeoGebra work sheet named “8th
Standard III term” will open. Select the work sheet named
“Work Day Problem”
Step-2 Click on “ NEW PROBLEM”. Check the calculation and

work out yourself.
Step 1 Step 2
Browse in the link

Life Mathematics:

www.tntextbooks.in
5 GEOMETRY
Learning Objectives

To recall the similar and congruence properties and also the basic properties of
triangles.

To understand the theorems based on these properties and apply
them appropriately to problems.
To understand the Pythagorean theorem and solve problems using it.

To know and understand the concurrency of medians, altitudes,
angle bisectors and perpendicular bisectors in a triangle.

To construct quadrilaterals of various types.
5.1 Introduction
Geometry, as we all know studies shapes by looking at the properties and relations
of points, circles, triangles of two dimensions and solids. In the earlier classes, we have
seen a few properties of triangles. In this class, we are going to recall them and also learn
the congruence and the similarity properties in triangles. Also, we shall learn about the
Pythagorean theorem and the concurrency of medians, altitudes, angle bisectors and
perpendicular bisectors in a triangle. Also, we will also see how to construct quadrilaterals
of various types.
MATHEMATICS ALIVE – GEOMETRY IN REAL LIFE
The Pythagoras theorem is useful in finding For better strength and stability, congruent
the distance and the heights of objects. triangles in the construction of buildings.
Geometry 155

www.tntextbooks.in
Answer the following questions by recalling the properties of triangles:
1. The sum of the three angles of a triangle is _____________ .
2. The exterior angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of the ____________ angles to it.
3. In a triangle, the sum of any two sides is ____________ than the third side.
4. Angles opposite to equal sides are _______ and vice – versa.
5. What is ∠A in the triangle ABC?
Fig. 5.1
5.2 Congruent and Similar Shapes
Congruent figures are exactly the same in shape and size. In other words, shapes are
congruent if one fits exactly over the other.
Examples
Similar figures mathematically have the same shape but different sizes. Two
geometrical figures are said to be similar () if the measures of one to the corresponding
measures of the other are in a constant ratio. In other words, every part of a photographic
enlargement is similar to the corresponding part of the original.
Examples

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
Identify the pairs of figures which are similar and congruent and write the letter pairs.
5.2.1 Congruent Triangles

Consider two given triangles PQR and ABC. They are said
DPQR( ≡)DifABC
to be congruent their corresponding parts are congruent.
That is PQ=AB, QR=BC and PR=AC and also ∠P = ∠A,
∠Q = ∠B and ∠R = ∠C. This is denoted as DPQR ≡ DABC . Fig. 5.2
There are 4 ways by which one can prove that two triangles are congruent.
(i) SSS (Side – Side – Side) Congruence
If the three sides of a triangle are congruent to the three
sides of another triangle, then the triangles are congruent.
That is AB = PQ, BC = QR and AC = PR
⇒ ∆ABC ≡ ∆PQR. Fig. 5.3

(ii) SAS (Side – Angle – Side) Congruence
If two sides and the included angle (the angle between
them) of a triangle are congruent to two sides and the included
angle of another triangle, then the triangles are congruent. Here,
AC = PQ, ∠A = ∠P and AB = PR and hence ∆ACB ≡ ∆PQR. Fig. 5.4
Geometry 157

www.tntextbooks.in
(iii) ASA (Angle-Side-Angle) Congruence

If two angles and the included side of a triangle
are congruent to two angles and the included side of
another triangle, then the triangles are congruent.
Here, ∠A = ∠R, CA=PR and ∠C = ∠P and hence
∆ABC ≡ ∆RQP
Fig. 5.5
(iv) RHS (Right Angle – Hypotenuse – Side) Congruence
If the hypotenuse and a leg of one right triangle
are congruent to the hypotenuse and a leg of another
right triangle, then the triangles are congruent. Here,
∠B = ∠Q = 90°, BC = QR and AC = PR
(right angle) (leg) (hypotenuse)
and hence ∆ABC ≡ ∆PQR. Fig. 5.6
Note
Any segment or angle is congruent to itself ! This is called Reflexive property

If two triangles are congruent, then their corresponding parts are congruent.
This is called CPCTC (Corresponding parts of Congruent Triangles are
Congruent).
If angles then sides means if two angles are equal in a triangle, then the sides
opposite to them are equal.
If sides then angles means if two sides are equal in a triangle, then the angles
opposite to them are equal.
Try these
Match the following by their congruence property
S.No. A B S.No. A B
1 RHS 3 SAS
2 SSS 4 ASA

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 5.1
Find the unknowns in the following figures
(i) (ii) (iii)
Fig. 5.7(i) Fig. 5.7(ii) Fig. 5.7(iii)
Solution:
(i) Now, from Fig. 5.7(i), 140° + z = 180° (linear pair)
⇒ z = 180° - 140° = 40°

Also x + z = 70° + z (exterior angle property)
⇒ x = 70°
Also z + y + 70° = 180° (angle sum property in D ABC)
⇒ 40° + y + 70° = 180°
⇒ y = 180° - 110° = 70°
(ii) Now, from Fig. 5.7(ii), PQ = PR
Q R (angles opposite to equal sides are equal)

⇒ x = y
⇒ x + y + 50° = 180° (angle sum property in D PQR)
⇒ 2x = 130°
⇒ x = 65°
⇒ y = 65°
(iii) Now, from Fig. 5.7(iii), in DABC A x (vertically opposite angles)
Similarly B C x (Why?)
A B C 180 (angle sum property in D ABC)

⇒ 3x = 180
⇒ x = 60
⇒ y = 180 − 60 = 120
Geometry 159

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 5.2 (Illustrating SSS and SAS Congruence)

If ∠E = ∠S and G is the midpoint of ES,
prove that ∆GET ≡ ∆GST.
Proof:
Fig. 5.8
Statements Reasons
1 ∠E ≡ ∠S given
2 ET ≡ ST if angles, then sides
3 G is the midpoint of ES given
4 EG ≡ SG follows from 3
5 TG ≡ TG common side (reflexive property)
6 ∆GET ≡ ∆GST by SSS (2,4,5) & also by SAS (2,1,4)
Think
In the figure, DA = DC and BA = BC.

Are the triangles DBA and DBC congruent?
Why?
Example 5.3 (Illustrating ASA Congruence)

If ∠YTB ≡ ∠YBT and ∠BOY ≡ ∠TRY ,
prove that ∆BOY ≡ ∆TRY
Proof: Fig. 5.9
Statements Reasons
1 ∠BYO ≡ ∠TYR vertical angles are congruent
2 ∠YTB ≡ ∠YBT given
3 BY ≡ TY if angles, then sides
4 ∠BOY ≡ ∠TRY given
5 ∠OBY ≡ ∠RTY follows from 1 and 4
6 ∆BOY ≡ ∆TRY by ASA (1,3,5)
Example 5.4 (Illustrating RHS Congruence)

If TAP is an isosceles triangle with TA = TP and ∠TSA = 90°.
(i) Is TAS ≡ TPS ? Why?
(ii) Is ∠P = ∠A? Why?
(iii) Is AS = PS? Why? Fig. 5.10

www.tntextbooks.in
Proof:
(i) TA = TP (hypotenuse) and ∠TSA = 90
TS is common (leg)
Hence, by RHS congruence, TAS ≡ TPS
(ii) Given TA = TP
∴ ∠P = ∠A (if angles then sides)
(iii) From (i) TAS ≡ TPS ,

By CPCTC
AS = PS
SSA and ASS properties are not sufficient to prove that

two triangles are congruent. This is explained in the
given figure. By construction, in triangles ABD and
ABC, BC = BD = a. Also, AB and ∠BAZ are common.
But AC ≠ AD. So, ∆ABD is not congruent to ∆ABC and
so SSA fails.
5.2.2 Similar Triangles

Consider two given triangles PQR and ABC. They are said to be similar (  ) if
their corresponding angles are equal and corresponding sides are
proportional. That is ∠P = ∠A, ∠Q = ∠B and ∠R = ∠C and P
PQ PR QR
also = = ≡ DABC .
. This is denoted as DPQR 
AB AC BC Q R
There are 4 ways by which one can prove that two triangles are Fig. 5.11
similar.
(i) AAA (Angle – Angle – Angle) or AA (Angle – Angle) Similarity
Two triangles are similar if two angles of one triangle are equal respectively to two angles
of the other triangle. In the given figure, ∠A = ∠P , ∠B = ∠Q .
Therefore, ∆ABC  ∆PQR.
(ii) SAS (Side – Angle – Side) Similarity

Fig. 5.12
Two triangles are similar if two sides of one triangle are
proportional to two sides of the other triangle and the included
AC AB
angles are equal. In the given figure, = and ∠A = ∠P and
PQ PR Fig. 5.13
hence ∆ACB  ∆PQR.
Geometry 161

www.tntextbooks.in
(iii) SSS (Side-Side-Side) Similarity

Two triangles are similar if their corresponding sides are in
AB AC BC
the same ratio. That is, if = = , then ∆ABC  ∆PQR.
PQ PR QR
(iv) RHS (Right Angle – Hypotenuse – Side) Similarity Fig. 5.14
Two right triangles are similar if the hypotenuse and a leg
of one triangle are respectively proportional to the hypotenuse
 AC BC
and a leg of the other triangle. That is, if B Q 90 and
AC BC PR QR Fig. 5.15
Q 90 and then, ∆ABC  ∆PQR.
PR QR
If ∆ABC  ∆PQR, then the corresponding sides to

AB, BC and AC of ∆ABC are PQ, QR and PR respectively and
the corresponding angles to A, B and C are P, Q and R
respectively. Naming a triangle has a significance. For example,
if ∆ABC  ∆PQR then, ∆BAC is not similar to ∆PQR.
Example 5.5
In the Fig. 5.16, if DPQR  DXYZ ,
find a and b.
Solution:
Given that DPQR  DXYZ Fig. 5.16
∴ Their corresponding sides are proportional.

PQ QR PR
⇒ = = Note
XY YZ XZ
8 14 10
⇒ = = All circles and squares are similar to
a b 16
each other.
8 10
⇒ =
a 16 Not all rectangles need to be similar
8 × 16 128 always.
⇒a= =
10 10 If two angles are both congruent and
a = 12.8 cm
supplementary then, they are right
14 10 angles.
Also, =
b 16
All congruent triangles are similar.
14 × 16 224
⇒b = = The symbol ~ is used to denote
10 10
similarity.
∴ b = 22.4 cm

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 5.6 (Illustrating AA Similarity)

In the Fig. 5.17 , ∠ABC ≡ ∠EDC and
the perimeter of DCDE is 27 units,
prove that AB ≡ EC .
Proof:
Fig. 5.17
Statements Reasons
1 ∠ABC ≡ ∠EDC given
2 ∠BCA ≡ ∠DCE vertically opposite angles are equal
3 DABC  DEDC by AA property (1, 2)
4 AB BC AC corresponding sides are
= = proportional by 3
ED DC EC
8 16
⇒ = ⇒ EC = 12 units
6 EC
Given, the perimeter of DCDE = 27 units,
∴ ED + DC + EC = 27 ⇒ ED + 6 + 12 = 27 ⇒ ED = 27–18 = 9 units
AB 8
∴ = ⇒ AB = 12 units and hence AB = EC.
9 6
Example 5.7 (Illustrating AA Similarity)

In the given Fig. 5.18,
if ∠1 ≡ ∠3 and ∠2 ≡ ∠4 then,
prove that DBIG  DFAT . Also find FA.
Fig. 5.18
Proof:
Statements Reasons
1 ∠1 ≡ ∠3 given
2 ∠IBG ≡ ∠AFT supplements of congruent angles are congruent.
3 ∠2 ≡ ∠4 given
4 ∠IGB ≡ ∠ATF supplement of congruent angles are congruent
5 DBIG  DFAT by AA property (2, 4)
Also, their corresponding sides are proportional

BI BG 10 5 10 × 8 80
⇒ = ⇒ = ⇒ FA = = = 16 cm
FA FT FA 8 5 5
Geometry 163

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 5.8 (Illustrating SAS Similarity)

If A is the midpoint of RU and T is the midpoint of RN,
prove that DRAT  DRUN .
Proof: Fig. 5.19
Statements Reasons
1 ∠ART = ∠URN ∠R is common in DRAT and DRUN
1
2 = AU
RA = RU A is the midpoint of RU
2
1
3 = TN
RT = RN T is the midpoint of RN
2
RA RT 1
4 = = the sides are proportional from 2 and 3
RU RN 2
5 DRAT  DRUN by SAS (1 and 4)
Example 5.9 (Illustrating SSS similarity)

Prove that DPQR  DPRS in the given Fig. 5.20.
Solution:
PQ 20 4
Now, = =
PR 15 3
PR 15 4 Fig. 5.20
= =
PS 11.25 3
QR 12 4
Also, = =
RS 9 3
PQ PR QR
We find = =
PR PS RS
That is, their corresponding sides are proportional.
∴ By SSS Similarity, DPQR  DPRS
Example 5.10 (Illustrating RHS similarity)

The height of a man and his shadow form
a triangle similar to that formed by a nearby
tree and its shadow. What is the height of the
tree?
Fig. 5.21

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
Here, DABC  DADE (given)
∴ Their corresponding sides are proportional

Activity
(by RHS similarity).
The teacher cuts many
AC BC triangles that are similar or congruent
∴ =
AE DE from a card board (or) chart sheet.
12 5
⇒ = The students are asked to find
96 h
5 × 96 which pair of triangles are similar
⇒h= = 40 feet or congruent based on the measures
12
∴ The height of the tree is 40 feet. indicated in the triangles.
Exercise 5.1
1. Fill in the blanks with the correct term from the given list.
(in proportion, similar, corresponding, congruent, shape, area, equal)
(i) Corresponding sides of similar triangles are _______.
(ii) Similar triangles have the same _________ but not necessarily the same size.
(iii) In any triangle ______ sides are opposite to equal angles.
(iv) The symbol ≡ is used to represent _______ triangles.
(v) The symbol  is used to represent ________ triangles.
2. In the given figure, ∠CIP ≡ ∠COP 3. In the given figure, AC ≡ AD and

and ∠HIP ≡ ∠HOP . Prove that ∠CBD ≡ ∠DEC . Prove that
IP ≡ OP . D BCF ≡ DEDF .
4. In the given figure, D BCD is isosceles 5. In the given figure, D is the midpoint
with base BD and ∠BAE ≡ ∠DEA . of OE and ∠CDE = 90°. Prove that
Prove that AB ≡ ED . DODC ≡ DEDC
Geometry 165

www.tntextbooks.in
6. Is PRQ ≡QSP ? Why? 7. From the given figure, prove that

DABC  DEDF
8. In the given figure YH  TE . Prove that 9. In the given figure, if DEAT  DBUN
DWHY  DWET and also find HE , find the measure of all angles.
and TE.
10. In the given figure, UB ||AT and CU ≡ CB Prove that DCUB  DCAT and hence
DCAT is isosceles.

11. Two similar triangles will always have ________angles
(A) acute (B) obtuse (C) right (D) matching
PQ QR
12. If in triangles PQR and XYZ, = then they will be similar if
XY YZ
(A) ∠Q = ∠Y (B) P Y (C) Q X (D) P Z
13. A flag pole 15 m high casts a shadow of 3 m at 10 a.m. The shadow cast by a building
at the same time is 18.6 m. The height of the building is
(A) 90 m (B) 91 m (C) 92 m (D) 93 m
14. If DABC  DPQR in which A 53 and Q 77 , then ∠R is
(A) 50° (B) 60° (C) 70° (D) 80°
15. In the figure, which of the following statements is true?

(A) AB = BD (B) BD < CD (C) AC = CD (D) BC = CD

www.tntextbooks.in
5.3 The Pythagorean Theorem

The Pythagorean theorem or simply Pythagoras theorem, named after the ancient Greek
Mathematician Pythagoras BC 570-495 (BCE) is one of the most famous and celebrated theorems
in Mathematics. People have proved this theorem in numerous ways possibly the most for any
mathematical theorem. The proofs are very diverse which include both geometric and algebraic
methods dating back to thousands of years.
Statement of the theorem
In a right angled triangle, the square on the hypotenuse is equal to
the sum of the squares on the other two sides.
In ∅ABC, BC 2 = AB 2 + AC 2
Fig. 5.22
Visual Illustraton:
The given figure contains a triangle of sides of measures
25
sq
3 units, 4 units and 5 units. From this well known 3 − 4 − 5
u
ar
es
triangle, one can easily visualise and understand the meaning of
16 squares
the Pythagorean theorem. 4 5
In the figure, the sides of measure 3 units and 4 units are 3
called the legs or sides of the right angled triangle. The side
of measure 5 units is called the hypotenuse. Recall that the 9 squares
hypotenuse is the greatest side in a right angled triangle Fig. 5.23
Now, it is easily seen that a square formed with side 5 units (hypotenuse) has
5 × 5 = 25 unit squares (small squares) and the squares formed with side 3 units and
4 units have 3 × 3 = 9 unit squares and 4 × 4 = 16 unit squares respectively. As per the
statement of the theorem, the number of unit squares on the hypotenuse is exactly the
sum of the unit squares on the other two legs (sides) of the right angled triangle. Isn’t
this amazing?
Yes, we find that
5×5 = 3×3+4×4
i.e. 25 = 9+16 (True)
5.4 Converse of Pythagoras Theorem

If in a triangle, the square on the greatest side is equal to the sum of
squares on the other two sides, then the triangle is right angled triangle.
Example:
60 61
In the triangle ABC,
AB 2 AC 2 112 602 3721 612 BC 2
Hence, ∆ABC is a right angled triangle. 11
Fig. 5.24
Geometry 167

www.tntextbooks.in
(i) There are special sets of numbers a, b and c that makes the Pythagorean
relationship true and these sets of special numbers are called Pythagorean
triplets. Example: (3, 4, 5) is a Pythagorean triplet.
(ii) Let k be any positive integer greater than 1 and (a, b, c) be a Pythagorean triplet, then
(ka, kb, kc) is also a Pythagorean triplet.
Examples: k (3,4,5) (5,12,13)
2k (6,8,10) (10,24,26)
3k (9,12,15) (15,36,39)
4k (12,16,20) (20,48,52)
So, it is clear that we can have infinitely many Pythagorean triplets just by multiplying
any Pythagorean triplet by k.
We shall now see a few examples on the use of Pythagoras theorem in problems.
Example 5.11
In the figure, AB ⊥ AC
a) What type of ∅ is ABC?
b) What are AB and AC of the DABC ?
c) What is CB called as ?
d) If AC = AB then, what is the measure of ∠ B and ∠C ? Fig. 5.25
Solution:
a) D ABC is right angled as AB ⊥ AC at A.
b) AB and AC are legs of D ABC .
c) CB is called as the hypotenuse.
90
d) ∠ B + ∠ C = 90 and equal angles are opposite to equal sides. Hence, ∠ B = ∠ C = = 45
2
Example 5.12
Can a right triangle have sides that measure 5cm, 12cm and 13cm?
Solution:
Take a = 5 , b = 12 and c = 13
Now, a 2 + b2 = 52 + 122 = 25 + 144 = 169
= 13
=2
c2
By the converse of Pythagoras theorem, the triangle with given measures is a right angled
triangle.
Example 5.13
A 20-feet ladder leans against a wall at height of 16 feet from the
ground. How far is the base of the ladder from the wall?
Solution:
The ladder, wall and the ground form a right triangle with the ladder as
the hypotenuse. From the figure, by Pythagoras theorem, Fig. 5.26

www.tntextbooks.in
202 = 162 + x 2
⇒ 400 = 256 + x 2
⇒ x 2 = 400 − 256 = 144 = 122 ⇒ x = 12 feet
Therefore, the base (foot) of the ladder is 12 feet away from the wall.
Activity
1. W e can construct sets of Pythagorean triplets as follows.
Let m and n be any two positive integers (m > n):
(a, b, c) is a Pythagorean triplet if a = m 2 − n 2 , b = 2mn and c = m 2 + n 2 (Think, why?)
Complete the table.
m n a = m2 − n2 b = 2mn c = m2 + n2 Pythagorean triplet
2 1 ___ ___ ___ ______
3 2 ___ ___ ___ ______
4 1 15 8 17 (15, 8, 17)
7 2 45 28 53 (45, 28, 53)
2. Find all integer-sided right angled triangles with hypotenuse 85.
Example 5.14
Find LM, MN, LN and also the area of D LON.
Solution:
From DLMO, by Pythagoras theorem,
LM 2 = OL2 − OM 2
⇒ LM 2 = 132 − 122 = 169 − 144 = 25 = 52
∴ LM = 5 units Fig. 5.27
From DNMO , by Pythagoras theorem,

MN 2 = ON 2 − OM 2
= 152 − 122 = 225 − 144 = 81 = 92
∴ MN = 9 units
Hence, LN = LM + MN = 5 + 9 = 14 units
1
Area of ∆ LON = × base × height
2
1
= × LN × OM
2
1
= × 14 × 12 = 84 square units.
2
Geometry 169

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 5.15
∆ABC is equilateral and CD of the right triangle BCD is 8 cm.
Find the side of the equilateral ∆ABC and also BD.
Solution: A
As ∆ABC is equilateral from the figure, AB=BC=AC= (x−2) cm. (x–2) cm

∴ From D BCD, by Pythagoras theorem
B C
BD 2 = BC 2 + CD 2
⇒ (x + 2)2 = (x − 2)2 + 82 (x+2) cm 8 cm
x 2 + 4 x + 4 = x 2 − 4 x + 4 + 82
⇒ 8 x = 82 D
Fig. 5.28
⇒ x = 8 cm
∴ The side of the equilateral D ABC = 6 cm and BD =10 cm.
5.5 Point of Concurrency

When two lines in a plane cross each other, they l2
l1
are called intersecting lines. Here, lines l1 and l2 intersect MathBits
O
at point O and hence it is called the point of intersection
of l1 and l2 . Intersecting Roads
Three or more lines in a plane are said to be concurrent,
A P
D
if all of them pass through the same point.
O

In this figure, AB , CD and PQ are concurrent lines B
C
and O is the point of concurrency. Q
Concurring wooden pieces.

5.6 Medians of a Triangle
A median of a triangle is a line segment from a vertex to the A
midpoint of the side opposite that vertex.
In the figure AM is a median of ∆ABC.
Are there any more medians for ∆ABC ? Yes, since there
are three vertices in a triangle, one can identify three medians in B M C
a triangle. Fig. 5.29
Example 5.16 A
In the figure, ABC is a triangle and AM is one of its medians.

If BM = 3.5 cm, find the length of the side BC.
B M C
Solution:
AM is median ⇒ M is the midpoint of BC. Fig. 5.30
Given that, BM = 3.5 cm, hence BC = twice the length BM = 2 × 3.5 cm = 7 cm.

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
A
B C
1. Consider a paper cut-out of a triangle. 2. Fold the paper along the line that passes
(Let us have an acute-angled triangle, to through the point A and meets the line
start with). Name it, say ABC. BC such that point B falls on C. Make a
crease and unfold the sheet.
3. Mark the mid point M of BC. 4. You can now draw the median AM, if
you want to see it clearly. (Or you can
leave it as a fold).
5. In the same way, fold and draw the 6. Do the medians pass through the same
other two medians. point?
Now you can repeat this activity for an obtuse-angled triangle and a right triangle.
What is the conclusion? We see that,
The three medians of any triangle are concurrent.
5.6.1 Centroid
The point of concurrence of the three medians in a triangle
is called its Centroid, denoted by the letter G. Interestingly,
it happens to be the centre of mass of the triangle. One can
easily verify this fact. Take a stiff cut out of triangle of paper.
It can be balanced horizontally at this point on a finger tip or
a pencil tip.
Geometry 171

www.tntextbooks.in
Should you fold all the three medians to find the centroid? Now you can explore among
yourself the following questions:
(i) How can you find the centroid of a triangle?
(ii) Is the centroid equidistant from the vertices?
(iii) Is the centroid of a triangle always in its interior?
(iv) Is there anything special about the medians of an
(a) Isosceles triangle? (b) Equilateral triangle?
Properties of the centroid of a triangle
The location of the centroid of a triangle exhibits some nice properties. A
It is always located inside the triangle.

We have already seen that it serves as the Centre of gravity
Centroid
for any triangular lamina. G
Observe the figure given. The lines drawn from each vertex to G
form the three triangles ∆ABG, ∆BCG, and ∆CAG.
B C
Surprisingly, the areas of these triangles are equal. Fig. 5.31
That is, the medians of a triangle divide it into three smaller triangles of equal area!
P PG : GD = 2:1
The centroid of a triangle splits each of the medians in two QG : GE = 2:1
RG : GF = 2:1
segments, the one closer to the vertex being twice as long as the other one. F E
G
This means the centroid divides each median in a ratio of 2:1.

(For example, GD is ⅓ of PD). (Try to verify this by paper folding). Q D R
X
Example 5.17
In the figure G is the centroid of the triangle XYZ. N
G M
(i) If GL = 2.5 cm, find the length XL.

(ii) If YM = 9.3 cm, find the length GM. Y L Z
Fig. 5.32
Solution:
(i) Since G is the centroid, XG : GL = 2 : 1 which gives XG : 2.5 = 2 : 1. Any
simpler
Therefore, we get 1 × (XG) = 2 × (2.5) ⇒ XG = 5 cm. Method?
Hence, length XL = XG + GL = 5 + 2.5 = 7.5 cm.

(ii) If YG is of 2 parts then GM will be 1 part. (Why?)
This means YM has 3 parts.
3 parts is 9.3 cm long. So GM (made of 1 part) must A
be 9.3 ÷ 3 = 3.1 cm.
F E
Example 5.18
G
ABC is a triangle and G is its centroid. If AD=12 cm, BC=8 cm
and BE=9 cm,find the perimeter of DBDG . B D C
Fig. 5.33

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
ABC is a triangle and G is its centroid. If,
1 1 2 2
AD = 12 cm Þ GD = of AD = (12) = 4 cm and BE = 9 cm ÞBG = of BE = (9) = 6cm .
3 3 3 3
1 1
Also D is a midpoint of BC Þ BD = of BC = (8) = 4cm .
2 2
\ The perimeter of DBDG = BD+GD+BG = 4+4+6 = 14 cm
A
5.7 Altitude of a Triangle
Altitude of a triangle also known as the height of the triangle, is the
perpendicular drawn from the vertex of the triangle to the opposite side.
The altitude makes a right angle with the base of a triangle. Here, in ∆ABC,
AD is one of the altitudes as AD ⊥ BC. B
D
C
Activity Fig. 5.34
A A A
Altitude
B C C B C
B
1. Consider a paper cut-out 2. Fold the triangle so that 3. You can now draw the
of an acute angled triangle. a side overlaps itself and altitude AM, if you want
Name it, say ABC. the fold contains the vertex to see it clearly.
opposite to that side.
In the same way, you find altitudes of other two sides. Also, with the help of your
teacher, you find altitudes of right angled triangle and obtuse angled triangle. Do the
altitudes of triangle pass through the same point? What is your conclusion? We see that,
The three altitudes of any triangle are concurrent.
The point of concurrence is known as its Orthocentre, denoted by the letter H.
Think
1. In any acute angled triangle, all three altitudes

are inside the triangle. Where will be the orthocentre? Altitude of an acute triangle
In the interior of the triangle or in its exterior?
2. In any right angled triangle, the altitude perpendicular
to the hypotenuse is inside the triangle; the other two
altitudes are the legs of the triangle. Can you identify the Altitude of a right triangle
orthocentre in this case?
3. In any obtuse angled triangle, the altitude connected
to the obtuse vertex is inside the triangle, and the two
altitudes connected to the acute vertices are Altitude of an obtuse triangle
outside the triangle. Can you identify the orthocentre in this case?
Geometry 173

www.tntextbooks.in
5.8 Perpendicular Bisectors of a Triangle

Let us first recall the following ideas.
Perpendicular Bisector Perpendicular bisector
l l2
l1
90° 90°
A P B P M Q X M Y
AB is a line segment. PQ is a line segment. � XY is a line segment.

l is perpendicular to AB . l1 is a bisector to PQ . l2 is a bisector to � XY .
P is the foot of the ⊥r. M is the midpoint of PQ . l2 is also ⊥r to � XY .
Note that AP ↑ PB here. l1 need not be ⊥r to PQ M is the midpoint of � XY .
Consider a triangle ABC. It has three sides. For each side you can have a perpendicular
bisector as follows:
A A A
N P
B M C B C
B C
Perpendicular bisector of side BC Perpendicular bisector of side AC Perpendicular bisector of side AB

M is the midpoint of BC N is the midpoint of AC P is the midpoint of AB
We have a perpendicular at M. We have a perpendicular at N. We have a perpendicular at P.
Surprisingly, all the three perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle are concurrent at a point!
Activity
One can visualize the point of concurrence of the perpendicular A
bisectors, through simple paper folding. Try and see that,

The perpendicular bisectors of the sides of any triangle are concurrent. P N
As done in the earlier activity on Centroid, you can repeat the experiment S
for various types of triangle, acute, obtuse, right, isosceles and equilateral. B M
C
Do you find anything special with the equilateral triangle in this case?
A
5.8.1 Circumcentre
The point of concurrence of the three perpendicular bisectors of a P N
triangle is called as its Circumcentre, denoted by the letter S. S
B C
M
Fig. 5.35

www.tntextbooks.in
Why should it be called so? Because one can draw a circle exactly passing through the
three vertices of the triangle, with centre at the point of concurrence of the perpendicular
bisectors of sides. Thus, the circumcentre is equidistant from the vertices of the triangle.
Activity
Check if the following are true by paper-folding:
1. The circumcentre of an acute angled triangle lies in the interior of the triangle.
2. The circumcentre of an obtuse angled triangle lies in the exterior of the triangle.
3. The circumcentre of a right triangle lies at the midpoint of its hypotenuse.
Example 5.19 A
In DABC, S is the circumcentre, BC = 72 cm and DS = 15 cm.
Find the radius of its circumcircle.
Solution: S
As S is the circumcentre of ∆ABC, it is equidistant from
15 cm
A,B and C. So AS=BS=CS=radius of its circumcircle. As AD is the B D C
1 1 72 cm
perpendicular bisector of BC, BD = × BC = × 72 = 36 cm
2 2 Fig. 5.36
In right angled triangle BDS, by Pythagoras theorem,
BS2 = BD2 +SD2 = 362 + 152 = 1521 = 392 ÞBS = 39cm.
\The radius of the circumcircle of D ABC is 39 cm.
A
5.9 Angle Bisectors of a Triangle D
We have learnt about angle bisectors in the previous class. An

angle bisector is a line or ray that divides an angle into two congruent 40º
40º
angles. In the figure, ∠ABC is bisected by the line BD such that B
C
∠ABD = ∠CBD. Fig. 5.37
Consider a triangle ABC. How many angles does a triangle have ? 3 angles. For each
angle you can have an angle bisector as follows:
A A A
E F
B D C B C C
B
AD bisects ∠A into two BE bisects ∠B into two CF bisects ∠C into two

congruent angles. Hence it is congruent angles. Hence it is congruent angles. Hence it is
an angle bisector of ∠A. an angle bisector of ∠B. an angle bisector of ∠C.
Geometry 175

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
A A A
B C B C B C
1. Consider a paper 2. Fold the triangle so that 3. Trace all of the folds.
cut-out of a triangle. the opposite sides meet and
Do the angle bisectors
Name it, say ABC. contain the vertex. Repeat
pass through the same
the same to find angle
point?
bisectors of other two angles
also.
Now you can repeat this activity for an obtuse-angled triangle and a right angled
triangle. What is the conclusion? Do the angle bisectors pass through the same point
in all the cases? Yes, we see that,
The three angle bisectors of any triangle are concurrent.
5.9.1 Incentre
The point of concurrence of the three angle bisectors of A
a triangle is called as its incentre, denoted by the letter I.
Why should it be called so? Because one can draw a

I
circle inside of the triangle so that it touches all three sides
internally, with centre at the point of concurrence of the angle
B C
bisectors. The lengths of a perpendicular line drawn from Fig. 5.38
incentre to each side is found to be same. Thus, the incentre
is equidistant from the sides of the triangle.
Example 5.20
Identify the incentre of the triangle PQR.
P
Solution:
Incentre is the point of intersection of angle bisectors. N
O B
Here, PM and QN are angle bisectors of ∠P and ∠Q respectively, A
intersecting at B.
Q M R
So, the incentre of the triangle PQR is B. Fig. 5.39
(Can A and C be the incentre of ∆PQR? Why?)

www.tntextbooks.in
The position of the Centroid, Orthocentre, Circumcentre and Incentre

differs depending on the type of triangles given. The following points will help
us in locating and remembering these.
(i) For all types of triangles, Centroid (G) and Incentre (I) will be inside the triangle.
(ii) The Orthocentre (H) will be inside in an acute angled triangle, outside in an obtuse
angled triangle and on the vertex containing 90° in a right angled triangle.
(iii) The Circumcentre (S) will be inside in an acute angled triangle, outside in an
obtuse angled triangle and on the hypotenuse in a right-angled triangle.
Try these
A A
Identify the type of segment required in each
l1
triangle: B D C
(median, altitude, perpendicular bisector, B D C
A
angle bisector) A 3.5
cm
D D
3.5
(i) AD =__________ (ii) l1 =__________ cm 25º
25º
B C C
B
(iii) BD =__________ (iv) CD =__________
Activity
1. By paper folding, find the centroid, orthocentre, circumcentre and incentre
of an equilateral triangle. Do they coinside?
2. By paper folding, find the centroid (G), orthocentre(H), circumcentre (S) and
incentre (I) of a triangle. Join G,H,S and I. Are they collinear?
Exercise 5.2
(i) If in a DPQR, PR 2 PQ2 QR 2 , then the right angle of ∆PQR is at the vertex ________.
(ii) I f ' l ' and ‘m’ are the legs and ' n ' is the hypotenuse of a right angled triangle
then, l 2 = ________.
(iii) If the sides of a triangle are in the ratio 5:12:13 then, it is ________.
(iv) The medians of a triangle cross each other at ___________.
(v) The centroid of a triangle divides each medians in the ratio ___________.
Geometry 177

www.tntextbooks.in

(i) 8, 15, 17 is a Pythagorean triplet.
(ii) In a right angled triangle, the hypotenuse is the greatest side.
(iii) In any triangle the centroid and the incentre are located inside the triangle.
(iv) The centroid, orthocentre, and incentre of a triangle are collinear.
(v) The incentre is equidistant from all the vertices of a triangle.
3. Check whether given sides are the sides of right-angled triangles, using Pythagoras theorem.
(i) 8,15,17 (ii) 12,13,15 (iii) 30,40,50 (iv) 9,40,41 (v) 24,45,51
4. Find the unknown side in the following triangles.

(i) (ii)
(i) (i) (ii) (ii) (iii)
R R (iii) R (iii)
30 30 30
Q XQ Q X X
x x
34 x 34 34
9 9 9 z 36 z 36 z 36
y y y
Y Y Z Y Z Z

40 39 39 39
40 40 P P P
n isosceles triangle has equal sides each 13 cm and a base 24 cm in length.

5. A
Find its height.
6. Find the distance between the helicopter and the ship.
7. I n triangle ABC, line l1 is a perpendicular bisector of BC. l1
If BC=12 cm, SM=8 cm, find CS. S
B M C
8. Identify the centroid of ∆PQR. 9. Name the orthocentre of DPQR.

ABC
P
P
U V T Q
A N
W B
C
Q S R
Q M R
10. I n the given figure, A is the midpoint of YZ 11. I f I is the incentre of ∆XYZ,
and G is the centroid of the triangle XYZ. If ∠IYZ = 30° and ∠IZY = 40° , find
the length of GA is 3 cm, find XA. ∠YXZ .
Z X
A ?
G
m
3c
X Y 30º 40º
Y Z

www.tntextbooks.in

G
12. If DGUT is isosceles and right angled, then ∠TUG is ________.

(A) 30º (B) 40º (C) 45º (D) 55º
U T
13. Th
e hypotenuse of a right angled triangle of sides 12cm and 16cm is __________.
(A) 28 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 24 cm (D) 21 cm
14. The area of a rectangle of length 21cm and diagonal 29cm is __________.
(A) 609 cm2 (B) 580 cm2 (C) 420 cm2 (D) 210 cm2
15. Th
e sides of a right angled triangle are in the ratio 5:12:13 and its perimeter is 120 units
then, the sides are ______________.
(A) 25, 36, 59 (B) 10,24,26 (C) 36, 39, 45 (D) 20,48,52
Exercise 5.3
1. In the figure, given that 1 2 and 2. From the figure, prove that
∠3 ≡ ∠4 . Prove that D MUG ≡ DTUB. DSUN  D RAY.
3. The height of a tower is measured by 4. Find the length of the support cable
a mirror on the ground at R by which required to support the tower with
the top of the tower’s reflection is the floor.
seen. Find the height of the tower.
If D PQR  DD STR
x
20 ft
15 ft
5. Rithika buys an LED TV which has a 25 inches screen. If its height is 7 inches, how
wide is the screen? Her TV cabinet is 20 inches wide. Will the TV fit into the cabinet?
Give reason.
Geometry 179

www.tntextbooks.in
6. In the figure, ∠TMA ≡ ∠IAM and 7. In the figure, if ∠FEG ≡ ∠1 then,
∠TAM ≡ ∠IMA . P is the midpoint of prove that DG 2 = DE.DF .
MI and N is the midpoint of AI. Prove
that D PIN  D ATM.
8. The diagonals of the rhombus is 12 cm and 16 cm. Find its perimeter.

(Hint: the diagonals of rhombus bisect each other at right angles).
9. In the figure, find AR. 10. In DDEF, DN, EO, FM are medians and point
P is the centroid. Find the following.
E
(i) IF DE = 44, then DM = ?

ft
25
15 ft
17
(ii) IF PD = 12, then PN = ?

ft
M N
(iii) If DO = 8, then FD = ? P
(iv) IF OE = 36 then EP = ?
D O F
5.10 Construction of Quadrilaterals

We have already learnt how to draw triangles in the
earlier classes. A polygon that has got 3 sides is a triangle.
To draw a triangle, we need 3 independent measures. Also,
there is only one way to construct a triangle, given its 3 sides.
For example, to construct a triangle with sides 3cm, 5cm and
7cm, there is only one way to do it.
Now, let us move on to quadrilaterals. A polygon that is
formed by 4 sides is called a quadrilateral. Isn’t it? But, a
quadrilateral can be of different shapes. They need not look
like the same for the given 4 measures. For example, some of the quadrilaterals having
their sides as 4 cm, 5 cm, 7 cm and 9 cm are given below.
So, to construct a particular quadrilateral, we need a 5th measure. That can be its
diagonal or an angle measure. Moreover, even if 2 or 3 sides are given, using the measures
of the diagonals and angles, we can construct quadrilaterals.

www.tntextbooks.in
Note
We can split any quadrilateral into two triangles by drawing a diagonal.
In the above figures, a quadrilateral is split in two ways by its diagonals. So, if
a diagonal is given, first draw the lower triangle with two sides and one diagonal.
Then, draw the upper triangle with other two measures.
E D
(i) • A polygon in which atleast one interior angle is
more than 180°, is called a concave polygon. In the C
given polygon, interior angle at C is more than 180°.

A B
• A polygon in which each interior angle is less than 180°, is E D
called a convex polygon. In the given polygon, all interior

C
angles are less than 180°.
(ii) Look at the following quadrilaterals. A B
Convex quadrilateral Concave quadrilateral

Though, we can construct a quadrilateral in two ways as shown above, we do not
take into account the concave quadrilaterals in this chapter. Hence, the construction of
only convex quadrilaterals are treated here.
Note
Consider the given Quadrilateral ABCD. In which AC is a diagonal (d), BE (h1)
and DF (h2) are the perpendiculars drawn from the vertices B and D on diagonal AC.
Area of quadrilateral ABCD = Area of ∆ABC + Area of ∆ACD D
1 1 C
= × AC × BE + × AC × FD h2
2 2 E
1 1 1 h1
= × d × h1 + × d × h2 = × d ×(h1 + h2 ) sq.units. F
2 2 2 A B
Geometry 181

www.tntextbooks.in
We shall now see a few types on constructing these quadrilaterals when its:
(i) 4 sides and a diagonal are given. (ii) 3 sides and 2 diagonals are given.
(iii) 4 sides and an angle are given. (iv) 3 sides and 2 angles are given.
(v) 2 sides and 3 angles are given.
5.10.1 Constructing a quadrilateral when its 4 sides and a diagonal are given
Example 5.21
Construct a quadrilateral DEAR with DE=6 cm, EA = 5 cm, AR = 5.5cm, RD = 5.2 cm
and DA = 10 cm. Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
DE = 6 cm, EA = 5 cm, AR = 5.5 cm,
RD = 5.2 cm and a diagonal
DA = 10 cm
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.40
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment DE = 6 cm.
2. With D and E as centres, draw arcs of radii 10 cm and 5 cm respectively and let them cut
at A.
3. Join DA and EA.
4. With D and A as centres, draw arcs of radii 5.2 cm and 5.5 cm respectively and let them cut
at R.
5. Join DR and AR .
6. DEAR is the required quadrilateral.
Calculation of Area:
1
Area of the quadrilateral DEAR = × d × (h1 + h2 ) sq. units
2
1
= × 10 × (1.9 + 2.3) = 5 × 4.2 = 21 cm2
2

www.tntextbooks.in
5.10.2 Construct a quadrilateral when its 3 sides and 2 diagonals are given
Example 5.22
Construct a quadrilateral NICE with NI=4.5 cm, IC= 4.3 cm, NE= 3.5 cm, NC= 5.5 cm
and IE = 5 cm. Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
NI = 4.5 cm, IC= 4.3 cm,
NE = 3.5 cm and two diagonals,
NC = 5.5 cm and IE = 5 cm
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.41
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment NI = 4.5 cm.
2. With N and I as centres, draw arcs of radii 5.5 cm and 4.3 cm respectively and let
them cut at C.
3. Join NC and IC.
4. With N and I as centres, draw arcs of radii 3.5 cm and 5 cm respectively and let them
cut at E.
5. Join NE, IE and CE .
6. NICE is the required quadrilateral.
1
Area of the quadrilateral NICE = × d × (h1 + h2 ) sq. units
2
1
= × 5 × (2.4 + 3.1)
2
= 2.5 × 5.5 = 13.75 cm2
Geometry 183

www.tntextbooks.in
5.10.3 Construct a quadrilateral when its 4 sides and one angle are given
Example 5.23
Construct a quadrilateral MATH with MA=4 cm, AT= 3.6 cm, TH = 4.5 cm,
MH= 5 cm and ∠A = 85° . Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
MA=4 cm, AT= 3.6 cm,
TH = 4.5 cm, MH= 5 cm and ∠A = 85°
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.42
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment MA = 4 cm.
2. Make ∠A = 85° .
3. With A as centre, draw an arc of radius 3.6 cm. Let it cut the ray AX at T.
4. With M and T as centres, draw arcs of radii 5 cm and 4.5 cm respectively and let them
cut at H.
5. Join MH and TH.
6. MATH is the required quadrilateral.
1
Area of the quadrilateral MATH =
× d × (h1 + h2 ) sq. units
2
1
= × 5.1 × (3.9 + 2.8)
2
= 2.55 × 6.7 = 17.09 cm2

www.tntextbooks.in
5.10.4 Construct a quadrilateral when its 3 sides and 2 angles are given
Example 5.24
Construct a quadrilateral ABCD with AB=7 cm, AD= 5 cm, CD = 5 cm, ∠BAC = 50°
and ABC 60 . Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
AB=7 cm, AD= 5 cm, CD = 5 cm
and two angles ∠BAC = 50° and
ABC 60
Rough diagram
Steps:
Fig. 5.43
1. Draw a line segment AB = 7 cm.
2. At A on AB , make ∠BAY = 50° and at B on AB, make ∠ABX = 60° . Let them intersect
at C.
3. With A and C as centres, draw arcs of radius 5 cm each. Let them intersect at D.
4. Join AD and CD.
5. ABCD is the required quadrilateral.
1
Area of the quadrilateral ABCD =
× d × (h1 + h2 ) sq. units
2
1
= × 6.4 × (3.8 + 5.3)
2
= 3.2 × 9.1 = 29.12 cm2
Geometry 185

www.tntextbooks.in
5.10.5 Construct a quadrilateral when its 2 sides and 3 angles are given
Example 5.25
Construct a quadrilateral PQRS with PQ=QR=5 cm, ∠QPR =
50 , ∠PRS =
40 and
∠RPS =80° . Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
PQ= 5 cm, QR=5 cm, ∠QPR = 50 ,
∠PRS = 40 and ∠RPS =80°
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.44
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment PQ = 5 cm.
50 .
2. At P on PQ, make ∠QPX =
3. With Q as centre, draw an arc of radius 5 cm. Let it cut PX at R.
4. At R on PR, make ∠PRS =

40 and at P on PR, make ∠RPS =80° . Let them intersect at S.
5. PQRS is the required quadrilateral.
1
Area of the quadrilateral PQRS = × d × (h1 + h2 ) sq. units
2
1
= × 6.4 × (4.7 + 3.8)
2
= 3.2 × 8.5 = 27.2 cm2

www.tntextbooks.in
Think
Is it possible to construct a quadrilateral PQRS with PQ = 5 cm,
QR = 3 cm, RS = 6 cm, PS = 7 cm and PR = 10 cm. If not, why?
5.11 Construction of Trapeziums

In the first term, we have learnt how to construct the quadrilaterals. To draw a
quadrilateral, how many measurements do you need? 5 measurements. Isn’t it? Let us see
the special quadrilaterals which need less than 5 measurements. Based on the nature of sides
and angles of a quadrilateral, it gets special names like trapezium, parallelogram, rhombus,
rectangle, square and kite.
Now, you will learn how to construct trapeziums.
Trapezium is a quadrilateral in which a pair of opposite sides are parallel. To construct
a trapezium, draw one of the parallel sides as a base and on that base construct a triangle with
the 2 more measurements. Now, through the vertex of that triangle, construct the parallel line
opposite to the base so that the triangle lies between the parallel sides. As the fourth vertex lies
on this parallel line, mark it with the remaining measure. Hence, we need four independent
measures to construct a trapezium. The given shapes are examples of trapeziums.
Note: The arrow marks in the above shapes represent parallel sides.
If the non-parallel sides of a trapezium are equal in length and form
equal angles at one of its bases, then it is called an isosceles trapezium.
Try these
1. The area of the trapezium is _________.

2. The distance between the parallel sides of a trapezium is called as _________.
3. If the height and parallel sides of a trapezium are 5cm, 7cm and 5cm respectively, then
its area is _________.
4. In an isosceles trapezium, the non-parallel sides are _________ in length.
5. To construct a trapezium, _________ measurements are enough.
6. If the area and sum of the parallel sides are 60 cm2 and 12 cm , its height is _________.
Let us construct a trapezium with the given measurements
1. Three sides and one diagonal. 2. Three sides and one angle.
3. Two sides and two angles. 4. Four sides.
Geometry 187

www.tntextbooks.in
5.11.1 Constructing a trapezium when its three sides and one diagonal are given
Example 5.26
Construct a trapezium BOAT in which BO is parallel to TA, BO=7cm, OA=6cm,
BA=10cm and TA=6cm. Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
BO=7cm, OA=6cm, BA=10cm ,
TA=6cm and BO || TA
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.45
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment BO = 7cm.
2. With B and O as centres, draw arcs of radii 10cm and 6cm respectively and let them cut at A.
3. Join BA and OA.
4. Draw AX parallel to BO
5. With A as centre, draw an arc of radius 6cm cutting AX at T.
6. Join BT. BOAT is the required trapezium.
1
Area of the trapezium BOAT = × h × (a + b) sq.units
2
1
= × 5.9× (7 + 6) = 38.35 sq.cm
2

www.tntextbooks.in
5.11.2 Constructing a trapezium when its three sides and one angle are given
Example 5.27
Construct a trapezium CARD in which CA is parallel to DR, CA=9cm, ∠ CAR = 70° ,
AR=6cm and CD=7cm. Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
CA=9cm, ∠ CAR = 70° AR=6cm,
and CD=7cm and CA || DR Rough diagram
Fig. 5.46
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment CA= 9cm.
2. Construct an angle ∠ CAX = 70° at A.
3. With A as centre, draw an arc of radius 6cm cutting AX at R.
4. Draw RY parallel to CA.
5. With C as centre, draw an arc of radius 7cm cutting RY at D.
6. Join CD. CARD is the required trapezium.
1
Area of the trapezium CARD = × h × (a + b) sq.units
2
1
= × 5.6× (9 + 11) = 56 sq.cm
2
Geometry 189

www.tntextbooks.in
5.11.3 Constructing a trapezium when its two sides and two angles are given
Example 5.28
Construct a trapezium DEAN in which DE is parallel to NA, DE=7cm, EA=6.5cm
∠ EDN = 100° and ∠ DEA = 70° . Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
DE=7cm, EA=6.5cm ∠ EDN = 100°
and ∠ DEA = 70° and DE || NA
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.47
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment DE= 7cm.
2. Construct an angle ∠ DEX = 70° at E.
3. With E as centre draw an arc of radius 6.5cm cutting EX at A.
4. Draw AY parallel to DE.
5. Construct an angle ∠ EDZ = 100° at D cutting AY at N.
6. DEAN is the required trapezium.
1
Area of the trapezium DEAN = × h × (a + b) sq.units
2
1
= × 6.1× (7 + 5.8) = 39.04 sq.cm
2

www.tntextbooks.in
5.11.4 Constructing a trapezium when its four sides are given
Example 5.29
Construct a trapezium DESK in which DE is parallel to KS, DE=8cm, ES=5.5cm,
KS =5cm and KD=6cm. Find also its area.
Solution:
Given:
DE=8cm, ES=5.5cm, KS =5cm,
KD=6cm and DE || KS
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.48
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment DE= 8cm.
2. Mark the point A on DE such that DA=5cm.
3. With A and E as centres, draw arcs of radii 6cm and 5.5cm respectively. Let them cut at S.
Join AS and ES.
4. With D and S as centres, draw arcs of radii 6cm and 5cm respectively. Let them cut at K.
Join DK and KS.
5. DESK is the required trapezium.
1
Area of the trapezium DESK = × h × (a + b) sq.units
2
1
= × 5.5× (8 + 5) = 35.75 sq.cm
2
Geometry 191

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 5.4
I. Construct the following quadrilaterals with the given measurements and also find their
area.
1. ABCD, AB = 5 cm, BC = 4.5 cm, CD = 3.8 cm, DA = 4.4 cm and AC= 6.2 cm.
2. PLAY, PL= 7 cm, LA = 6 cm, AY= 6 cm, PA = 8 cm and LY = 7 cm.
3. PQRS, PQ=QR= 3.5 cm, RS= 5.2 cm, SP = 5.3 cm and ∠Q = 120°.
4. MIND, MI =3.6 cm, ND = 4 cm, MD= 4 cm, ∠M = 50° and ∠D = 100°.
5. AGRI, AG= 4.5 cm, GR = 3.8 cm, ∠A = 60°, ∠G = 110° and ∠R = 90°.
II. Construct the following trapeziums with the given measures and also find their area.
1. AIMS with AI || SM, AI=6cm, IM=5cm, AM=9cm and MS=6.5cm.
2. CUTE with CU || ET, CU=7cm, ∠ UCE = 80° CE=6cm and TE=5cm.
3. ARMY with AR || YM, AR=7cm, RM=6.5cm ∠ RAY = 100° and ∠ ARM = 60°
4. CITY with CI || YT, CI=7cm, IT=5.5cm, TY=4cm and YC=6cm.
5.12 Construction of Special Quadrilaterals

Before we begin to learn constructing certain quadrilaterals, it is essential to recall their
basic properties that would help us during the process. We will try to do this by performing
some activities and then sum them up.
Activity
1. Place a pair of unequal sticks 2. Now place another such pair

(say pieces of broomstick) such that meeting the free ends of the first
they have their end points joined at pair.
one end.
What is the figure enclosed? It is a quadrilateral. Name it as ABCD. How many sides
are there? What are its diagonals? Are the diagonals equal? Are the angles equal?
In the above activity can you get a quadrilateral in which

(i) All the four angles are acute. (iv) One of the angles is a right angle.
(ii) One of the angles is obtuse. (v) Two of the angles are right angles.
(iii) Two of the angles are obtuse. (vi) The diagonals are mutually ^r.

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
1. A pair of identical 30o–60o–90o set-squares are needed

for this activity. Place them as shown in the figure.
(i) What is the shape we get? It is a parallelogram.

(ii) Are the opposite sides parallel?
(iii) Are the opposite sides equal?
(iv) Are the diagonals equal?
(v) Can you get this shape by using any
other pair of identical set-squares?
2. W
e need a pair of 30o–60o–90o set- squares for this activity.
Place them as shown in the figure.
(i) What is the shape we get?
(ii) Is it a parallelogram?
It is a quadrilateral; infact it is
a rectangle. (How?)
(iii) What can we say about its

lengths of sides, angles and
diagonals?
Discuss and list them out.
3. Repeat the above activity, this time with a pair

of 45o–45o–90o set-squares.
(i) How does the figure change now? Is it a

parallelogram? It becomes a square! (How
did it happen?)
(ii) What can we say about its lengths of sides,
angles and diagonals?
Discuss and list them out.
(iii) How does it differ from the list we prepared
for the rectangle?
Geometry 193

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
4.
We again use four identical 30o–60o–90o set- squares for this activity.
Note carefully how they are placed
touching one another.
(i) Do we get a parallelogram
now?
(ii) What can we say about its
lengths of sides, angles and
diagonals?
(iii) What is special about their
diagonals?
Based on the outcome of the above activities, we can list out the various properties of the
above quadrilaterals, all of which happen to be parallelograms!
All All Opposite

All sides Opposite Sides Diagonals
angles angles angles
Special
Quadrilaterals
Bisect
Supple- Cut at
Equal Equal Equal Parallel 90 o
each
mentary rt.angles
other
Parallelogram Sometimes Sometimes Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Always Sometimes
Rhombus Always Sometimes Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Always Always
Rectangle Sometimes Always Always Always Always Always Always Sometimes
Square Always Always Always Always Always Always Always Always

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these

(a) A square is a special rectangle.
(b) A square is a parallelogram.
(c) A square is a special rhombus.
(d) A rectangle is a parallelogram

2. Name the quadrilaterals
(a) which have diagonals bisecting each other.
(b) In which the diagonals are perpendicular bisectors of each other.
(c) Which have diagonals of different lengths.
(d) Which have equal diagonals.
(e) Which have parallel opposite sides.
(f) In which opposite angles are equal.
3. Two sticks are placed on a ruled sheet as shown. What figure is formed if the four
corners of the sticks are joined?
(a) (b)
Two equal sticks. Placed such that their

Two unequal sticks. Placed
midpoints coincide.
such that their midpoints
coincide.
Geometry 195

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
(c) (d)
Two unequal sticks. Placed intersecting Two equal sticks. Placed intersecting
at mid points perpendicularly. at mid points perpendicularly.
(e) (f)
Two unequal sticks. Tops on the

Two unequal sticks. Tops are not on the same ruling. Bottoms on the same
same ruling. Bottoms on the same ruling. ruling. Not necessarily cutting at the
Not cutting at the mid point of either. mid point of either.
5.13 Construction of a Parallelogram

Let us construct a parallelogram with the given measurements
1. Two adjacent sides and one angle. 2. Two adjacent sides and one diagonal.
3. Two diagonals and one included angle. 4. One side, one diagonal and one angle.
Note
Similar arrows Similar lines Figure shows that Figure shows that the
indicates the parallel indicates the the diagonals opposite angles are
sides. congruent sides. bisect each other. congruent.

www.tntextbooks.in
5.13.1 Constructing a parallelogram when its two adjacent sides and one angle are
given
Example 5.30
Construct a parallelogram BIRD with BI=6.5cm, IR=5cm and ∠ BIR = 70° . Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
BI=6.5cm, IR=5cm and ∠ BIR = 70°
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.49
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment BI=6.5cm.
2. Make an angle ∠ BIX = 70° at I on BI .
3. With I as centre, draw an arc of radius 5cm cutting IX at R.
4. With B and R as centres, draw arcs of radii 5cm and 6.5cm respectively. Let them cut at D.
5. Join BD and RD.
6. BIRD is the required parallelogram.
Area of the parallelogram BIRD = bh sq.units
= 6.5× 4.7 = 30.55 sq.cm
Geometry 197

www.tntextbooks.in
5.13.2 Constructing a parallelogram when its two adjacent sides and one diagonal are
given
Example 5.31
Construct a parallelogram CALF with CA=7cm, CF=6cm and AF=10cm.
Also find its area.
Solution:
Given:
CA=7cm, CF=6cm and AF=10cm
Rough diagram
Steps: Fig. 5.50
1. Draw a line segment CA=7cm.

2. With C and A as centres, draw arcs of radii 6cm and 10cm respectively. Let them cut at F.
3. Join CF and AF.
4. With A and F as centres, draw arcs of radii 6cm and 7cm respectively. Let them cut at L.
5. Join AL and FL.
6. CALF is the required parallelogram.
Area of the parallelogram CALF = bh sq.units
= 7× 5.9 = 41.3 sq.cm

www.tntextbooks.in
5.13.3 Constructing a parallelogram when its two diagonals and one included angle
are given
Example 5.32
Construct a parallelogram DUCK with DC=8cm, UK=6cm and ∠ DOU = 110° . Also
find its area.
Solution:
Given:
DC=8cm, UK=6cm and ∠ DOU = 110°
Rough diagram
5.8
cm
Fig. 5.51
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment DC=8cm.
2. Mark O the midpoint of DC .

3. Draw a line XY through O which makes ∠ DOY = 110° .

4. With O as centre and 3cm as radius draw two arcs on XY on either sides of DC . Let the

arcs cut OX at K and OY at U
5. Join DU ,UC , CK and KD .

6. DUCK is the required parallelogram.
Area of the parallelogram DUCK = bh sq.units
= 5.8 × 3.9 = 22.62 sq.cm
Geometry 199

www.tntextbooks.in
5.13.4 Constructing a parallelogram when its one side, one diagonal and one angle are given
Example 5.33
Construct a parallelogram BEAR with BE=7cm, BA=7.5cm and ∠ BEA = 80° . Also find
its area.
Solution:
Given:
BE=7cm, BA=7.5cm and ∠ BEA =
80°
Rough diagram
Fig. 5.52
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment BE=7cm.
2. Make an angle ∠ BEX = 80° at E on BE .
3. With B as centre, draw an arc of radius 7.5cm cutting EX at A and Join BA.
4. With B as centre, draw an arc of radius equal to the length of AE .
5. With A as centre, draw an arc of radius 7cm. Let both arcs cut at R.
6. Join BR and AR.
7. BEAR is the required parallelogram.
Area of the parallelogram BEAR = bh sq.units
= 7× 4.1 = 28.7 sq.cm

www.tntextbooks.in
5.14 Construction of a Rhombus

Let us now construct a rhombus with the given measurements
(i) One side and one diagonal (iii) Two diagonals

(ii) One side and one angle (iv) One diagonal and one angle
5.14.1 Construction of a rhombus when one side and one diagonal are given
Example 5.34
E S
Construct a rhombus ROSE with RO = 5 cm and RS = 8 cm.
Also find its area. m
8c
Solution:
Given: RO = 5 cm and RS = 8 cm R O
5 cm
Rough diagram
E S
6 cm
8 cm
R 5 cm O
Fig. 5.53
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment RO = 5 cm. 4. With R and S as centres, draw arcs of
2. With R and O as centres, draw arcs of radius 5 cm each and let them cut at E.
radii 8 cm and 5 cm respectively and let 5. Join RE and SE.
them cut at S. 6. ROSE is the required rhombus.
3. Join RS and OS.
1
Area of rhombus ROSE = × d × d sq.units
2 1 2
1
= × 8 × 6 = 24sq.cm
2
Geometry 201

www.tntextbooks.in
5.14.2 Construction of a rhombus when one side and one angle are given
Example 5.35 F A
Construct a rhombus LEAF with LE = 6 cm and ∠ L = 65° .
Also find its area.
Solution:
65º
Given: LE = 6 cm and ∠ L = 65° L E
6 cm
Rough diagram
F A
6.4
cm
cm
K .2
10
J
65º
L 6 cm E
Fig. 5.54
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment LE = 6 cm.
2. At L on LE, make ∠ ELX = 65° .
3. With L as centre draw an arc of radius 6 cm. Let it cut LX at F.
4. With E and F as centres, draw arcs of radius 6 cm each and let them cut at A.
5. Join EA and AF.
6. LEAF is the required rhombus.
1
Area of rhombus LEAF = × d × d sq.units
2 1 2
1
= × 6.4 × 10.2 = 32.64 sq.cm
2

www.tntextbooks.in
5.14.3 Construction of a rhombus when two diagonals are given

Example 5.36
Construct a rhombus NEST with NS = 9 cm and ET = 8 cm. T
Also find its area.
Solution:
8 cm
Given: NS = 9 cm and ET = 8 cm
N 9 cm S
X
T
E
Rough diagram
4 cm
N S
9 cm O
4 cm
Steps: Fig. 5.55
1. Draw a line segment NS = 9 cm.

2. Draw the perpendicular bisector XY to NS. Let it cut NS at O.
3. With O as centre, draw arcs of radius 4 cm on either side of
O which cut OX at T and OY at E.
4. Join NE, ES, ST and TN.
5. NEST is the required rhombus.
1
Area of rhombus NEST = × d × d sq.units
2 1 2
1
= × 9 × 8 = 36 sq.cm
2
Geometry 203

www.tntextbooks.in
5.14.4 Construction of a rhombus when one diagonal and one angle are given
Example 5.37
M
Construct a rhombus FARM with FR = 7 cm and
∠ F = 80° . Also find its area.
80º
Solution: F 7 cm R
Given: FR = 7 cm and ∠ F = 80°
P A
X
Rough diagram
M
5.9 cm
40º 40º
F 40º 7 cm O 40º R
Q Y
Fig. 5.56
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment FR = 7 cm.
2. At F, make ∠ RFX = ∠ RFY = 40° on either side of FR.
3. At R, make ∠ FRP = ∠ FRQ = 40° on either side of FR.

4. Let FX and RP cut at M and FY and RQ cut at A.
5. FARM is the required rhombus.
1
Area of rhombus FARM = × d × d sq.units
2 1 2
1
= × 7 × 5.9 = 20.65 sq.cm
2

www.tntextbooks.in
5.15 Construction of a Rectangle

Let us now construct a rectangle with the given measurements
(i) length and breadth
(ii) a side and a diagonal
5.15.1 Construction of a rectangle when its length and breadth are given
Example 5.38
Construct a rectangle BEAN with BE = 5 cm and BN = 3 cm. Also find its area.
Solution: N A
Given: BE = 5 cm and BN = 3 cm
3 cm
X
B 5 cm
E
N A Rough diagram
3 cm
B 5 cm E
Fig. 5.57
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment BE = 5 cm.
2. At B, construct BX ⊥ BE .
3. With B as centre, draw an arc of radius 3 cm and let it cut BX at N.
4. With E and N as centres, draw arcs of radii 3 cm and 5 cm respectively and let them cut
at A.
5. Join EA and NA.
6. BEAN is the required rectangle.
Area of rectangle BEAN = l × b sq.units

= 5 × 3 = 15 sq.cm
Geometry 205

www.tntextbooks.in
5.15.2 Construction of a rectangle when a side and a diagonal are given

Example 5.39
Construct a rectangle LIME with LI = 6 cm and IE = 7 cm. Also find its area.
Solution:
Given: LI = 6 cm and IE = 7 cm
E M
7 cm
L 6 cm I
Rough diagram
E M
3.6 cm
7c
m
L 6 cm I
Fig. 5.58
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment LI = 6 cm.
2. At L, construct LX ⊥ LI .
3. With I as centre, draw an arc of radius 7 cm and let it cut LX at E.
4. With I as centre and LE as radius draw an arc. Also, with E as centre and LI as radius
draw an another arc. Let them cut at M.
5. Join IM and EM.
6. LIME is the required rectangle.
Area of rectangle LIME = l × b sq.units

= 6×3.6 = 21.6 sq.cm

www.tntextbooks.in
5.16 Construction of a Square

Let us now construct a square when (i) its side is given and (ii) its diagonal is given
5.16.1 Construction of a square when its side is given
Example 5.40
Construct a square LAMP of side 4 cm. Also find its area.

Solution:
Given: side = 4 cm
P M
L 4 cm A
Rough diagram
X
P M
L 4 cm A
Fig. 5.59
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment LA = 4 cm.
2. At L, construct LX ⊥ LA .
3. With L as centre, draw an arc of radius 4 cm and let it cut LX at P.
4. With A and P as centres, draw arcs of radius 4 cm each and let them cut at M.
5. Join AM and PM. LAMP is the required square.
Area of square LAMP = a 2 sq.units

= 4 × 4 = 16 sq.cm
Geometry 207

www.tntextbooks.in
5.16.2 Construction of a square when its diagonal is given
Example 5.41
Construct a square RAMP of a diagonal 8 cm. Also find its area.
Solution: P M
Given: diagonal = 8 cm
X 8 cm
P
R A
Rough diagram
4 cm
R 8 cm O M
4 cm
cm
5.7
Y
Fig. 5.60
Steps:
1. Draw a line segment RM = 8 cm.
2. Draw the perpendicular bisector XY to RM. Let it bisect RM at O.
3. With O as centre, draw arcs of radius 4 cm on either side of O which cut OX at P and OY
at A.
4. Join RA, AM, MP and PR.
5. RAMP is the required square.
Area of square RAMP = a 2 sq.units

= 5.7 × 5.7 = 32.49 sq.cm

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 5.5
I. Construct the following parallelograms with the given measurements and find their area.
1. ARTS, AR=6cm, RT=5cm and ∠ ART = 70° .
2. CAMP, CA=6cm, AP=8cm and CP=5.5cm.
3. EARN, ER=10cm, AN=7cm and ∠ EOA = 110° where ER and AN intersect at O.
4. GAIN, GA=7.5cm, GI=9cm and ∠ GAI = 100° .

II. Construct the following rhombuses with the given measurements and also find their area.
(i) FACE, FA= 6 cm and FC = 8 cm (iii) LUCK, LC = 7.8 cm and UK = 6 cm
(ii) CAKE, CA=5 cm and ∠A = 65° (iv) PARK, PR = 9 cm and ∠P =70°
III. Construct the following rectangles with the given measurements and also find their area.
(i) HAND, HA = 7 cm and AN = 4 cm (ii) LAND, LA = 8 cm and AD = 10 cm
IV. Construct the following squares with the given measurements and also find their area.
(i) EAST, EA = 6.5 cm (ii) WEST, WS = 7.5 cm
SUMMARY
zz Congruent figures are exactly the same in shape and size.
zz Similar figures have the same shape but different sizes.
zz In a right angled triangle, the square on the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the
squares on the other two sides. This is known as Pythagoras theorem.
zz The three medians of any triangle are concurrent. The point of concurrence of the
three medians in a triangle is called its Centroid, denoted by the letter G.
zz The three altitudes of any triangle are concurrent. The point of concurrence of the
three altitudes of a triangle is called as its Orthocentre, denoted by the letter H.
zz The three perpendicular bisectors of the sides of any triangle are concurrent. The
point of concurrence of the three perpendicular bisectors of a triangle is called as
its Circumcentre, denoted by the letter S.
zz The three angle bisectors of any triangle are concurrent. The point of concurrence
of the three angle bisectors of a triangle is called as its Incentre, denoted by the
letter I.
zz A trapezium is a quadrilateral in which a pair of opposite sides are parallel.
zz A parallelogram is a quadrilateral in which the opposite sides are parallel.
zz Rhombus is a parallelogram in which all its sides are congruent.
zz Rectangle is a parallelogram whose all its angles are right angles.
zz Square is a parallelogram in which all its sides and angles are equal.
Geometry 209

www.tntextbooks.in
ICT CORNER
Step-1 Open the Browser type the URL Link given below
(or) Scan the QR Code. GeoGebra work book named Expected Outcome
“GEOMETRY” will open. Click on the worksheet named
“Parallelogram”.
Step-2 In the given worksheet you can move the sliders

Base, Height and the angle. Check for what value(s)
the parallelogram becomes rectangle and square.
Study the properties.
Step 1 Step 2
Browse in the link

Geometry:
ICT CORNER
Scan the QR Code. GeoGebra work sheet named “8th Expected Outcome
Standard III term” will open. Select the work sheet named
“Rectangle Construction”.
Step-2 Move the sliders on left side to change the length and
breadth of the rectangle. Drag the slider step by step on
right side to see the steps for construction.
Step 1 Step 2
Browse in the link

Geometry:

www.tntextbooks.in
Y Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 10 marks

Y axis 1 cm = 2 students
28
26 25
24
STATISTICS
22
6
22
30%
20
20
% Pink
20 d
18
18
16 Re
No. of students
14
12
12
50 Stude
10
10
nts
8
8
6
6 25%
Blue
5
4
3 15%
2 Green
X' −10 O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 X
−2 Marks
Y'
Learning Objectives
To recall the formation of frequency tables.

To construct simple Pie-charts for the given data.
To know how to draw Histogram and Frequency Polygon for grouped data.
6.1 Introduction
Before we learn on Pie charts, Histograms and Frequency Polygons, let us recall what we
have studied in the previous classes like data (primary and secondary) and frequency tables
for ungrouped data.
Kamaraj! Go and collect II-term Math marks of all the students from our class.
Geetha! You go and note down the heights of all the students from the cumulative record.
Students, here the marks collected by Kamaraj and heights noted by Geetha are called ‘Data’.
Data is a collection of facts such as numbers, words, measurements and observations.
For example: Staff ’s age in a company 27, 51, 19, 21, 46, 35, 52, 25, 57, 29.
6.1.1 Data:
Primary data:
These are the data that are collected in person for the first time for a specific purpose.
Here, Kamaraj has collected the data of math marks from the students in person. It is called
primary data.
Also, (i) Census in a village
(ii) Collection of colours which the students like in a class are some examples of
primary data.
Secondary data:
These are the data that are sourced from some places that has originally collected it. This
kind of data has already been collected by some other persons. The statistical operation may
have been performed on them already. Here, Geetha also collected the data but she took it
from a record which had already collected them. This is called secondary data.
Also, (i) The details of 'PATTA' for a land can be had from the registration office.
(ii) Birth–Death details data can be got from concern office are some examples of
secondary data.
Statistics 211
06_8th_Maths_Statistics_Chap 6.indd 211 20/11/2022 13:21:16

www.tntextbooks.in
From these primary and secondary data , Sometimes we can’t get any specific or required
information directly like, how many students have got more than 50 marks? how many students
got marks between 30 and 40? how many of them are with height 125 cm? If we need answer
for these questions, we have to tabulate the data.
MATHEMATICS ALIVE – STATISTICS IN REAL LIFE

Leisure time on an average day 140
Stock Market Return Distribution
Relaxing and Other leisure activities 120
thinking (10 minutes)
(20 minutes) 100
Playing chess
Frequency
Watching TV 80
(25 minutes) (2 hours)
Listening music 60
(20 minutes)
40
Interacting with
frineds 20
(20 minutes)
0
%
–1 %, – 9%
–1 , – %
–1 %, – 6%
–1 %, –15%
–1 %, –1 %
–1 , –1 %
0% 0%
–8 –8%
%, %
–5 –5%
–3 , –3%
–2 –2%
0% 0%
1% 1%
3%, 3%
5% 5%
6% 6%
8% 8%
9% , 9%
%, %
13 131%
% %
16 , 16%
%
–2 , –21
8% 18
3
1% 1
–7 , –7
11 , 11
14 , 14
17
Reading books
–1 %, –1
6 1
5 1
%,
,
,
,
,
%,
,
%,
%
%
%
3%
(40 minutes)
1
9
3
–2
Stock Market Return
Histograms are used in stock market to

Pie charts are used in our daily life activities
represent the returns of stock buyer.
6.2 Frequency Distribution Table

Frequency distribution: Note
A frequency distribution is the
arrangement of the given data in the form of Range: The difference between the largest
the table showing frequency with which each and the smallest values of the data given.
variable occurs. If 5, 15, 10, 7, 20, 18 are the data then,
There are two types of distribution Range = 20–5=15
table namely
(i) frequency distribution table for ungrouped data and
(ii) frequency distribution table for grouped data.
Try these
1.
Arrange the given data in ascending and descending order:
9,34,4,13,42,10,25,7,31,4,40
2. Find the range of the given data : 53, 42, 61, 9, 39, 63, 14, 20, 06, 26, 31, 4, 57
6.2.1 Construction of frequency distribution table for ungrouped data

Ungrouped data or Discrete Data:
An ungrouped data can assume only whole numbers and exact measurement. These
are the data that cannot have a range of values. A usual way to represent this is by using
Bar graphs.

www.tntextbooks.in
Examples: 1. The number of teachers in a school.

2. The number of players in a game.
Example 6.1
Form an ungrouped frequency distribution table for the weight of 25 students in STD IV
given below and answer the following questions.
25, 24, 20, 25, 16, 15, 18, 20, 25, 16, 20, 16, 15, 18, 25, 16, 24, 18, 25, 15, 27, 20, 20, 27, 25.
(i) Find the range of the weights.
(ii) How many of the students has the highest weight in the class?
(iii) What is the weight to which more number of students belong to?
(iv) How many of them belong to the least weight?
Solution:
To form a distribution table, arrange the given data in ascending order under Weight
column then, put a vertical mark against each variable under Tally marks column and count
the number of tally marks against the variable and enter it in Frequency column as given
below. Hence, the distribution table is
Weight Tally Marks Frequency
15 ||| 3
16 |||| 4
18 ||| 3
20 |||| 5
24 || 2
25 |||| | 6
27 || 2
Total 25
(i) The range of the given data is the difference between the largest and the smallest
value. Here, the range = 27–15 =12.
(ii) From this table, two of the students have the highest weight of 27 kg.
(iii) 6 students belong to 25 kg weight.
(iv) 3 students belong to the least weight of 15 kg.
So, when we tabulate the given data, it is easy to get the information at a glance, Isn’t it?
Statistics 213

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
1. Collect the blood group of your classmates. Complete the table and analyse.
Blood group Tally marks No. of students
A+
B+
AB+
O+
A-
B-
AB-
O-
2. Observe the last alphabet in the name of your classmates, tabulate them and answer
the following questions.
Alphabet Tally No. of
marks students (f)
1. In which letter do the names end the most?
2. In which letter do the names end the least?
3. What are the letters in which the names do
not end with?
4. Girl names mostly end with ______ letter(s).
5. Boy names mostly end with ______ letter(s).
6.2.2 Construction of frequency distribution table for grouped data

Grouped data or Continuous Data:
A grouped data is any value within a certain interval. The data can take values
between certain range with the highest and the lowest value. Continuous data can be
tabulated in what is called as frequency distribution. They can be graphically represented
using Histograms.
Example: 1. The age of persons in a village.
2. The height and the weight of the students of your class.
Now, we will consider a situation, if we collect data of marks for 50 students, it becomes
very difficult to put tally for each and every marks of all the 50 students. Because if we arrange
the marks in a table, it will be very large in length and not understandable at once. In this case,
we use class intervals. In this table, consider the groups of data in the form of class intervals to
tally the frequency for the given data.
Class Interval:
The range of the variable is grouped into number of classes, and each group is known as
class interval (C.I). The difference between the upper limit (U) and the lower limit (L) of the
class is known as class size.
i.e. C.I = Upper limit – Lower limit

www.tntextbooks.in
For example,
Marks for the C.I 10 to 20 can be written as 10-20, whose class size is 20–10=10
Class interval
(a) Continuous (b) Discontinuous

Series Series
10 20 30 40 11 20 21 30 31 40
(e.g.) (e.g.)
10 - 20 11 - 20 gap
20 - 30 21 - 30
30 - 40 31 - 40
40 - 50 41 - 50
(a) While distributing the frequency, we follow the counting as given below. Suppose the classes
are 10-20, 20-30, 30-40, 40-50 ..... This represent a continuous series. Here, 20 is included in
the class 20-30 and 30 is included in 30-40, likewise for the other classes also.
(b) I n case the given series has a gap between the limits of any two adjacent classes, this
gap may be filled up by extending the two limits of each class by taking half of the value
of the gap. Half of the gap is called the adjustment factor.
Conversion of a discontinuous series into continuous series:
In case the given series is a discontinuous, we can make it as continuous as follows,
Illustration 1:
11 - 20 gap difference in the gap = 21 – 20
=1
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
Lower boundary = lower limit –half of the gap
1
= 11 − (1)
2
= 11 – 0.5 = 10.5
Upper boundary = upper limit + half of the gap
1
= 20 + (1) Discontinuous series Continuous series
2
= 20 + 0.5 -0.5 +0.5
= 20.5 and so on for other 11-20 10.5-20.5
classes too. 21-30 20.5-30.5
Therefore, the class interval can be changed
31-40 30.5-40.5
into a continuous one as given in the
following table, 41-50 40.5-50.5
Statistics 215

www.tntextbooks.in
Note
Inclusive series:
In the class-intervals, if the upper limit and lower limit are included in that class interval then
it is called inclusive series. For example, 11-20, 21-30 , 31-40, 41-50 etc is an inclusive series.
Here, the data 11 and 20 are included in the class (11-20) and so on. Clearly, it is a discontinuous
series.
Exclusive series:
In the class intervals, if the upper limit of one class interval is the lower limit of the next class
interval then it is called exclusive series. For example, 10-15, 15-20, 20-25, 25-30 etc., is an
exclusive series.
Here, 15 is included in the class 15-20 and 20 is included in 20-30. Clearly, it is a
continuous series.
6.2.2 (i) Construction of grouped frequency distribution table – Continuous series

Example 6.2
The EB bill(in `) of each of the 26 houses in a village are given below. Construct the
frequency table.
215 200 120 350 800 600 350 400 180 210 170 305 204
220 425 540 315 640 700 790 340 586 660 785 290 300
Solution:
Maximum bill amount = ` 800
Minimum bill amount = ` 120
Range = largest value – smallest value
Range = 800 – 120 = ` 680
Suppose if we want to take class size as 100, then
Range
Range 680
680
The number of possible class intervals = =
=
= ==66.8.877
Class size
Class size 100
100
Class Intervals Tally Marks Frequency
100-200 ||| 3
200-300 |||| | 6
300-400 |||| | 6
400-500 || 2
500-600 || 2
|||
600-700 3
||||
700-800 4
Total 26

www.tntextbooks.in
6.2.2 (ii) Construction of grouped frequency distribution table - Discontinuous series.

Example 6.3
Convert the given discontinuous series into a continuous series.
Class 0-5 6-11 12-17 18-23 24-29

Frequency(f) 7 10 9 5 12
Solution:
As told above, first we should fill the gap by extending the two limits of each class by half
of the value of the gap. Here the gap is 1, so subtracting and adding half of the gap i.e 0.5 to
the lower and the upper limit of each class makes it as a continuous series.
Class -0.5-5.5 5.5-11.5 11.5-17.5 17.5-23.5 23.5-29.5

Frequency(f) 7 10 9 5 12
Try these
1. Prepare a frequency table for the data :

3, 4, 2, 4, 5, 6, 1, 3, 2, 1, 5, 3, 6, 2, 1, 3, 2, 4
2. Prepare a grouped frequency table for the data :
10, 9, 3, 29, 17, 34, 23, 20, 39, 42, 5, 12, 19, 47, 18, 19, 27, 7, 13, 40, 38, 24, 34, 15, 40
6.3 Graphical Representation of the Frequency Distribution for Ungrouped Data

A graphical representation is the geometrical image of a set of data. It is a mathematical
picture. It enables us to think about a statistical problem in visual terms. A picture is said to
be more effective than words for describing a particular thing. The graphical representation
of data is more effective for understanding. In the previous classes, we have studied some
graphical representations of ungrouped data such as Line graph, Bar graph, and Pictograph.
Now, we are going to represent the given ungrouped data in the circular form namely the pie
diagram or the pie chart.
6.3.1 Pie chart (or) Pie diagram
A pie chart is a circular graph which
shows the total value with its components. The
circle is divided into sectors and the area of the 30%
sectors is proportional to the information given. 20% Pink
The area of a circle represents the total value Red
Blue
and the different sectors of the circle represent
10% Green
the different components. In the ‘pie chart’ the Yellow
25%
data are mostly expressed in percentage. Each
15%
component is expressed as percentage of the
total value.
Statistics 217

www.tntextbooks.in
The Pie diagram is so called because the entire graph looks like an American
food ‘pie’ and the components like slices cut from ‘pie’.
6.3.2 Method of constructing a pie chart:
In a pie chart, we know that the various components are represented by
American food ‘pie’
the sectors of a circle and the whole circle represents the sum of the value of
all the components. Therefore, the total angle of 360° at the centre of the circle is divided into
different sectors according to the value of the components.
valueof the component

The central angle of a component = ×360°
total value
Sometimes, the value of the components are expressed in percentage. In such cases,
percentage valueof thecomponent

The central angle of a component = ×360°
100
Steps for construction of the pie chart:

1) Calculate the central angle for each component using the above formula and tabulate it.
2) Draw a circle of convenient radius and mark one horizontal radius in it.
3) Draw radius making central angle of first component with horizontal radius. This sector
represents the first component. From this radius, draw next radius with central angle of
the second component and so on, until the completion of all components.
4) For identification of each sector, shade with different colours.
5) Label each sector.
Here are given some examples, let us draw the pie chart for the given data.
Example 6.4
Draw a pie diagram to represent the following data, which shows the expenditure of
paddy cultivation in 2 acres of land.
Particulars Seeds Ploughing Wages Fertilizer Harvest Others

Expenses (`) 2000 6000 10000 7000 8000 3000
Also, 1. Find the percentage of the head in which more money had been spent?
2. What percentage of money was spent for seeds?

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution: Value
Particulars Central angle = Total × 360

Expenditure of paddy cultivation in 2 acres.
2000
Seeds × 360° = 20°
36000
Seeds
Plough 6000
10 Plough × 360° = 60°
0° 60° Coolie 36000
20°
30° Fertilizer 10000
Coolie × 360° = 100°
°
70
Harvesting 36000
80
Others 7000
Fertilizer × 360° = 70°
36000
8000
1.
More money had been spent for wages Harvesting × 360° = 80°
36000
`10,000. Converting into percentage, We have
3000
10000 Others × 360° = 30°
Wages = × 100% = 27.7% 36000
36000
Total 360°
2.
`2000 was spent for seeds. Converting into
percentage, We have,
2000
Seeds = × 100% = 5.55%
36000
Example 6.5
Draw a suitable pie chart for the following data relating to the cost of construction of a house.
Particulars Bricks Steel Cement Timber Labour Others
Expenses: 10% 15% 25% 10% 20% 20%
Also, find how much was spent on labour if `55000 was spent for cement.
Solution: Particulars Central angle
10
Bricks × 360° = 36°
Cost of construction of a house. 100
15
Steel × 360° = 54°
100
Bricks
25
Steel Cement × 360° = 90°
°
100
54
90
36° Cement
10
°
Timber × 360° = 36°

36° 72
°
Timber
100
72°
Labour 20
Labour × 360° = 72°
Others 100
20
Others × 360° = 72°
100
Total 360°
Statistics 219

www.tntextbooks.in
If the expenses on cement is ` 55000 then, it represents 25 % and he spent 20 % on labour
20 % Expenses
Therefore, the expense on Labour =
= × 55000
25 25 55000
20 ?
= ` 44,000
Direct proportion
Note
Uses of pie chart:

1. Pie charts are widely used by the business and the media people.
2. With the help of Pie charts, one can show how the expenditure of the Government
or Industry is distributed over different heads.
3. Research people use these type of charts to show their results.
Exercise 6.1
(i) Data has already been collected by some other person is _____________ data.
(ii) The upper limit of the class interval (25-35) is _____________.
(iii) The range of the data 200, 15, 20, 103, 3, 196, is _____________.
(iv) If a class size is 10 and range is 80 then the number of classes are _________.
(v) Pie chart is a __________ graph.
(i) Inclusive series is a continuous series.
(ii) Comparison of parts of a whole may be done by a pie chart.
(iii) Media and business people use pie charts.
(iv) A pie diagram is a circle broken down into component sectors.
3. Represent the following data in ungrouped frequency table which gives the number of
children in 25 families.
1, 3, 0, 2, 5, 2, 3, 4, 1, 0, 5, 4, 3, 1, 3, 2, 5, 2, 1, 1, 2, 6, 2, 1, 4
4. Form a continuous frequency distribution table for the marks obtained by 30 students in
a X std public examination.
328, 470, 405, 375, 298, 326, 276, 362, 410, 255, 391, 370, 455, 229, 300, 183, 283, 366, 400,
495, 215, 157, 374, 306, 280, 409, 321, 269, 398, 200.
5. A paint company asked a group of students about their favourite colours and made a pie
chart of their findings. Use the information to answer the following questions.
(i) What percentage of the students like red colour?
(ii) How many students liked green colour?

www.tntextbooks.in
(iii) What fraction of the students liked blue?

(iv) How many students did not like red colour? 30%
20% Pink
(v) How many students liked pink or blue? Red
(vi) How many students were asked about their tude

nts
Blue
50 S Green
favourite colours? 25%
Yellow
15%
6. A survey gives the following information of food items

preferred by people. Draw a Pie chart.
Items Vegetables Meat Salad Fruits Sprouts Bread
No.of people 160 90 80 50 30 40
7. Income from various sources for Government of India from a rupee is given below.
Draw a pie chart.
Source Corporation Income Customs Excise Service Others
tax tax duties Tax
Income (in paise) 19 16 9 14 10 32
8. Monthly expenditure of Kumaran’s family is given below. Draw a suitable Pie chart.
Particulars Food Education Rent Transport Miscellaneous
Expenses (in %) 50 % 20 % 15 % 5% 10 %
Also
1. Find the amount spent for education if Kumaran spends `6000 for Rent.
2. What is the total salary of Kumaran?
3. How much did he spend more for food than education?
6.4 Graphical Representation of the Frequency Distribution for Grouped Data

The Line graph, Bar graph, Pictograph and the Pie chart are the graphical representations
of the frequency for ungrouped data. Histogram, Frequency polygon, Frequency curve,
Cumulative frequency curves (Ogives) are some of the graphical representations of the
frequency distribution for grouped data.
In this class, we are going to represent the grouped data frequency by Histogram and
Frequency polygon only. You will learn the other type of representations in the higher classes.
Graphical representation
Ungrouped data Grouped data
line bar pictograph pie histogram frequency frequency cummulative

graph graph chart polygon curve frequency
curve
Statistics 221

www.tntextbooks.in
6.4.1 Histogram Y Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 10 units

Y axis 1 cm = 100 units
A histogram is a graph of a continuous 1000
frequency distribution. Histogram contains 900
a set of rectangles, the base of which is 800

the length of the class interval and the 700
frequency in each class interval is its height. 600
i.e the class intervals are represented on the 500
Width remains
the same
horizontal axis (x- axis) and the frequencies
400
}
are represented on the vertical axis (y-axis). Height of the rectangle
is the frequency
300
The area of each rectangle is 200
proportional to the frequency in the 100
respective class interval and the total area
of the histogram is proportional to the X' –10 O 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 X
–100
total frequency. Because of the continuous Indicates No gap between
Y' not starts from the rectangles
frequency distribution, the rectangles are ‘0’
placed continuously side by side with no

gap between adjacent rectangles.
Steps to construct a Histogram:

1. Represent the data in the continuous form (exclusive form) if it is in discontinuous
form (inclusive form) by converting it using the adjustment factor.
2. Select the appropriate units along the x-axis and y-axis.
3. Plot the lower limits of all class interval on the x –axis.
4. Plot the frequencies of the distribution on the y – axis.
5. Construct the rectangles with class intervals as bases and corresponding frequencies
as heights. Each class has lower and upper values. This gives us two equal vertical lines
representing the frequencies. The upper ends of the lines are joined together and this
process will give us rectangles.
Note
Differences between a Bar graph and a Histogram

Bar graph Histogram
1 Used for Ungrouped data Used for Grouped data
2 Gap between the bars No gap between rectangles
3 Height of each bar is important and Height and width of each rectangle are
not its width equally important

www.tntextbooks.in
6.4.1 (i) Construction of a histogram for continuous frequency distribution:
Example 6.6
Draw a histogram for the following table which represents the age groups from 100
people in a village.
Ages 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90
Number of people 11 9 8 20 25 10 8 6 3
Solution:
The given data is a continuous Y Scale : On the X axis 1 cm = 10 years
On the Y axis 1 cm = 2 people
frequency distribution. The class intervals 26
25
are drawn on x-axis and their respective 24
frequencies on y-axis. Classes (ages) and its 22
frequencies (number of people) are taken 20

20
together to form a rectangle. 18
The histogram is constructed as given below. 16
14
No. of people
12
Note 11
10
10
9
8 8
8
If class intervals do not start from 6
6
‘0’ then, it is indicated by drawing a
kink (Zig-Zag) mark ( ) on the 4
3
x-axis near the origin. If necessary, 2
the kink mark ( ) may be made

X' −10 O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 X
on y-axis or on both the axes. i.e it −2 Ages
indicates that we do not have data Y'
starting from the origin (O)
6.4.1 (ii) Construction of histogram for discontinuous frequency distribution:

Example 6.7
The following table gives the number of literate females in the age group 10 to 45 years
in a town.
Age group 10-15 16-21 22-27 28-33 34-39 40-45

No. of females 350 920 850 480 230 200
Draw a histogram to represent the above data
Statistics 223

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution: Y Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 6 years

Y axis 1 cm = 100 Females
1000
The given distribution is discontinuous. If we 920
900
represent the given data as it is by a graph we shall 850
800
get a bar graph, as there will be gaps in between the
700
classes. So, convert this into a continuous distribution 600
No. of Females
using the adjustment factor 0.5. 500 450
400
The first class interval can be written as 9.5-15.5 350
300
and the remaining class intervals are changed in the 200
230
200
same way. There are no changes in frequencies. 100
The new continuous frequency table is

X' −9.5 O X
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
5
9.
15
21
27
33
39
45
−100
Age group
Y'
Age group 9.5-15.5 15.5-21.5 21.5-27.5 27.5-33.5 33.5-39.5 39.5-45.5

No of females 350 920 830 480 230 200
Example 6.8
Observe the given histogram and answer the following questions
Hint: Under weight: less than 30 kg; Normal weight: 30 to 45 kg; Obese: More than 45 kg
1. What information does the histogram represent?
Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 5 kg
2. Which group has maximum number of Y
Y axis 1 cm = 2 Students
14
students?
12
3. How many of them are under weight?
10
9
4. How many students are obese?
No. of students
8
7
5. How many students are in the weight group of 6
6
5
30-40 kg? 4
3
Solution: 2
2
1. The histogram represents the collection of

X' −5 O 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 X
weight from std VIII. −2 weight (kg) of students of std VIII
2. There are maximum 9 students in 30-35 kg Y'
weight.
3. There are 7 (= 2 + 5) students who are under weight.
4. There are 3 students who are obese.
5. There are 16(= 9 + 7) students in the 30-40 kg weight group.

www.tntextbooks.in
6.4.2 Frequency Polygon

A frequency polygon is a line graph for the graphical representation of the frequency
distribution. If we mark the midpoints on the top of the rectangles in a histogram and join
them by straight lines, the figure so formed is called a frequency polygon. It is called a polygon
as it consists of a number of lines as the sides of a polygon.
A frequency polygon is useful in comparing two or more frequency distributions.
A frequency polygon for a grouped frequency distribution can be constructed in two ways.
i) Using a histogram
ii) Without using a histogram
6.4.2 (i) To construct a frequency polygon using a histogram:
1. Draw a histogram from the given data.
2. Join the consecutive midpoints of the upper sides of the adjacent rectangles of the
histogram by the line segments.
3. It is assumed that the class interval preceding the first rectangle and the class
interval succeeding the last rectangle exists in the histogram and the frequency of
each extreme class interval is zero. These class intervals are known as imagined class
intervals.
4. To get frequency polygon, join the midpoints of these imagined classes with the
corresponding midpoints of the upper sides of the first and last rectangles of the
histogram.
Example 6.9
The following is the distribution of time spent in the library by students in a school.
Time spent (in minutes) 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90
Number of Students 25 40 33 28 30 20 16 8
Draw a frequency polygon using histogram.
Solution: Y Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 10 minute
Y axis 1 cm = 5 Students
Represent the time spent in the library 45
40
along x- axis and number of students along 40
the y–axis. 35
33
28 30
30
Draw a histogram for the given data.
No. of students
25
25
Now, mark the midpoints of the upper sides 20
20
of the consecutive rectangles. Also mark the 16
15
midpoints of two imagined class intervals
10 8
0-10 and 90-100 whose frequency is 0 on
5
x- axis. Now, join all the midpoints with the
help of ruler. We get a frequency polygon X' −10
O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 X
−5 Time Spent in the Library
imposed on the histogram.
Y'
Statistics 225

www.tntextbooks.in
Note
Sometimes imagined class intervals do not exist. For example, in case of marks obtained
by the students in a test, we cannot go below zero and beyond maximum marks on the two
sides. In such cases, the extreme line segments meet at the mid points of the vertical left and
right sides of first and last rectangles respectively.
Example 6.10
Draw a frequency polygon for the following data using histogram.
Marks 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
Number of
5 8 10 18 25 22 20 13 6 3
students
Solution: Y Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 10 marks
Mark the class intervals along the x-axis 28
and the number of students along the y-axis . 26 25
Draw a histogram for the given data and mark 24

22
the midpoints of the rectangles and join them 22
by lines. We get frequency polygon. Note 20

20
that the first and last edges of the frequency 18

18
polygon meet at the mid points of the left and 16
right vertical edges of first and last rectangles.

No. of students
14
Because imagined class intervals do not exist 12
12
in the marks (refer the above note). 10

10
8
6.4.2 (ii) To draw a frequency polygon 8
6
without using a histogram: 6
5
4
(1) Find the midpoints of the class 3
intervals and tabulate it. 2
(2)
Mark the midpoints of the X' −10 O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 X
−2 Marks
class intervals on x-axis and
Y'
frequencies on y-axis.
(3) Plot the points corresponding to the frequencies at each midpoints.
(4) Join the points using a ruler, to get the frequency polygon.
Example 6.11
Draw a frequency polygon for the following data without using histogram.
Class interval (Marks) 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90
Frequency 4 6 8 12 10 14 5 7

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
Find the midpoint of the class intervals and tabulate it.
Class interval ( C.I) Mid point (x) Frequency (f)
10 – 20 15 4
20 – 30 25 6
30 – 40 35 8
40 – 50 45 12
50 – 60 55 10
60 – 70 65 14
70 – 80 75 5
80 – 90 85 7
The points are A(5,0) B(15,4) C(25,6) Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 10 marks

D(35,8) E(45,12) F(55,10) G(65,14) H(75,5) 16
G
I(85,7) J(95,0). 14
E
In the graph sheet, mark the midpoints 12
along the x- axis and the frequency along 10

F
the y- axis. D
Frequency
8
I
We take the imagined class as 0 – 10 at 6
C
the beginning and 90 – 100 at the end , each 4

B H
with frequency ‘zero’. 2
From the table, plot the points. We A J

X' −10 O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 X
draw the line segments AB, BC, CD, DE, −2 Marks
EF, FG, GH, HI, IJ to obtain the required Y'
frequency polygon ABCDEFGHIJ.
Exercise 6.2
1. Which of the following data can be represented in a histogram?
(i) The number of mountain climbers in the age group 20 to 60 in TamilNadu.
(ii) Production of cycles in different years.
(iii) The number of students in each class of a school.
(iv) The number votes polled from 7 am to 6 pm in an election.
(v) The wickets fallen from 1 over to 50th over in a one day cricket match.

(i) The total area of the histogram is ________ to the total frequency of the given data.
(ii) A graph that displays data that changes continuously over the periods of time is _____.
(iii) Histogram is a graphical representation of ___________ data.
Statistics 227

www.tntextbooks.in
3. In a village, there are 570 people who have cell Y Scale : In X axis 1 cm = 1hour
Y axis 1 cm = 100 people
phones. An NGO survey their cell phone usage. 600
Based on this survey a histogram is drawn. Answer 400

400
No. of people
the following questions. 300
220
(i) How many people use the cell phone for less 200 180
110
than 3 hours? 100
100
50
(ii) How many of them use the cell phone for more
X' −1 O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X
than 5 hours? −100 Hours
(iii) Are people using cell phone for less than 1 Y'
hour?
4. Draw a histogram for the following data.
Class Interval 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60
No. of students 5 15 23 20 10 7
5. Construct a histogram from the following distribution of total marks of 40 students in a

class.
Marks 90-110 110-130 130-150 150-170 170-190 190-210
No. of Students 9 5 10 7 4 6
6. The distribution of heights ( in cm ) of 100 people is given below. Construct a histogram and
the frequency polygon imposed on it.
Height (in cm) 125-135 136-146 147-157 158-168 169-179 180-190 191-201
Frequency 12 22 18 24 15 7 2
7. In a study of dental problem, the following data were obtained.
Ages 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80

No. of patients 5 13 25 14 30 35 43 50
Represent the above data by a frequency polygon.
8. The marks obtained by 50 students in Mathematics are given below (i) Make a frequency
distribution table taking a class size of 10 marks (ii) Draw a histogram and a frequency
polygon.
52 33 56 52 44 59 47 61 49 61
47 52 67 39 89 57 64 58 63 65
32 64 50 54 42 48 22 37 59 63
36 35 48 48 55 62 74 43 41 51
08 71 30 18 43 28 20 40 58 49

www.tntextbooks.in

9. Data is a collection of ________
(A) numbers (B) words (C) measurements (D) all the three
10. The number of times an observation occurs in the given data is called ________
(A) tally marks (B) data (C) frequency (D) none of these
11. The difference between the largest value and the smallest value of the given data is ________
(A) range (B) frequency (C) variable (D) none of these
12. The data that can take values between a certain range is called________
(A) ungrouped (B) grouped (C) frequency (D) none of these
13. Inclusive series is a ________series.
(A) continuous (B) discontinuous (C) both (D) none of these
14. In a class interval the upper limit of one class is the lower limit of the other class. This is
________series.
(A) Inclusive (B) exclusive (C) ungrouped (D) none of these
15. The graphical representation of ungrouped data is ________
(A) histogram (B) frequency polygon (C)pie chart (D) all the three
16. Histogram is a graph of a ________ frequency distribution.
(A) continuous (B) discontinuous (C) discrete (D) none of these
17. A ________ is a line graph for the graphical representation of the continuous frequency
distribution.
(A) frequency polygon (B) histogram (C) pie chart (D) bar graph
18. The graphical representation of grouped data is ________
(A) bar graph (B) pictograph (C) pie chart (D) histogram
Exercise 6.3

1. Draw a pie chart for the given table.
Continent Asia Africa North America South America Europe Australia Antarctica
Area 30 % 20 % 16 % 12 % 7% 6% 9%
2. The data on modes of transport used by the students to come to school are given below.
Draw a pie chart for the data.
Mode of transport Bus Cycle Walking Scooter Car

Percentage of 40 % 30 % 15 % 10 % 5%
students
Statistics 229

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Draw a histogram for the given frequency distribution.

Age 41-45 46-50 51-55 56-60 61-65 66-70 71-75
Frequency 4 9 17 25 15 8 2
4. Draw a histogram and the frequency polygon in the same diagram to represent the
following data.
Weight (in kg) 50-55 56-61 62-67 68-73 74-79 80-85 86-91
No.of persons 15 8 12 17 9 10 6
5. Form a continuous frequency distribution table and draw histogram from the following data.
Age (in years) No. of persons
Under 5 1
Under 10 12
Under 15 19
Under 20 26
Under 25 27
Under 30 35
Under 35 38
Under 40 45
Under 45 48
Under 50 53
6. A rupee spent in a cloth manufacturing company is distributed as follows. Represent this in
a pie chart.
Particulars Paise
Farmer 20
Spinner 35
Dyer 15
Weaver 15
Printer 05
Salary 10
7. Draw a histogram for the following data.

Mid Value (x) 15 25 35 45 55 65 75
Frequency (f) 12 24 30 18 26 10 8

www.tntextbooks.in
SUMMARY
zz Data is a collection of facts such as numbers, words, measurements and
observations.
zz A frequency distribution is the arrangement of the given data in the form of the table
showing frequency with which each variable occurs.
zz In the class-intervals, if the upper limit and lower limit are included in that class
interval then it is called inclusive series.
zz In the class intervals, if the upper limit of one class interval is the lower limit of the
next class interval then it is called exclusive series.
zz A pie chart is a circular graph which shows the total value with its components.
zz A histogram is a graph of a continuous frequency distribution.
zz A frequency polygon is a line graph for the graphical representation of the frequency
distribution.
ICT CORNER
Step-1 Open the Browser type the URL Link given below Expected Outcome
(or) Scan the QR Code. GeoGebra work sheet named
“8th Standard III term” will open. Select the work
sheet named “PIE CHART”
Step-2 Type your values in the check box on right side. You
can observe the change in the pie chart. Click on the
check boxes to see respective calculations.
Step 1 Step 2
Browse in the link

Statistics:
Statistics 231

www.tntextbooks.in
INFORMATION
7 PROCESSING
Learning Objectives
To determine the number of possible orderings of an arbitrary number of objects

following certain procedures.
To learn a SET game for developing logical thinking .
To investigate the role of map colouring in representing and modelling of mathematical
ideas.
To observe the Fibonacci pattern in physical and biological phenomena.
To choose the best method in finding the HCF of numbers.
To understand how information can be processed in, encryption and decryption.
To consider alternatives in shopping before making a purchase, calculate the unit price
for each items and make purchase in limited budget.
To understand how to pack things efficiently in a given space and find the optimal solution.
Recap
Before to learn, we recall the concepts like listing, counting, pattern of Fibonacci
series and calculate the unit price of the products by answering the following questions
1. Find the number of all possible triangles that can be formed from the triangle given below.
A
D E
F Ans:____________
B C
2. Use the numbers given in the figure to form a 3 x 3 magic square.
13
Ans:
15 7
17 9 1
11 3

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Convert the tree diagram into a numeric expression.

+
× ×
Ans:____________
10 5 9 4
4. (i) Find the total time taken by the bus to reach from A to E via B , C and D.
(ii) Find which is the shortest route from A to E.
8hr
A C E (i) .......................hrs.
5hr 3hr
7hr D 6hr
(ii) A → ... → ... → E
B 4hr
5. Connect the Fibonacci squares through diagonals by curve from corner to corner
across each square to draw a Golden Spiral.
5 5
8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3
2 2 2 2
FIBONACCI SQUARES
6. W
hen you plan to buy a shirt, one shop offers a discount of `200 on MRP `1000 and
another shop offers 15% discount on the same MRP. Where would you buy?
7. Amazing park is offers a package deal of 5 entrance passes for `130. If one entrance
pass normally costs `30, how much will you save by taking advantage of this special
deal?
7.1 Introduction
Success in Mathematics depends on the development of the number sense, logical
thinking and cognitive skills. In this class, we find practical solutions for day to day
life situations like selection procedures from various forms, colour the given map with
minimum number of colours. We are also going to see Fibonacci number pattern in physical
and biological phenomena and also discuss some cipher for the higher order thinking
which is to do well in the competitive exams. We will also discuss how will you be a wise
consumer while shopping and packing. Meanwhile we will play a game to support your
mind blooming activities. All the above discussions are very helpful to you, to explore
other chapters and improve your interest in Mathematics.
Information Processing 233

www.tntextbooks.in
MATHEMATICS ALIVE - INFORMATION PROCESSING IN REAL LIFE
Biological example for the Fibonacci Mason packing bricks for constructing
numbers a wall between two pillars
7.2 Principles of Counting

There are some basic counting techniques which will be useful in determining the
number through different ways of arranging or selecting objects. The basic counting
principles are given below.
7.2.1 Addition principle
If there are two selections such that they can be done independently in m ways and n
ways respectively, then either of the two selections can be done in (m + n) ways.
Let us learn about this addition principle of counting as given below :
Situation:
In class VIII, there are 16 boys and 9 girls.
The teacher wants to select either a boy or a
girl as the class leader. Let us see, in how many
ways can the teacher select the class leader.
The teacher can select the class leader in
any one of the following ways.
(i) In the first choice, the teacher can
Fig. 7.1
select a boy among 16 boys in 16 ways
(who ever may be of the 16 boys).
(ii) In the second choice, the teacher can select a girl among 9 girls in 9 ways
(who ever may be of the 9 girls).
Hence, the teacher can select the class leader who is a boy or a girl in 25 different
ways (16 boys + 9 girls).
Thus, we come to know, if a selection A can occur in m ways and another selection
B can occur in n ways, and suppose that both cannot occur together, then A or B can
occur in (m + n) ways. Let us see an example.

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 7.1
If you are going to a hotel to have food and the hotel offers different food items as
shown in Fig 7.2. Find how many ways are possible to have either tiffin or meals?
Tiffin Meals
Fig. 7.2
Solution:
From the above Fig. 7.2, we come to know
(i) For tiffin, we can choose one among 7 items in 7 ways
(ii) For meals, we can choose one among 9 items in 9 ways.
Therefore, there are 16 (7 tiffin items + 9 meals items) different ways by which we
can choose any one food.
7.2.2 Multiplication principle
If a selection can be performed in m ways, following which another selection can be
performed in n ways, and both the selections are dependent on each other then, the two
selections together can be performed in exactly (m × n) different ways.
Now, we shall learn about multiplication principle of counting from the following
situation.
Situation:
There are 3 places in a city namely A,B and C. There are 3 routes a1, a2 and a3 from A
to B. There are 2 different routes, b1 and b2 from B to C as shown in the Fig 7.3.
a1 b1
a2
A B C
a3 b2
Fig. 7.3
Suppose a person wants to travel from A to C via B. Lets us see the number of ways he
can go from place A to C via B.
(i) In the first way, he can go from A b1
C (a1, b1)
to B in 3 routes and B
b2 C (a1, b2)
a1
(ii) In the second way, he can go from a2
b1 C (a2, b1) 6
A B possible
B to C in 2 different routes. a3 b2 C (a2, b2) ways
Therefore, the total number of B
b1 C (a3, b1)
ways in which he can travel is 6 (3 × 2) b2 C (a3, b2)
routes as shown in Fig 7.4.
Fig. 7.4

www.tntextbooks.in
Thus, we come to know, if a selection A can occur in m ways and another selection B
can occur in n ways, and both the selections are dependent on each other then, the two
selections can be performed in exactly (m × n) different ways. Let as learn more about
from the following examples.
Example 7.2 `
Praveen bought 3 shirts, 2 jeans and 3 pairs of shoes for

his birthday. In Fig. 7.5 shows the different ways of wearing the
dress. In how many different ways can Praveen wear a dress on his
birthday?
Fig. 7.5
Solution:
Here, Praveen has 3 shirts , 2 jeans and 3 pairs of shoes.
He can wear a dress either this
way or he can have the choices as shown in the Fig. 7.6

`s

3 shirts × 2 jeans × 3 pairs of shoes = 18 ways

Fig. 7.6
Therefore, Praveen can wear his dress in 18 (3×2×3) different possible ways on his
birthday.
Example 7.3
In class VIII, a math club has four members M,A,T and H. Find the number of
different ways, the club can elect
(i) a leader,
(ii) a leader and an assistant leader.
Solution:
(i) To elect a leader
In class VIII, a math club has four members namely M, A, T and H.
Therefore, there are 4 (4 × 1) different ways by which they can be elected a leader.

www.tntextbooks.in
(ii) To elect a leader and an assistant leader

In the Fig. 7.7, the red shaded boxes show
that same member comes twice. As, one person
cannot have two leadership, therefore, the red
shaded boxes cannot be counted. So there are only
12 ((4 × 1 × 4) – 4) different ways (shown in yellow
boxes and green boxes) to choose a leader and an
assistant leader for the math club. (1 (M or A or T or H) × 4 (Leader) × 4 (Assistant
Leader)) – 4 (Leader and Assistant Leader) = 12 ways
Fig. 7.7
Activity
1. Determine the number of two digit numbers that can be formed using the digits
1, 3 and 5 with repetition of digits allowed. One's Digit
The activity consists of two parts 1 3 5
(i) Choose a one's digit. 1 15
Ten's
(ii) Choose a ten's digit. 3 33
Digit
Complete the table given beside 5 51
2. Find the three digit numbers that can be formed using the digits
1, 3 and 5 without repetition of digits.
Complete the tree diagram given below to the numbers
135
3
1
Using 1 5 315 Total
1,3 and 5 Possibilities
5 1
5
531
A password using 6 characters is created where the first 2 characters are any of
the alphabets, the third character is any one special character like @, #, $, %, &, _,+,~,
* or - and the last 3 characters are any of the numbers from 0 to 9. For that, there are
26 × 26 × 10 × 10 × 10 × 10 = 67,60,000 number of different ways possible to create that
password.

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 7.4
In how many ways, can the students answer 3 true or false type questions in a slip
test?
Number of ways of answering the questions
Solution: Questions
(i) Assuming that the question Q1 is answered
Q1 Q2 Q3
True, questions Q2 and Q3 can be answered as TT, TF,
T/F T/F T/F
FT and FF in 4 ways. Answer1 T T T
(ii) Assuming that the question Q1 is answered Answer2 T T F
False, Q2 and Q3 can also be answered as TT, TF, FT, Answer3 T F T

Answer4 T F F
and FF in 4 ways.
Answer5 F T T
Thus, as each question has only two options Answer6 F T F
(True or False) in 2 ways, the number of ways of Answer7 F F T
answering these 3 questions in a slip test is Answer8 F F F
8 (2 x 2 x 2) possible ways as shown in Fig. 7.8. [(1 (Q1) × 2 (T/F)) × (1 (Q2) × 2 (T/F))
× (1 (Q3) × 2 (T/F))] = 8 ways
Example 7.5 Fig. 7.8
Madhan wants to a buy a new car. The following choices are available for him.
• There are 2 types of cars as shown in the Fig. 7.9
• There are 5 colours available in each type as shown in Fig. 7.9.
• There are 3 models available in each colour
(i) GL (standard model)
(ii) SS (sports model)
(iii) SL (luxury model)
Type 1 Type 2
GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL
Fig. 7.9
(i) In how many different ways can Madhan buy any one of the new car?
(ii) If the white colour is not available in Type 2, then in how many ways can Madan
buy a new car among the given option?

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
(i) To buy any one of the new car from the given choices
Type 1 Type 2
GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL
1 (Type) × 5 (colours) × 3 (models) = 15 choices 1 (Type) × 5 (colours) × 3 (models) = 15 choices
Fig. 7.10
Here, we have 2 types of car with 5 different colours and 3 models in each colour.
Therefore, there are 30 [2 (1 × 5 × 3)] different ways to buy a new car by Madhan.
(ii) If the white colour is not available in Type 2, then...
Type 1 Type 2
GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL GL SS SL
1 (Type) × 5 (colours) × 3 (models) = 15 choices 1 (Type) × 4 (colours) × 3 (models) = 12 choices

Fig. 7.11
(i) For Type 1, we have 5 colours and 3 models and hence there are 1 × 5 × 3 = 15 choices.
(ii) For Type 2, we have only 4 colours and 3 models and hence there are 1 × 4 × 3 = 12 choices.
Therefore, there are 27 (15 + 12) different ways to buy a new car by Madhan
The above example illustrates both the addition and multiplication principles.
7.3 SET - Game
Any game that uses features can be used to stimulate logical thinking and it provides
an interesting and challenging context for exploring ideas in discrete mathematics.
Now, let us learn about a SET game
A SET game proves to be an excellent extension for activities that involve organizing the
objects by attributes. The SET game builds the cognitive, logical, spatial reasoning as well as
visual perception skills.
The SET game is a puzzle that uses cards which have four features on them. They are
shapes, colours, shades and the number of shapes.

www.tntextbooks.in
A full deck of SET cards
Fig. 7.12
Outlined
Outlined
Outlined
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
Solid
Solid
Solid

www.tntextbooks.in
In one full deck of SET cards, there are 3 different shapes: circle, star, square and in
3 different colours: red, green, blue. 3 Each of these 9 cards (3 shapes × 3 colours) have 3
different shades: solid, outlined, spiral and also they can be paired 3 with different numbers:
one, two and three. So there are totally 81 cards (3 shapes × 3 colours × 3 shades × 3numbers)
in the deck as shown in Fig. 7.12.
A SET which consists of three cards should satisfy all the four following conditions:
(i) All the three cards have the same shape or have three different shapes.
(ii) All the three cards have the same colour or have three different colours.
(iii) All the three cards have the same shade or have three different shades.
(iv) All the three cards have the same number or have three different numbers.
Situation:
The teacher displays 12 cards as shown in Fig. 7.13 and explains how to form a SET
using these 2 cards and taken from them. Now, follow the step by step
procedure to figure out the third card to complete this SET is as follows.
Fig. 7.13
Remember, a SET consists of 3 set of cards.
STEP 1: If you look at the shape then, one is star and the other one is also star.
These two cards have the same shape. So, the last card also should have the same shape.
STEP 2: If you look at the colour then, one is green and the other is red
These two cards have different colours. So, the last card also should have a different
colour that is blue.
STEP 3: If you look at the shade then, one is solid and the other is also solid .
These two cards have the same shade. So, the last card also should have the same shade.
STEP 4: If you look at the number then, one star card is green solid and the
other has two star red solid cards . So, the last card also should have a different
number three blue cards. Therefore these three set of cards have different
numbers and different colours with same shape and shade.

www.tntextbooks.in
Finally,
Shape : All same  Colour : All different

Shade : All same  Number : All different 
Now, this completes the rules for a SET.
Now, the teacher asks the students to find two more SETs from Fig.7.13. Let us check
the SET again.
1. Think
Shape : All same  Colour : All same  For the given
Shade : All different  Number : All same  set of 12 cards from
Yes, This is a SET. Fig.7.13 7 SETs are
possible. Explore.
2. (repetition of cards
allowed).
Shape : All different  Colour : All different 
Shade : All different  Number : All different 
Yes, This is a SET.
Again , the teacher makes an arrangement of cards and asks them to check whether,
it forms a SET?
3.
Shape : All same or all different  Colour : All same or all different 
Shade : All same or all different  Number : All same or all different 
No, this is not a SET.
Since, the above SET does not complete the SET rule.
Thus,we come to know a SET consists of 3 set of cards in which each individual feature
is either all same on each card or all different on each card.
Activity
Choose the correct card to complete the perfect SET. One is done for you.
l. ?
Ans:
(i) (ii) (iii)
2. ?
(i) (ii) (iii)

www.tntextbooks.in
3. ?
(i) (ii) (iii)
4. ?
(i) (ii) (iii)
5. ?
(i) (ii) (iii)
Try these
ind any five SETs among these set of
1. F 2. This is an example for a
cards (repetition of cards allowed). magic square in SETs. Can
you make another two?
7.4 Map Colouring

Map colouring is the act of assigning different colours to different features on a map. In
Mathematics, the problem is to determine the minimum number of colours required to colour
a map,so that no two adjacent regions have the same colour. Let us learn about the role of map
colouring.
Situation:
The teacher divides the class into two groups and instructs one group to use as
many colours possible and another group use minimum number of colours for the given
patterns.
The only rule is that, shaded regions cannot share the same colour at edges, although
they are allowed to meet at a corner.

www.tntextbooks.in
1. 2. 3.
Fig. 7.14
Fig. 7.15 , shows how each group is coloured
Using maximum colours
Group
Group -- II
1.
1. 2.
2. 3.
3.
99 Colours
Colours 88 Colours
Colours 21
21 Colours
Colours
Using minimum colours
Group
Group -- IIII
1.
1. 2.
2. 3.
3.
22 Colours
Colours 33 Colours
Colours 44 Colours
Colours
Fig. 7.15
From this investigation, we will get results. Which could be more interesting , if we
want to colour a map.
Map colouring is about the colours that must be chosen for regions in a map, which
make bordering regions with different colours. Let us learn more from the following examples.
Example 7.6
Colour a map of South India (Fig. 7.16) with the fewest number of colours.
Solution:
This is one of the solutions

with minimum number
of colours . Try for more Fig. 7.16
Not to Scale
solutions.
Fig. 7.17

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
Try to colour the INDIA-States map with the fewest number of colours.
N
L
A W E
D
A
K S
H
GOA
Minimum number of
colours required = _________ Anda
Lakshad weep is la
an and nico m
(I NDIA)
( I ND I A
ba
nd
)
ri
s
sl
ds
an
Not to Scale
Fig. 7.18
Try these
Draw your school building map showing the HM room, class rooms, staff room,
science lab, PET room, computer lab, office room etc., and use map colouring to detetermine
the minimum number of colours that can be used to colour the map of your school.
Exercise 7.1
1. You want to have an ice cream or a cake. There are three flavours
(chocolate, strawberry and vanilla) in ice creams, and two flavours
(orange and red velvet) in the cakes. In how many possible ways can
you choose an ice cream or a cake?
2. Shanthi has 5 chudithar sets and 4 frocks. In how many possible
ways, can she wear either a chudithar or a frock ?
245 8th Standard Mathematics Information Processing 245

www.tntextbooks.in
3. In a Higher Secondary School, the following groups are available in XI standard

I. Science Group:
(i) Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Mathematics
(ii) Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics and Computer Science
(iii) Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Home Science
II. Arts Group:

(i) Accountancy, Commerce, Economics and Business Maths
(ii) Accountancy, Commerce, Economics and Computer Science
(iii) History, Geography, Economics and Commerce
III. Vocational Group:

(i) Biology, Nursing Theory, Nursing Practical I and Nursing Practical II
(ii) Home Science, Textiles and Dress Designing Theory, Textiles and Dress
Designing Practical I and Textiles and Dress Designing Practical II
In how many possible ways, can a student choose a group?
4. If you have 2 school bags and 3 water bottles then, in how many different ways can
you choose each one of them, while going to school ?
5. Roll numbers are created with a letter followed by 3 digits in it, from the letters
A, B, C, D and E and any 3 digits from 0 to 9. In how many possible ways can the roll
numbers be generated? (except A000, B000, C000, D000 and E000)
6. A safety locker in a jewel shop requires a 4 digit unique code. The
code has the digits from 0 to 9. How many unique codes are possible ?
7. An examination paper has 3 sections, each with five questions and
students are instructed to answer one question from each section. In how many
different ways of can the questions be answered?
8. The given spinner is spun twice and the two numbers got are used
to form a 2 digit number. How many different 2 digits numbers are
possible?
9. R amya wants to paint a pattern in her

living room wall with minimum budget.
Help her to colour the pattern with
2 colours but make sure that no two
adjacent boxes are the same colour. The
pattern is shown in the picture.

www.tntextbooks.in
10. C olour the regions in the maps with few

colours as possible but make sure that no two
adjacent countries are of the same colour.

11. In a class there are 26 boys and 15 girls. The teacher wants to select a boy or a girl to
represent a quiz competition. In how many ways can the teacher make this selection?
(A) 41 (B) 26 (C) 15 (D) 390
12. How many outcomes can you get when you toss three coins once?
(A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 3 (D) 2
13. In how many ways can you answer 3 multiple choice questions, with the choices
A,B,C and D?
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 12 (D) 64
14. How many 2 digit numbers contain the number 7 ?
(A) 10 (B) 18 (C) 19 (D) 20
7.5 Fibonacci Numbers
We have learnt in earlier classes, on how all beautiful things in nature as well as man made
things are connected with Mathematics. Now, we just refresh everyone’s memory and show
how Math can be beautiful when seen in physical and biological things everywhere around us.
Fibonacci (real name Leonardo Bonacci) was an Italian mathematician who developed
the Fibonacci Sequence. Remember the pattern of the Fibonacci sequence we already studied
in standard VI it looks like this: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34... and it goes on.
Let us tabulate the Fibonacci sequence and find a rule.
Term (n) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...
F (n) 1 1 2 3 5 8 13 21 34 55 89 144 233 377 610 ...
We observe that the 3rd term of the Fibonacci sequence F(1) F(2) F(3) F(4) F(5) F(6) F(7) ...
is the sum of 2nd term and the 1st term. 1 1 2 3 5 8 13 ...
That is, F(3) = F(2) + F(1) and so we can extend + =
F(3) = F(2)+F(1)
and write the rule is
F(n)= F(n–1) + F(n–2)
where F(n) is the nth term
F(n–1) is the previous term to the nth term
F(n–2) is the term before the (n–1)th term
This is how the Fibonacci Sequence is obtained. Let us learn more from the following real life
examples.

www.tntextbooks.in
Situation:
Let us look at the family tree of a male drone bee and a female bee as shown Fig 7.19.
Here, female bees have 2 parents, male (drone) bees have just one parent, a female. (Male bee
(drone) are produced by the queen’s unfertilized eggs, so male(drone) bees only have a mother
but no father!)
Great- Great
E Grandparents
Male Female Female Male Female
Great
D Grandparents
Female Male Female
C Grandparents
Male Female
B Parent
Female
A
Male
Fig. 7.19
From the picture the following points are noted:
1. The male A has 1 parent, a female B .
2. The male A has 2 grandparents C , since his mother had parents C , a male and a female.
3. The male A has 3 great-grandparents D : since his grandmother has two parents but his
grandfather has only one.
Now, answer, how many great-great-grandparents did the male A have?
Let us try to find the relationship among the pattern of bees family by representing in the
tabular form given below,
Great Great- Great Great- Great-Great
Number of Parents Grandparents
Grandparents Grandparents Grandparents
A B C
D E F
a Male bee (1) 1 2 3 5 8
a Female bee (1) 2 3 5 8 13
We see the Fibonacci numbers 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13… in the above table.

www.tntextbooks.in
Note
The difference between two consecutive numbers of the Fibonacci sequence
increase very quickly. ((For example F(5) – F(4) = 5 – 3 = 2 ; F(10) – F(9) = 55 – 34 = 21 ;
F(15) – F(14) = 610 – 377 = 233)(1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, 144, 233, 377, 610, 987, 1597,
2584, 4181, 6765, 10946 ...))
Example 7.7
Given that one pair of new born rabbits they produce a new pair each month and from
the second month, each new pair can breed themselves. Find how many pairs of rabbits
are bred from one pair in a year, and find the relationship between the number of months
and the number of pairs of rabbits by tabulation (a pair means (a male and a female)).
Solution:
The below picture clearly forms the sequence is 1,1,2,3,5,8... Here, we find the pattern
in which each number is in the Fibonacci sequence, obtained by adding together with
previous two. Going on like this to find subsequent numbers at the twelfth month, we will
get 144 pairs of rabbits. In the other words, twelfth Fibonacci number is 144.
1st month
= 1(given new born pair)
2nd month
= 1(pair of adult)
3rd month
= 1(pair of adult)+
1(new born pair) = 2
4th month
= 2(pairs of adult)+
1(new born pair) = 3
5th month
2(new born pairs) = 5
6th month
3(new born pairs) = 8
Number of months 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Number of pairs of rabbits 1 1 2 3 5 8 13 21 34 55 89 144

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
Using the given Table I, find the pattern, answer the following questions and
colour the values in the given Table II. One is done for you.
Table I
Term(n) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...
F(n) 1 1 2 3 5 8 13 21 34 55 89 144 233 377 610

1. Where are the even Fibonacci Numbers? Colour both the term n and where
F(n) is even in yellow. Do you find any pattern? Every Third Fibonacci
number is a multiple of 2(even).
2. Where there are Fibonacci numbers which are multiple of 3 ?
Colour both the term n and where F(n) is multiple of 3 in red.
Write down the pattern you find
Every …………Fibonacci number is ……………………….
3. What about the multiple of 5? Colour both the term n and where F(n)
is multiple of 5 in blue. Write down the pattern you find.
Every ……………………………i.e. …………………………………
4. What about the multiple of 8? Colour both the term n where F(n) is multiple
of 8 in green. Write down the pattern you find.
Every ……………………………i.e. ……………………………………
Table II
Term(n) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...
F(n) 1 1 2 3 5 8 13 21 34 55 89 144 233 377 610

From the above activity, we conclude that
Every Fibonacci number is a factor of (a term number of) Fibonacci numbers in
miltiples.
n 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...
F(n) 2 3 5 8 13 21 34 55 89 144 233 377 610 ...
2=F(3)              Every 3rd Fib number
3=F(4)              Every 4th Fib number

Factors
5=F(5)              Every 5th Fib number
8=F(6)              Every 6th Fib number
F(k) Every Kth Fib number
From the above table, we get a general rule as Every kth Fibonacci number is a multiple of F(k).

www.tntextbooks.in
7.6 Highest Common Factor

We have learnt in class VI that iteration is a process wherein a set of instructions or
structures are repeated in a sequence for a specified number of times or until a condition
is met. Here, we are going to learn to find HCF by listing all factors and find the biggest,
then to find HCF by repeated subtraction and see to how much faster the iteration goes
(and how in fewer steps you get the HCF) and then how to improve further by repeated
division and remainder and that both lead to the same solution but one is faster than the
other.
We know that, HCF is used in simplifying or reducing fractions. To understand how this
concept applies in real life, imagine the following situation.
7.6.1 Methods to find HCF (Highest Common Factor):

1. Factorisation Method:
Situation:
Let us assume that you have 20 mangoes and 15 apples. You
want to donate them together equally among the orphan children.
How many orphan children can you help at the maximum?
Here, basically question demands finding HCF of two numbers.
HCF is Highest Common Factor, also known as GCD (Greatest
Common Divisor). HCF of two or more than two numbers is such
that, it is the largest possible number which divides given numbers completely.
Here, let us find the HCF of 20 mangoes and 15 apples.

Factors of 20 = 1,2,4, 5 ,10,20
Factors of 15 = 1,3, 5 ,15
So, the HCF of 20 and 15 is 5. That is, you can a help maximum of 5 orphan children.
So that for 5 children you can give 4 mangoes (20 ÷ 5 = 4) and 3 apples
(15 ÷ 5 = 3) to each of them. In this way you can distribute equally the mangoes
and the apples to each child.
2. Prime Factorisation Method:

Situation:
Suppose there are 18 students in Class VII and 27 in Class VIII and each class is divided
into teams to prepare for an upcoming sports tournament, with the winning teams from each
class play each other in the final. What would be the biggest possible team size that you could
divide both these classes such that each team has exactly the same number of students and that
no one is left behind.

www.tntextbooks.in
The problem here is to find the HCF of 18 and 27.
Prime Factors of 18 = 2 x 3 x 3
Prime Factors of 27 = 3 x 3 x 3
Common prime factors of 18 and 27 = 3 x 3 = 9
So, the HCF of 18 and 27 is 9.
Now, let us learn some more methods of finding the HCF. The largest team member each
group is 9, Std VII has 2 teams and Std VIII has 3 teams.
3. Repeated Division Method:
The above methods are easy to finding HCF, but for larger numbers these methods are
tedious to find factors of the given numbers. In that case, alternatively we have some more
methods to find HCF. Let us learn more about the other methods of finding the HCF.
For the above Situation, what if the Class VII had 396 students and Class VIII had 300
students? Then, what would be the biggest possible team size? Well, the above said two methods
may not help us quickly. So, we can use continuous division method for finding the highest
common factor.
STEP 1: Divide the larger number by the smaller number.
Dividend
Here, 360 is the larger number. So, we divide
360 (Dividend) by 300 (Divisor). We get the Divisor 300 396 1 Quotient
–300
Remainder as 96.
Remainder 96
STEP 2: The remainder from Step 1 becomes the
new divisor, and divisor of Step 1 becomes the new dividend.
Dividend
From the step 1, we got 96 as remainder.
So, in the second step 96 becomes the new divisor First 300 396 1
Divisor –300
and 300 becomes the new dividend.
New 96 300 3 New
Divisor –288 Dividend
STEP 3:
Repeat this division process till 12
remainder becomes zero. The divisor
of the last division (when remainder is zero) is the HCF.
From step 2, we got 12 as the new remainder which
300 396 1
will become the new divisor. In the third step 12 becomes the –300
new divisor and 96 becomes the new dividend. Now, the
remainder is zero when 12 is the last divisor of the division. 96 300 3
–288
Therefore,12 is the required HCF.
12 96 8
Hence, the HCF of 396 and 300 is 12. So each team –96
would be 12 students.
HCF 0

www.tntextbooks.in
4. Repeated Subtraction Method:

To find the HCF for the given two numbers say m and n we do the subtraction continuously
until m and n are equal. For example,
Find the HCF of 144 and 120
STEP 1: Check whether m = n
Here, take m = 144 and n = 120
Check whether m = n or m > n or m < n Here m > n (144 > 120).
STEP 2: m > n perform m – n repeat the process till m = n or m < n perform n – m repeat
the process till m = n
If m is greater than n, then we perform m – n and assign the result (the difference) as m.
Again we check whether m and n are equal or not and repeat the process. If m is less than n,
then we perform n – m and we assign the result (the difference) as n. Again we check whether
m and n are equal or not and the process is repeated.
Subtract 120(n) from 144(m) till m = n.
First 144 – 120 = 24 Repeat 120 – 24 = 96 Repeat 96 – 24 = 72
Repeat 72 – 24 = 48 Repeat 48 – 24 = 24 Repeat 24 – 24 = 0
STEP 3: When m and n values are equal then that equal value will be the HCF (m, n).
Now m = n, Hence, we conclude that the HCF of 144 and 120 is 24.
Comparing both the repeated division and repeated subtraction methods, in finding the
HCF, we can conclude that the repeated subtraction, in one way is easier and gives the HCF
faster that the repeated division and also that one would want to easily do subtraction rather
than division. Isn’t it ?
Exercise 7.2
1. Using repeated division method, find the HCF of the following:
(i) 455 and 26 (ii) 392 and 256 (iii) 6765 and 610 (iv) 184, 230 and 276
2. Using repeated subtraction method, find the HCF of the following:

(i) 42 and 70 (ii) 36 and 80 (iii) 280 and 420 (iv) 1014 and 654
3. Do the given problems by repeated subtraction method and verify the result.
(i) 56 and 12 (ii) 320, 120 and 95
12 56 4 120 320 2 40 95 2
–48 –240 –80
80 120 1 15 40 2
8 12 1 –80 –30
–8 40 80 2 10 15 2
4 8 2 –80 –10
–8 HCF 0 5 10 2
–10
0 0
HCF HCF

www.tntextbooks.in
4. Kalai wants to cut identical squares as big as she can, from a piece of paper measuring
168mm and by 196mm. What is the length of the side of the biggest square? (To find HCF
using repeated subtraction method)
5. What is the eleventh Fibonacci number?
(a) 55 (b) 77 (c) 89 (d) 144
6. If F(n) is a Fibonacci number and n =8, which of the following is true?
(a) F(8) = F(9)+F(10) (b) F(8) = F(7)+F(6) (c) F(8) = F(10)×F(9) (d) F(8) = F(7)–F(6)
7. Every 3rd number of the Fibonacci sequence is a multiple of _______
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 8
8. Every _______ number of the Fibonacci sequence is a multiple of 8
(a) 2nd (b) 4th (c) 6th (d) 8th
9. The difference between the 18th and 17th Fibonacci number is
(a) 233 (b) 377 (c) 610 (d) 987
10. Common prime factors of 30 and 250 are

(a) 2 x 5 (b) 3 x 5 (c) 2 x 3 x 5 (d) 5 x 5
11. Common prime factors of 36, 60 and 72 are

(a) 2 x 2 (b) 2 x 3 (c) 3 x 3 (d) 3 x 2 x 2
12. Two numbers are said to be co-prime numbers if their HCF is

(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 0 (d) 1
7.7 Cryptology
In today’s world, security in information is a fundamental necessity not only for military
and political departments but also for private communication. Today’s world of communication
has increased the importance of financial data exchange, image processing, biometrics and
e-commerce transaction which in turn has made data security an important issue. Cryptology
is defined as the science which is concerned with communication in secured form.
7.7.1 Cryptology – Some technical details
Plain text: The original message is called plain text.
Cipher text or Cipher number: The encrypted output (converted message
into code) is called Cipher text or Cipher number. Cipher text is written in
capital letters, while plain text is usually written in lowercase. A secret key is
to use something to generate the Cipher text from the plain text.
Encryption and Decryption: The process of converting the plain text to the Cipher text is
called encryption and the vice versa is called decryption.

www.tntextbooks.in
Let us try to create some Cipher text that we use in the form of coded message at some
point in our real life.
7.7.2 Examples of Cipher Code
1. Shifting Cypher Text
Ceasar Cipher
The Ceasar Cipher is one of the earliest known and simplest ciphers. It is a type of
substitution cipher in which each letter in the text is “shifted” a certain number of places
down the alphabets.
To pass an encrypted message from one person to another, it is first necessary that both
parties have the ‘key’ for the cipher, so that the sender may encrypt it and the receiver may
decrypt it. For the Caesar Cipher, the “key” is the number of characters to shift the cipher
alphabet. So, we have to know how big the switch is to break the code.
Let us know about more Ciphers from the following examples and situations.
Example 7.8
Use Ceasar Cipher table set +4 and try to solve the given secret sentence.
fvieo mr gshiw ger fi xvmgoc
Solution:
Let us make Ceasar Cipher table first. Here, we have to set to +4 table.
For that, we have to start letter e to set as A, f as B … likewise d as Z.
Now, the +4 Ceasar Cipher table looks like
Plain Text a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Cipher Text W X Y Z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V
The given plain text is

To crack this secret code, follow the steps given below.
Step 1: U
sing Ceasar Cipher table, let us first match the most repeated letters. This will help
us to progress faster.
f v i e o m r g s h i w g e r f i x v m g o c
B R E A K I N C E C A N B E R I C K

www.tntextbooks.in
Step 2: Then, let us find remaining letters to complete the code.

f v i e o m r g s h i w g e r f i x v m g o c
B R E A K I N C O D E S C A N B E T R I C K Y
Thus, the secret sentence is decoded as, BREAK IN CODES CAN BE TRICKY
2. Substituting Cypher Text
Each letter in a text is “substituted” by certain pictures and symbols, a key message, group
of words, letters or a combination of these can be used to encode or decode the information.
Let us learn more from the following situation.
Situation:
The teacher divides the class into two teams and displays a worksheet given in the figure
below for students to complete. Play a game, teams take turns suggesting letter substitutions and
someone entering your suggestions in the table. Teams earn points for correct letter guesses.
Worksheet 1 :- Additive Cipher [key = 5]

Convert a given plain text into Additive Cipher text (number) code.
“ mathematics is a unique symbolic language in which
the whole world works and acts accordingly.”
Tips for cracking additive ciphers:
Especially for additive Ciphers, you only need key number. You can complete the
cipher table by filling in the rest of the numbers in order.
If you can, find and make frequency table for alphabets, it is help you to get started.
Match the most repeated letters first and fill the Cipher number.
Look for familiar one-letter words like a or i. common two and three letter
words like of, to, in, it, at, the, and, for, you …..
Look for consecutive numbers in the Cipher text and match them with possible
consecutive letters in the plain text.
Now, to start converting a plain text into Cipher number, first we have to make a cipher
table as shown below. Here there key is 5. As per key number, we have to start and fill a = 05,
b = 06 …….. z = 04 respectively.
Numbers 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Cipher Numbers 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 00 01 02 03 04
To start encoding the text, let us count the frequency of alphabets and frame frequency
table as shown below.

www.tntextbooks.in
Frequency of
alphabets in 8 1 6 3 5 0 3 5 7 0 1 5 3 5 5 0 1 3 5 4 3 0 4 0 2 0
the plain text
With the help of Cipher table and frequency table, let us fill the Cipher numbers for the
plain text. Let us first match the most repeated letters (5 times and above), then 2 to 4 times
repeated letters and finally remaining letters step by step as shown in given figure.
Step 1:- Cipher number for most repeated letters(5 times and above)
Plain text m a t h e m a t i c s i s a u n i q u e s y m b o l i c
Cipher Numbers 05 1209 05 130723 1323 05 1813 09 23 19161307
Plain text l a n g u a g e i n w h i c h t h e w h o l e
Cipher Numbers 160518 05 09 1318 12130712 1209 12191609
Plain text w o r l d w o r k s a n d a c t s a c c o r d i n g l y
Cipher Numbers 19 16 19 23 0518 0507 23 05070719 1318 16
Step 2: Cipher number for most repeated letters (2 times and above)
Cipher Numbers 1705241209170524130723 1323 05 251813 2509 230317 19161307
Cipher Numbers 1605181124051109 1318 0112130712 241209 0112191609
Cipher Numbers 0119221608 011922 23 051808 05072423 0507071922081318111603
Step 3: Cipher numbers for non-repeated letters

Cipher Numbers 1705241209170524130723 1323 05 251813212509 2303170619161307
Cipher Numbers 1605181125051109 1318 0112130712 241209 0112191609
Cipher Numbers 0119221608 0119221523 051808 05072423 0507071922081318111603
Thus, the Additive Cipher text for plain text is as follows:

“17 05 24 12 09 17 05 24 13 07 23 13 23 05 25 18 13 21 25 09 23 03 17 06 19 16 13 07
16 05 18 11 25 05 11 09 13 08 01 12 13 07 12 24 12 09 01 12 19 16 09 01 19 22 16 08
01 19 22 15 23 05 18 08 05 07 24 23 05 07 07 19 22 08 13 18 11 16 03”

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity
TREASURE HUNT
Treasure in the Mathematics Club room
The teacher divides the students into four groups and gives each group a code and a
clue and then asks them to cracking the clues to find
(i) the identity of the treasure (ii) the place of the treasure
(iii) the room in which the treasure is present.
You may take notes on this piece of paper as you proceed through the search
Code 1: Pigpen
Message:- If you decode the clue here you can get the four expected treasure names
I. Fill in the blank boxes and decode
The Pigpen code looks like meaningless writing, but it is quite easy to catch on to.
Each letter is represented by the part of the “Pigpen” that surrounds it.
The first code uses the following key. To complete the code, you need to work out
how to use the key to decode the message.
A B C J K L S W
• • • •
D E F M N O T U X Y
• • • • •
G H I P Q R V Z
• • • •
= W A T E R B O T T L E
=
Code 2: Polybius Square Cipher

Message:- If you decode this you can get the clue to identify the name of the treasure name
II. Fill in the blanks
A Polybius Square is a table that allows someone to convert letters into numbers.
Use the Polybius square rows and column values to find the code
(4,2) (3,4) (5,5) (3,3) (1,5) (2,3) (5,5) (4,3) (1,4)
5 A B C D E
T H E O F
4 F G H I/J K
(4,2) (2,2) (5,5) (1,5) (3,2) (5,2) (2,2) (5,5) (4,5) (4,3) (5,5) (3,2)
3 L M N O P
2 Q R S T U D O E S
(3,3) (4,3) (4,2) (3,4) (1,5) (1,1) (5,5) ''(2,5)" (1,5) (3,3) (4,5) ''(4,5)"
1 V W X Y Z
1 2 3 4 5 A N D

www.tntextbooks.in
Code 3: Atbash Cipher

Message:- If you decode this you can get the clue room number where the treasure is present
(It may be 24 or 25 or 26 or 27 or 28 or 29 or 30)
III. Find the code using the key as shown in given figure:
Atbash cipher is a substitution cipher with just one specific key where all the letters
are reversed that is A to Z and Z to A.
Plain Text A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Cipher Text Z Y X W V U T S R Q P O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
GSV ILLN MFNYVI RH Z NFOGRKOV LU ULFI ZMW HVEVM
THE
.
Code 4: Using a Key – Reflection Table
Message:- If you decode this clue you can get the possible place where the treasure is
located (It used to sit)
Use the reflection table which is given below and find the correct word by using a reflected
alphabet.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
J V A Q B J - ____________
P B Z C H G R E G N O Y R - ____________
P U N V E - ____________
P H O O B N E Q - ____________
After finding the codes, the teacher then asks students to rearrange the clues one by one
CLUES
i. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
ii. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
iii. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
iv. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
RESULT
(i) The room in which the treasure took place :- ___________________.

(ii) The place of the treasure :- ____________________________________.
(iii) The identity of the treasure :- _______________________________.
(Hint:- If you answered the question number 6 in Exercise 4.3, you can compare and
verify your results) The gift voucher contains (20 full marks awarded).

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
1. Use Pigpen Cipher code and write the code for your name ________and your chapter
names
(i) LIFE MATHEMATICS (ii) ALGEBRA
(iii) GEOMETRY (iv) INFORMATION PROCESSING
2. Decode the following Shifting and Substituting secret codes given below. Which one is
easier for you?
(i) Shifting method:- M N S G H M F H R H L O N R R H A K D
(ii) Substituting method:-
3. Write a short message to a friend and get him to decipher it.(use either shifting or substituting
code method)
Exercise 7.3
1. Fill in the blanks (Use Atbash Cipher that is given in code 3)
(i) G Z N R O = _____________________________
(ii) V M T O R H S = _____________________________
(iii) N Z G S V N Z G R X H = _____________________________
(iv) H X R V M X V = _____________________________
(v) H L X R Z O H X R V M X V = _____________________________
2. Match the following ( a = 00……………. Z= 25).

(i) mathematics - (a) 18 20 01 19 17 00 02 19 08 14 13
(ii) addition - (b) 03 08 21 08 18 08 14 13
(iii) subtraction - (c) 12 00 19 07 04 12 0019 08 02 18
(iv) multiplication - (d) 00 03 03 08 19 08 14 13
(v) division - (e) 12 20 11 19 08 15 11 15 02 00 19 08 14 13
3. Frame Additive cipher table (key = 4).
4. A message like “Good Morning” written in reverse would instead be “Doog Gninrom”.
In the same way decode the sentence given below:
“Ot dnatsrednu taht scitamehtam nac eb decneirepxe erehwreve ni erutan dna laer efil.”

www.tntextbooks.in
5. Decode the given Pigpen Cipher text and compare your answer to get the Activity 3 result.
I. The room number in which the treasure took place:
1 A 2 B 3 C 10 J 11K 12 L
• • •
4 D 5 E 6 F 13M 14N 15O
II. Place of the treasure : • • •
7 G 8 H 9 I 16 P 17Q 18 R
• • •
19 S W
23
III. The name of the treasure : •
20 T U21 24 X Y 25
• •
22 V 26 Z
•
6. P
raveen recently got the registration number for his new two-wheeler. Here, the number
is given in the form of mirror-image. Encode the image and find the correct registration
number of praveen’s two-wheeler.
TN12H2589
(a) TN12H2589 (b) T N 1 2 H 2 5 8 9
(c) (d)
9852H21NT 9852H21NT

7. In questions (i) and (ii), there are four groups of letters in each set. Three of these sets are
alike in some way while one is different. Find the one which is different.
(i). (A) C R D T (B) A P B Q (C) E U F V (D) G W H X
(ii). (A) H K N Q (B) I L O R (C) J M P S (D) A D G J
8. A group of letters are given. A numerical code has been given to each letter. These letters
have to be unscrambled into a meaningful word. Find out the code for the word so formed
from the 4 answers given.
L I NCPE
1 2 3 4 56
(A) 2 3 4 1 5 6 (B) 5 6 3 4 2 1 (C) 6 1 3 5 2 4 (D) 4 2 1 3 5 6
9. Questions (iii) and (iv) are based on code language. Find the correct answer from the
four alternatives given.
(iii) In a certain code, ‘M E D I C I N E’ is coded as ‘E O J D J E F M’, then how is
‘C O M P U T E R’ written in the same code ?
(A)C N P R V U F Q (B) C M N Q T U D R
(C) R F U V Q N P C (D) R N V F T U D Q
(iv) If the word ‘P H O N E ’ is coded as ‘S K R Q H’, how will ‘R A D I O’ be coded ?
(A) S C G N H (B) V R G N G (C) U D G L R (D) S D H K Q

www.tntextbooks.in
7.8 Shopping Comparison

Students, I hope you all have an experience in shopping. can you share a few of your experiences?
I would like to raise some questions on your shopping experience. How will you shop the
things you need? By (i) attractive colour or (ii) best price or (iii) big in size or (iv) on seeing.
Whatever it may be, among all these things, one important point should be noted. What is
that? Yes, that is the expiry date. Have you ever noticed the expiry date on all the packed
goods? It is very important to see that and another way of shopping is to compare goods by
means of its price, quality, quantity, offers, discount and other considerable things.
Before spending your money to shop any item from a market or a departmental store,
consider the best prices, the best quality and other reliable things. This is what we call as wise
shopping.
Here, we will learn how to be a wise consumer before shopping a product from the
following situation.
Situation:
Imagine that the teacher maker you and your friend to be incharge of the fruit section
of your school canteen for a week. She also instructs the following steps and she can help you
when needed.
Shopping list
� Now you have to buy fruits for 2 days as per your the
1. 20 kg apples
shopping list.
2. 20 kg of guavas
� One of you should go to the market and the other should
3. 30 boxes of strawberries
go to the departmental store to know the cost of the fruits
before shopping. 4. 20 dozens of bananas
Estimate yourselves about which place will give you the

�
best deal.
After that,
� Check your shopping list to see how much fruits you
require.
� Compare the weight and price for each item from both
places.
� Select the best deal for all items in only one place .
� Discuss and compare the price list so that you decide where to buy the required list of
fruits.
For example, the collected model price list from both shops is given in the table below:
Departmental store Market price
S. No Fruit name
Quantity Price (`) Quantity Price (`)
1 Apple 1 kg 120 1 kg 110
2 Guava 1 kg 50 1 kg 40
3 Strawberry 1 box 80 1 box 85
4 Banana 1 dozen 60 1 kg 50

www.tntextbooks.in
Now, we will calculate the total price of the required and quantity of fruits from both the
departmental store and market.
Calculating the total price from the Departmental store:
Fruit Name Cost of the required fruits Total Price (`)
Apple Cost of 1 kg of apples = `120

2400
Cost of 20 kg of apples = 20 × 120 = `2400
Guava Cost of 1 kg guavas = `50

1000
Cost of 20 kg guavas = 20 × 50 = `1000
Cost of 1 box of strawberries = `80

Strawberry 2400
Cost of 30 boxes of strawberries = 30 × 80= `2400
Banana Cost of 1dozen of bananas = `60

1200
Cost of 20 kg of bananas = 20 × 60 = `1200
Calculating the total price from the Market Price:

Fruit Name Cost of the required fruits Total Price (`)
Apple Cost of 1 kg of apples = `110

2200
Cost of 20 kg of apples = 20 × 110 = `2200
Guava Cost of 1 kg of guavas = `40

800
Cost of 20 kg of guavas = 20 × 40 = `800
Cost of 1 box of strawberries = `85

Strawberry 2550
Cost of 30 boxes of strawberries = 30 × 85 = `2550
Banana Cost of 1 kg of bananas = `50

1000
Cost of 20 kg of bananas = 20 × 50 = `1000
Now, let us compare the shopping price of the Departmental store to that of the Market shop.
Cost of items as per your requirement (`)
Fruits
Departmental Store Market
20 kg of Apples 2400 2200
20 kg of Guavas 1000 800
30 boxes of Strawberries 2400 2550
20 dozens of Bananas 1200 1000
Total cost of shopping 7000 6550

www.tntextbooks.in
From the above comparison, we find that shopping made at the Market shop is the best
deal quantity wise as well as in price wise and hence it is wise to shop in the Market.
Activity
Consider that you are going to a store with your total budget of `220 to buy things
without changing the quantity of the items given in the list below with the following
conditions.
1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg
MRP `42 MRP `65 MRP `34 MRP `28
Rice Toor Dal Sugar

Wheat
OUR PRICE OUR PRICE
`37 `62 kg
OUR PRICE OUR PRICE
`32 `26
.50 .50
kg kg
.50
kg
Conditions:
(i) First you have to complete the price list given. Now, answer the following questions:
(ii) You have to buy three items as per the given 1. In how many ways can you buy your
price list but within your budget `220. items? Complete the price lists given
(iii) You won’t carry exceeding 5kg because you below. One is done for you.
have to walk home carrying them, so they 2. Which one is the best purchase price
cannot be bulky. list and why?
Price List Price List

Price / Quantity Price / Quantity
S.No. Description Amount (`)
1 kg (`) kg S.No. Description Amount (`)
1 kg (`) kg
1 Rice 37.50 2.50
1 Rice 37.50 2.50 93.75
2 Toor Dal 62.00 1.00
2 Toor Dal 62.00 1.00 62.00
3 Sugar 32.50 1.50
3 Wheat 26.50 1.00 26.50
4 Wheat 26.50 1.00
Total Bill Amount Total Bill Amount 182.25
Price List Price List Price List

Price / Price / Price /
S. Quantity Amount S. Quantity Amount S. Quantity Amount
Description 1 kg Description 1 kg Description 1 kg
No. kg (`) No. kg (`) No. kg (`)
(`) (`) (`)
Total Bill Amount Total Bill Amount Total Bill Amount

www.tntextbooks.in
7.8.1 Comparing containers of different size

Many times, items are packed in different sized of containers.
Sometimes, shoppers save money by selecting a larger container of the same item. For
�
example, 1 litre of milk often costs less than 5 units of 200ml pack of milk.
Sometimes, a store has two prices for the same item. One price is for buying a single item,
�
while the other price is for buying more than one of the same item. For example, groundnut
oil may cost `135 for 1 litre bottle and `240 for 2 litre bottles. In this case, if you buy two
1 litre bottles, you will pay more. Sometimes, buying in quantity also saves money.
Sometimes, the consumer may not be able to use up the larger size of an item before it
�
becomes stale or outdated. To find out which size container is the best to buy, you will need
to know the price of single pack of the contents.
Activity
Consider that you want to buy 12 litres of the same quality of edible oil at your
budget price of `250 per litre. In a supermarket, there are a lot of offers on various oil
brands. Some of the offers are given below. Complete the table and find which one is the
best offer for you and how much you will save for your total purchase.
Which one is the best deal?
Cost
Product Regular Special Saving Cost
Size of 1
(Edible Price Offer Price Price of 12
(in litres) litre
oil) (`) (`) (`) litres(`)
(`)
1 293 ` 50 off 243 243
1 l +1 l 351
2 850 499 249.50
combo (850-499)
Buy 5 l get
5+1 = 6 2000 1500 3000
1 l free
Buy 1 get
2+2 = 4 1486 743 185.75
1 free
Spl. offer
1+1= 2 850 1 l pack of 2 390 195
` 390
12 (1) = 1 l pack of
5100 1650 3450
12 12
Best offer price for you _________________

Amount that you saved for your total purchase _______________

www.tntextbooks.in
Try these
The teacher divides the class into four groups and sets up a mock market in the
class room and ask the students to involve in role play as two groups of businessmen
and two groups of consumers. Consumers have to buy products at different shops and
prepare a price list.
The two supermarkets in which the two groups can buy are Star Food Mart and
Super Provisions. This week they each have got a special deal on some products. At Star
Food Mart, you can buy items at discount prices. At Super Provisions, there are some
“BUY ONE GET ONE” deals. Have a look at their deal:
Star Food Mart
Chocolate Biscuits Peanut candies Protein milk Badam nuts

worth `114 per packet worth `90 now worth `60 now worth `450 now
at `30 off at `20 off at `20 off at `150 off
Super Provisions
Chocolate Biscuits Peanut candies Protein milk Badam nuts

worth `180 per packet worth `150 worth `80 worth `580
Buy one get one free Buy one get one free Buy one get one free Buy one get one free

www.tntextbooks.in
Now, answer the following questions.

I. Here is your shopping list:
(i) 4 bottles of Protein Milk (200 ml size) (ii) 2 packets of Peanut candies(200 gm)
(iii) 1 packet of Chocolate biscuits (iv) 1 packet of Badam nuts (500 gm)
(i) If you buy all the items in one shop, where will you get the best price?
(ii) If you buy the items from the two shops, how will you do it to spend the least
amount of money?
II. You have `1000/- to spend to buy the following shopping list:
(i) 6 bottles of Protein Milk (200 ml size) (ii) 3 packets of Peanut candies(200 gm)
(iii) 3 packets of Chocolate biscuits (iv) 1 packet of Badam nuts (250 gm).
(i) How can you do this so that you don’t go over your budget amount `1000?
(ii) Which shop offers you the best value for money on each item?
(iii) Is the “BUY ONE GET ONE” deal at Super Provisions the same as “50% off” deal?
7.9 Packing
When we are packing something in a box or a suitcase or a
cupboard, first we have to decide how we are going to pack. How
many items can be fitted into that fixed space? A good example of this
is, before you go to school, you try to pack everything you need (like
your books, notebooks, geometry box, sports equipment, food and
water bottle) into your school bag. At that time, you are very clear that
your books should not be damaged and you are able to carry everything yourself. Think! The
same rules apply to posting a package to a friend or family member or others.
Apart from these, the packaging methods are used in many cases such as cutting of sheets,
glass, paper, wood, cloth or other materials and room allotment, seating arrangement in the
particular space provided, parking vehicles with proper lanes and saving data in hard disk,
CD, pen drive and so on.
Using some of the packing methods from the following situations and examples, let us try to
understand how best to fit the items into the space in the containers or in rooms or in boxes etc.,
7.9.1 Packing Approaches - Fractional method
Here, when we fill items in bags or in containers, we determine the weight,
value and number of each item with the condition that the total weight of the
container is less than or equal to a given limit and the total value is as large as
possible. Fractional method uses the technique of buying things fractionally
and admits buying of more items within a given budget. Let us learn more
about this approach from the following situation.

www.tntextbooks.in
Situation 1:
Suppose that you want to buy some ` 60 / 1 kg ` 30 / 1kg ` 35 / 1kg
vegetables and fruits that are given
in the Fig. 7.20 with their weights
and price and that you have a bag
that capacity of carrying 15 kg. The
objective is to buy more items within
your budget of `550 and also that
weight should not exceed 15 kg.
You cannot buy all the items because
` 80 / 1 kg ` 30 / 1 kg ` 17.50 / 1kg ` 20 / 1 kg
if you calculate the total weight of all
Fig. 7.20
the items, then it would be greater
than 15 kg (maximum capacity of your bag is 15 kg). So, let us try some approaches, to find
how you can select more items so that you will buy them with maximum price within your
budget of `550. For that let us tabulate the items with their weights and price you want to buy.
Items
Weight (kg) 1 3 5 4 1 3 2
Price (`) 60 105 150 70 80 90 40
Approach I - Selecting items with Maximum Price

In this approach, we select the items according to the maximum price. Here the maximum
price in the table is `150/-. Now, let us tabulate to find the total price and how much can we
buy vegetables and fruits within our budget and not exceeding 15kg.
Remaining weight to
Items Weight (kg) Price (`)
buy
5 15−5=10 150.00
3 10−3=7 105.00

www.tntextbooks.in
3 7−3=4 90.00
1 4−1=3 80.00
3 3−3=0 70 × 3 = 52.50
4
Total price 15 kg 472.50
Here, 3 kg of papaya is enough as the total weight reaches 15 kg. So, 3 kg of papaya costs
`52.50. Hence, in this approach we will spend maximum `472.50 to buy 15 kg of vegetables
and fruits.
Approach II - Selecting items with Minimum Weight
In this approach, we select the items according to the minimum weight. Here, we can
select more and more items. Now, let us tabulate to find the total price and how much can we
buy vegetables and fruits within our budget and not exceeding 15kg.
Items Weight(kg) Remaining weight to buy Price (`)
1 15−1=14 60.00
1 14−1=13 80.00
2 13−2=11 40.00
3 11−3=8 105.00
3 8−3=5 90.00

www.tntextbooks.in
4 5−4=1 70.00
1 1−1=0 150 × 1 =30.00

5
Here, 1 kg of Sapotta is enough to complete 15 kg with minimum price of `30 per kg.
Hence in this approach, we will spend maximum `475 to buy 15 kg of vegetables and fruits.
Approach III - Finding the Maximum price to Weight Ratio.

In this approach, we select the items according to the maximum price to weight ratio
(find the rate of 1kg). Now, let us tabulate to find the total price and how much we can buy
vegetables and fruits within our budget and not exceeding 15 kg.
Items Weight (kg) Price of 1kg Remaining weight to buy Price (`)
1 80.00 15−1=14 80.00
1 60.00 14−1=13 60.00
3 35.00 13−3=10 105.00
5 30.00 10−5=5 150.00
3 30.00 5−3=2 90.00
2 20.00 3−2=0 40.00
In this approach, we can buy all vegetables and fruits except papaya as we need with
maximum price within our budget and not exceeding 15 kg. Comparatively, in the II approach
we can buy more items but spend minimum amount only. So, we can say third approach is best
one. Isn’t it?

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 7.4
1. Find the best buy of the following purchases:
(i) A pack of 5 chocolate bars for `175 or 3 chocolate bars for `114?
(ii) Basker buy 1½ dozen of eggs for `81 and Aruna buy 15 eggs for `64.50?
2. Using the given picture find the total special offer price of fresh sweets and bakery products
to buy ½ kg laddu, 1 kg cake, 6 pockets of bread.
Fresh sweets and Bakery Products 20

OFF
%
Laddu Chocolate Healthy

(1 kg) Cake (1 kg) Sliced Bread
`245 `550 `20
3. Using the given picture prepare a price list.

Suppose you plan to buy 1½ kg of apple, 2 kg of pomegranate, 2 kg of banana, 3 kg of mango,
½ kg of papaya, 3 kg of onion, 1½ kg of tomato, and 1 kg of carrot in shop 1, how much will
you save compared to shop 2.
Shop 1 Shop 2
Freshly Picked Fruits and Vegetables Farm fresh Fruits and Vegetables
Flat 15% offer on all items Apple
Apple Simla (1 kg)
Simla (1 kg) `168
`168 `148
`22
Carrot `19 Tomato `45 Onion
38 `21
Carrot
(1 kg) `19
Tomato
(1 kg) ` 46 Onion
(1 kg) `22 (1 kg) `17 (1 kg) ` (1 kg)
Mango `39 Pomegranate Banana `45

Mango
39 Pomegranate Banana
(1 kg) ` 45 35
Langda (1 kg) ` (1 kg) `82 (1 kg)
`43
Langda (1 kg) ` (1 kg) `82 `75
`36
Papaya Papaya `36
Broccoli Broccoli `45
(1 kg) Potato
`21 (250 g) ` 45 (1 kg) ` 30 Potato `21
(250 g) ` 37
(1 kg) (1 kg) ` 18

www.tntextbooks.in
4. You want to buy some grocery items as per your shopping

Shopping list
list that are given in the picture with their price. Also you
1. 2 kg of red chilli
have a bag that capacity of carrying 7 kg. Using weight ratio 2. 2 kg of coriander
approach tabulate to find the total price and how much can 3. 1 kg of garlic
you buy more grocery items within your budget of `1000 4. 1 kg of tamarind
and not exceeding 7 kg. 5. 2 kg of toor dal
Red chilli Coriander Garlic Tamarind Toor dal
`145/1 kg. `130/1 kg. `82/1 kg. `99/1 kg. `78/1 kg.

5. Online or television advertisements influence people on spending decisions by
(a) using special music (c) using attractive pictures
(b) making them think that they need the item (d) all the above
6. When I go shopping, I will buy

(a) something that looks attractive (c) something that I need to purchase
(b) something my friend has (d) the first thing I see in the store
7. The best shopping choice is to

(a) shop at brand name stores always buy (c) the same thing my friends bought
(b) compare the choices before buying (d) buy at a regular shop always

www.tntextbooks.in
ANSWERS
1. NUMBERS
Exercise 1.1
(ii) –3.75 30 −29

1. (i) –4 and –3 (iii) 0 (iv) ( v)
−48 39
2.(i) False (ii) True (iii) False (iv) True (v) True
11 −2 7 5 4 9 10 11
3. (i) − (ii) (iii) 4. Y ,N ,A ,T ,I
3 5 4 3 3 4 4 4
5. 9
4
(i)
–1 0 1 2 3
(ii) −8
3
–3 –2 –1 0 1
(iii) −17 17
=
−5 5
–1 0 1 2 3 4
(iv) 15
−4
–4 –3 –2 –1 0 1
6. (i) 0.0909... (ii) 3.25 (iii) –2.5714285714 (iv) 1.4 (v) –3.5

−19 −18 −7 −6 −5 −1 3 −3 −1 1 2 5
7. ((i)
i ) − 2, 0 → , , , , ((ii)
ii ) , → , , 0, , ,
10 10 10 10 10 2 5 10 10 10 10 10
26 27 30 32 33 −21 −20 −15 −14 −13
(iii)
(iii ) 0.25, 0.35 → , , , , ((iv)
iv) − 1.2, − 2.3 → , , , ,
100 100 100 100 100 10 10 10 10 10
Answers 273
8th_Maths_English Medium_Answer.indd 273 23/11/2022 15:53:00

www.tntextbooks.in
61 103 −11 −21 3 −1 2 4

8. and , many answers possible 169.. ((i)
i) > (ii)
(ii ) < (iii)
(iii ) <
15 30 5 8 −4 2 3 5
−11 −15 −5 12 −7 −7 12 −5 −15 −11
10. (i) Ascending Order: , , , , Descending Order: , , , ,
8 24 12 36 −9 −9 36 12 24 8
−17 −7 −19 −2 −2 −19 −7 −17
(ii) Ascending Order: , , , , 0 Descending Order: 0, , , ,
10 5 20 4 4 20 5 10
−142 16 −8 −17
11. (B) 12. (B) , 13.
20(C)
.(C ) − 1 and − 2 14. (A) 15. (C) 6
99 −30 15 24
Exercise 1.2
1
1. (i) (ii) 1 (iii) 1 (iv) 0 (v) –1
20
2. (i) True (ii) False (iii) False (iv) True (v) False
74 4 3 −15 −1 8
3. (i) 2 (ii) (iii) (iv) 2 114.
. 5. (i) ((ii)
ii )
35 15 4 11 4 45
1 7
136.
. ((i)
i) − 6 ((ii)
ii ) (iii)
(iii ) 5 7. (i) –7 (ii)
13 11
23 1 133 −5
8. 11 and hence lies between 11 and 12. 9. (i) (ii) 10. 120
2 2 60 2
5 2 15
11. (A) 1 12. (C) 13. (B) 14. (D) 15. (D) all of these
8 3 16
Exercise 1.3
Verify yourself for Qns 1 to 6.
1 1
7. (C) 0 8. (D) associative 9. (A) − = 0 10. (B) subtraction
8 8
Exercise 1.4
1. (i) 9 (ii) 48 (iii) 5 (iv) 3 (v) 13, 14
2. (i) True (ii) True (iii) False (iv) False (v) True
3. (i) 289 (ii) 41209 (iii) 1205604 4. (i) No (ii) No (iii) Yes (iv) Yes
5. (i) 12 (ii) 16 (iii) 28 (iv) 34 (v) 69 (vi) 95
6. (i) 42 (ii) 83 (iii) 105 (iv) 134 (v) 647 7. (i) 21 (ii) 28 (iii) 32
12 5
8. (i) 1.7 (ii) 8.2 (iii) 1.42 (iv) (v) 2 9. 105, 81 10. 2, 60
15 7
11. (A) 9 12. (D) 72 13. (C) 7 14. (D) 32 15. (B) 5
Exercise 1.5
1. (i) 7 (ii) 6 (iii) 42 (iv) 30 (v) 0.017
2. (i) True (ii) True (iii) False (iv) True (v) True 4. 5 5. 5 6. 120
7. 9,19 8. 36 = 6 9. 3 = 1.732 10. 4,16
Exercise 1.6
−1
1. (i) 1 (ii) 1 (iii) 20 −3 (iv) (v) –243
128

www.tntextbooks.in
2. (i) True (ii) False (iii) False (iv) True (v) False

− 216
3. (i) 1 (ii) 32 (iii) (iv) 16 (v) 6
8 125
64 4 21
4. (i) (ii) (iii) 1024 5. (i) (ii) 5 (iii) 1
15625 5 2
3
6. (i) 1 (ii) (iii) 72 7. (i) x = 5 (ii) x = 6
2
8. (i) 6 × 103 + 5 × 101 + 4 × 100 + 3 × 10‒1 + 2 × 10‒2 + 1 × 10-3
(ii) 8 × 102 + 9 × 101 + 7 × 100 + 1 × 10‒1 + 4 × 10‒2
9. (i) 87652.0407 (ii) 5050.505 (iii) 0.000000000025
10. (i) 4.678 × 1011 (ii) 1.972 × 10‒6 (iii) 1.642398 ×103
(iv) 1.083 ×1012 cu. km (v) 1.6 ×10‒24
2
−2 −1  1
11. (B) 12. (A) 13. (D) −   = 16 −1 14. (C) 6 15. (D) 2.02 ×10−10
5 32  4
Exercise 1.7
2
1. 4 kg 300 gm 62.. 10 litre 3. both are correct 4. 6 m 5. 552 cm2
5
6. 9 cm and 10 cm 7. 15 decimetre 8. 625 9. 8
10. (i) 4.8 × 103 (ii) 1.152 × 105 (iii) 4.2048 × 107 (iv) 4.2048 × 109
9 12
11. 900 km 13. 320 gm 14.
7. 15.
8. x = 3 16.
10. 17. No, 64
20 11
18. 58.85 19. 7.979 × 105 20. 8100, 2600, 3500, 4400, 1625
2. MEASUREMENTS
Exercise 2.1
1. (i) p (ii) chord (iii) diameter (iv) 12 cm (v) circular arc
2. (i) c (ii) d (iii) e (iv) b (v) a
3.
q° q° q°
Sectors q°
Central angle of each sector (qϒ) 180° 72° 45° 36°

4. Length of arc (approx.) Area of sector (approx.) Perimeter of sector (approx.)
(i) 12.56 cm 100.48 cm2 44.56 cm
(ii) 13.19 cm 41.54 cm 2
25.79 cm
5. (i) 240 m2 (ii) 337.5 cm2 6. (i) q = 120° (ii) q 72 7.
(i) 30p m
2
(ii8.
) 980 p cm 9. 706.5 cm (approximately) 10. 1232 cm (approximately)
2 2
Answers 275

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 2.2
1. (i) 38 m, 50.75 m2 (approximately) (ii) 30 cm,40.25 cm2 (approximately)
2. (i) 21.5 cm2 (approximately) (ii) 27.93 cm2 (approximately)
3. 48 cm2 4. 41.13 cm2 (approximately) 5. 5600 cm2 6. 3500 cm2 7. 244 m2
Exercise 2.3
1. (i) length, breadth and height (ii) Vertex (iii) Six (iv) Circle (v) Cube
2. (i) (b) (ii) (a) (iii) (d) (iv) (c)
3. (i) Cube (ii) Cuboid (iii) Triangular Prism (iv) Square Pyramid (v) Cylinder
4. (i) F, T, S (ii) T, S, F (iii) S, F, T
5. (i) Yes (ii) No (iii) Yes (iv) No (v) Yes
Exercise 2.4
1. 9.42 feet 2. 314 m 3. 128 cm2
4. (i)
Top View Front View Side View (ii) Top View Front View Side View
5. double door requires the minimum area 6. 63.48 m2 (approximately)
7. 1.46 cm2 (approximately) 8. (i) F = 10 (ii) V = 4 (iii) E= 28
3. ALGEBRA
Exercise 3.1
1. x 2x2 −2xy x4 y3 2xyz −5 xz 2
x4 2 x6 −2 x5 y x8 y 3 2 x5 yz −5 x5 z 2
4xy 8 x3 y −8 x 2 y 2 4 x5 y 4 8x2 y 2 z −20 x 2 yz 2
−x 2 y −2 x 4 y 2 x3 y 2 −x 6 y 3 −2 x3 y 2 z 5 x3 yz 2
2 y2 z 4x2 y 2 z −4 xy 3 z 2 x4 y5 z 4 xy 3 z 2 −10 xy 2 z 3
−3xyz −6 x3 yz 6x2 y 2 z −3 x5 y 4 z −6 x 2 y 2 z 2 15 x 2 yz 3
−7z −14 x 2 z 14xyz −7 x 4 y 3 z −14 xyz 2 35 xz 3
2.
3. (i ) 24m 4 n 2 (ii ) − 9 x 5 y 6 3. 4. − 24 p 6 q 6
4.
5. (i ) 10 xy − 15 x (ii ) − 10 p 3 + 6 p 2 − 14 p (iii ) 3m 4 n 4 − 15m3 n 2 + 21m 2 n3
(iv) x 3 + y 3 − z 3 + x 2 y + x 2 z + xy 2 + zy 2 + xz 2 − yz 2 5.
6. (i ) 4 x 2 − 2 x − 12
(ii ) 2 y 4 + 3 y 3 − 8 y 2 − 12 y (iii ) 5m 4 n 2 m 2 n 2 5m 2 n3 n3 (iv) 6 x 2 36 x 30
76.. (i ) − 2 x 2 ii ) − 3mp iii ) 2 y (5 x 2 y − x + 3 y 2 )7. (C) iv, v, ii, iii, i 8.
9. xy + 2 x + 30 y + 60
9. (B) 28p7 10. (D) mn2, –27 11.
12. (C)
(c) 6 x y 2
12. (A) 6 mn 13. (B) (a+b)
Exercise 3.2
18m 4 (n8 ) l 4 m5 n ( 7 ) l 3 m 2 n 42a 4b5 (c 2 )
1. (i ) = 9 mn 5
(ii ) = (iii ) = (7)b3c 2
2m ( 3) n 3 2lm( 3) n6 2 6(a ) 4 (b) 2
2. (i) True (ii) False 3. (i ) 9 y 2 (ii ) xy (iii ) − 3 x 2 y z 3 (iv) x y

www.tntextbooks.in
1 5
4. (i ) 5m (ii ) 3 p 3q 2 5. (i )16 y − 4 z (ii ) 2mn 2 + 8m3 n − (iii ) y 3 xy 2 1
2 6
(iv) = 9 p 2 r + 18 pq − 45
76.. (i ) 9 y 2 (ii ) 9 xy (iii ) 4m 2 − 3m (iv)16 n 2 − 2n + 3 (v) x 2 + 1x − 6 (vi) –(3p2 –4p + 7)
7. (ii) A is true but B is false 8. (i) both A and B are true
Exercise 3.3
1. (i ) 9m + 30m + 25 (ii ) 25 p − 10 p + 1 (iii ) 4n 2 + 4n − 3 (iv) (2 p + 5q )(2 p − 5q )
2 2
2. (i ) m3 + 9m 2 + 27 m + 27 (ii ) 8a 3 + 60a 2 + 150a + 125 (iii ) 27 p 3 + 108 p 2 q + 144 pq 2 + 64q 3

(iv) 14,0608 (v) 1124864
3. (i ) 125 − 75 x + 15 x 2 − x3 (ii ) 8 x 3 − 48 x 2 y + 96 xy 2 − 64 y 3 (iii ) a 3b3 − 3a 2b 2 c + 3abc3 − c3
(iv) 110, 592 (v) 912673 x3 y 3
(4ii.) (ip)3125
− 5 yp32 ++150
2p +y 28+ 55 y + 6 5. x3 + 3 x 2 + 3 x + 1 6. x3 − 2 x 2 − 5 x + 6
7. (C) 2 8. (B) a2 + ab + b2 9. (A) p3 + q3 10. (D) 72 11. (D) 3ab(a+b)
Exercise 3.4
1. (i ) 6 y (3 x − 2 z ) (ii ) 3 x 2 y (3 x 3 y 2 + 2 xy − 6) (iii ) (b − 2c )( x + y )
(iv) ( x + y )(a + b) (v) (4 x − 1)(2 x 2 − 1) (vi ) ( x − 2)[3 y ( x − 2) + 2]
(vii ) 2 y (9 x − 2 y − zx) (viii) (a − 3) (a 2 + 1) (ix) 3 y( y + 4)( y − 4) (x) (b − 1)(ab − c 2 )
2. (i ) ( x + 7) 2 (ii ) ( y − 5) 2 (iii ) (c + 2)(c − 6)
(iv) (m + 9)(m − 8) (v) (2 x − 3)(2 x − 1) 3. (i) (4 x + 3)3 (ii) (3 p + 2q )3
4. (i) ( y − 6)3 (ii) (2m − 5n)3 5. (D) 3x, (3x+2y)
6. (C) (2+m)(2–m)
7. (D) x –x–20 8. (B) 3 9. (C) (1–m)(1+m+m ) 10. (B) (x+y)
2 2
Exercise 3.5
7 3 4
1. 7 x 2 y 5 + 4 x 4 y 3 + 60 x 2 y 2 2.12 x 3 − 8 x 2 + 27 x − 18 3. S .I = ab
1 5
4. a + 2b + 4 5. ( y − 3)(7 y + 2)
2
1. 4 x + 3 7.
6. 2. x + 2 8.
3. ( y + 7)( y + 8) 9.
4. (4 p 2 + 1)(2 p + 1)(2 p − 1) 10. 3( x − 5 y )3
Exercise 3.6
1. (i) x = 7 (ii) y = 11 (iii) m = 7 (iv) p = 15 (v) One
2. (i) True (ii) False 3. (c) (iii),(i), (iv), (v), (ii)
4. (i) x = 11 (ii) y = 1 (iii) x = −1 5. (i) x = −4 (ii) p = −1 (iii) x = −11
−4
6. (i) x = −2 (ii) m = −4
Exercise 3.7
b
1. (i). x = − (ii) Positive (iii) x = 30 (iv) 40° (v) b=9
a
2. (i) True (ii) False (iii) False 3. 3, 21 4. 27
5. l = 8 cm, 7. Murali’s is 15 years old, 9. 13
6. (80,10) notes 8. 63
b = 24 cm Thenmozhi’s age is 20 years old 21
10. 37.4km 11. (B) 20 12. (A) 62° 13. (C) 10000 14. (C) 4 15. (D) (x–1)
Answers 277

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 3.8
1. (i) Origin (0,0) (ii) negative (iii) y-axis (iv) zero (v) X-Coordinate
2. (i) True (ii) True (iii) False
Exercise 3.9
1. (i) Origin (ii) (4,-4) (iii) x-axis 1cm=3 units, y-axis 1cm=25 units
2. (i) True (ii) False
Exercise 3.10
1. x = 20 2. 60°, 40°, 80° 3. y = 11 units p=133 units 4. 116°,64°
6. 7,8,9 7. 54 8. 12 pencils
4. LIFE MATHEMATICS
Exercise 4.1
1
1. (i) x = 500 (ii) 3 % (iii) x = 50 (iv) 70% (v) 52.52%
3 2
2. (i) 50% (ii) 75% (iii) 100% (iv) 96% (v) 66 %
1 3
3. x = 150 4. 30 5. 33 % 6. 110 7. x = 200 8. x = 100 9. No change
3
10. 87% 11. (C) 20% 12. (B) 49% 13. (A) 375 14. (D) 200 15. (D) 36
Exercise 4.2
1. (i) Cost price (ii) ₹7000 (iii) ₹600 (iv) 8% (v) ₹945
1
2. ₹902 3. ₹670 4. 50% 5. 11 % 6. ₹1152
9
7. (i) x = ₹207 (ii) y = ₹12600 (iii) z = 18% 8. ₹2836
9. Discount of 8% is better 10. ₹5400
11. (C) 25% 12. (B) 550 13. (B) 168 14. (D) ₹250 15. (A) 40%
Exercise 4.3
 4n
1. (i) ₹1272 (ii) ₹820 (iii) ₹20,000 (iv) A = P 1 + r  (v) ₹32
 400 
2. (i) True (ii) False (iii) True (iv) False (v) True
1
3. ₹162 4. ₹936.80 5. ₹1875 6. 1 years 7. ₹10,875 8. ₹0.50
2
9. 5% 10. ₹ 16000 11. (C) 6 12. (B) 1 year 13. (B) ₹ 12500
14. (A) ₹2000 15. (D) ₹2500
Exercise 4.4
1. (i) 2 (ii) 5 (iii) 8 (iv) 25 (v) ₹1,20,000 2. 162 men
1
3. 7000 cement bags 4. 7 days 5. 4 more lorries 6. 4 hours
2
7. A- 30 days, B -20 days, C-60 days 8. 180 minutes 9. 16 days 10. 6 days

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 4.5
2
1. 400 2. 300 3. `38163 4. 20% 5. 2 % loss 6. 48 men 7. 6 days 8. 8 days
9
8
9. 10. `15000 11. 20 % 12. 30 % 13. 20 more men 14. 3 days 15. ` 6000
25
5. GEOMETRY
Exercise 5.1
1. (i) in proportion (ii) shape (iii) equal (iv) congruent (v) similar
6. Yes, RHS Congruence 38..= HE 18= , TE 16 9. ∠T = ∠N = 75°, ∠E = ∠B = 35°, ∠A = ∠U = 70°
11. (D) matching 12. (A) Q Y 13. (D) 93 m 14. (A) 50 15. (C) AC = CD
Exercise 5.2
1. (i) Q (ii) n − m (iii) a right angled triangle
2 2
(iv) centroid (v) 2:1
2. (i) True (ii) True (iii) True (iv) True (v) False
3. (i) Yes (ii) No (iii) Yes (iv) Yes (v) Yes
4 (i) x = 41 (ii) y = 16 (iii) z = 15 5. 5cm 6. 170m
7. 10cm 8. W 9. P 10. 9cm 11. 40°
12. (c) 45° 13. (b) 20cm 14. (c) 420cm2 15.(d) 20, 48, 52
Exercise 5.3
3. 48 ft 4. 25 ft 5. No, the wide of cabinet is lesser than the wide of TV
8. 40cm 9. 28 ft 10. (i) 22 (ii) 6 (iii) 16 (iv) 24
Exercise 5.4
1. (i) Orthocentre (ii) Centroid (iii) Incentre (iv) Circumcentre (v) 2:1
2. (i) True (ii) True (iii) false
3. (a) (i) Interior (ii) Exterior (iii) On the hypotenuse
(b) (i) Interior (ii) Exterior (iii) On the vertices containing 90°
4. (i) BE (ii) AD (iii) CF
5. AB=5cm 6. XYM= ZYM= 50° 7. 7 cm 8. 10 cm
Exercise 5.5
1. W 2. P 3. 9cm 4. 12 feet 5. 40°
6. (i) 22 (ii) 6 (iii) 16 (iv) 24
6. STATISTICS
Exercise 6.1
1. (i) Secondary (ii) 35 (iii)197 (iv) 8 (v) Circular
2. (i) False (ii) True (iii) True (iv) True
5. (i) 20% (ii) 75 (iii) 1/4 (iv) 400 (v) 275 (vi) 500
8. (i) ₹8000 (ii) ₹40000 (iii) ₹12000
Answers 279

www.tntextbooks.in
Exercise 6.2
1. (i) Yes (ii) No (iii) No (iv) Yes (v) Yes
2. (i) Proportional (ii) Histogram (iii) Grouped
3. (i) 330 (ii) 150 (iii) No
9. (d) all the three 10. (c) Frequency 11. (a) range 12. (b) grouped
13. (b) discontinuous 14. (b) Exclusive 15. (c) pie chart 16. (a) continuous
17. (a) frequency polygon 18. (d) histogram
7. INFORMATION PROCESSING
Exercise 7.1
1. 5 2. 9 3. 8 4. 6 5. 4995 6. 10000 7. 15 8. 20
9. (i) 10. (i) (ii)
more possible ways more possible ways

11. (A) 41 12. (B) 8 13. (C) 12 14. (C) 19
Exercise 7.2
1. (i) 13 (ii) 8 (iii) 5 (iv) 46
2. (i) 14 (ii) 4 (iii) 140 (iv) 6
3. (i) 4 (ii) 5 4. 14 5. 28
6. (C) 89 7) (B) F(8) = F(7)+F(6) 8. (A) 2 9. (C) 6th 10) (D) 987
11. (A) 2×5 12. (B) 2×3 13. (D) 1
Exercise 7.3
1. (i) TAMIL (ii) ENGLISH (iii) MATHEMATICS
(iv) SCIENCE (v) SOCIAL SCIENCE
2 (i) c (ii) d (iii) a (iv) e (v) b
Plain Text A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Cipher Text 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 00 01 02 03
3.
4. To understand that mathematics can be experienced everywhere in nature and real life.
5. (i) 28 (ii) CHAIR (iii) GIFT VOUCHER
6. (c) [9 8 5 2 H 2 1 N T] 7. (i) (a) C R D T (ii) (d) A D G J
8. (ii) 5 6 3 4 2 1 9. (i) (c) R F U Q N P C (ii) (c) U D G L R
Exercise 7.4
1. (i) 5 Chocolate bars for ` 175b (ii) 15 eggs for ` 64.50
2. ` 634 3. ` 39.25 4. ` 809 5. (d) all the above
6. (c) something that I need to purchase
7. (b) Compare the choices before buying

www.tntextbooks.in
Mathematical Terms
Algebraic expression இயற்கணிதக் க�ோவை Laws of exponent அடுக்கு விதிகள்
Altitude குத்துக்கோடு ஒருபடிச் சமன்பாடு/
Linear equation நேரியச் சமன்பாடு
Angle bisector க�ோண இருசமவெட்டி
Associative property சேர்ப்புப் பண்பு Logical தருக்கரீதியான
Binomial ஈருறுப்புக் க�ோவை Loss நட்டம்
Central angle மையக்கோணம் Lower limit கீழ் எல்லை
Centroid நடுக்கோட்டு மையம் Marked price குறித்த விலை
மத்திய சரக்கு மற்றும் Median நடுக்கோடு
CGST சேவை வரி ஓருறுப்புக் க�ோவை
Monomial
Circular arc வட்ட வில் Ordered pair வரிசை ச�ோடி
Circular sector வட்டக்கோணப் பகுதி Origin ஆதிப்புள்ளி
Circular segment வட்டத்துண்டு Orthocentre செங்கோட்டு மையம்
Circumcentre சுற்றுவட்ட மையம் Overhead expenses இதரச் செலவுகள்
Class interval பிரிவு இடைவெளி Packing அடைத்தல்
Closure property அடைவுப் பண்பு Parallel lines இணைக்கோடுகள்
Co-ordinate axes ஆய அச்சுகள் Parallelogram இணைகரம்
Code குறியீடு Perfect cube numbers முழு கன எண்கள்
Coincide ஒருங்கமைவு Perfect square முழு வர்க்கம்
Commutative property பரிமாற்றுப் பண்பு Perpendicular bisector மையக்குத்துக்கோடு
Compound interest கூட்டு வட்டி Pie chart வட்ட விளக்கப்படம்
Compound variation கலப்பு மாறல் Point of concurrency ஒருங்கமைப் புள்ளி
Congruent சர்வசமம் Polyhedron பன்முக வடிவம்
Conversion period மாற்று காலம் Polynomial பல்லுறுப்புக் க�ோவை
Corresponding sides ஒத்தப் பக்கங்கள் Primary data முதல்நிலைத் தரவு
Cost price அடக்க / வாங்கிய விலை Prime factorisation பகாக் காரணிப்படுத்துதல்
Cryptology குறியாக்கவியல் Principal அசல்
Cube root கனமூலம் Profit இலாபம்
Cubic identities கன முற்றொருமைகள் Quadrant கால்பகுதி
ஒரு புள்ளி வழிச் செல்லும் Range வீச்சு
Concurrent lines க�ோடுகள் Rational number விகிதமுறு எண்
Data தரவு Real number line மெய்யெண் க�ோடு
Deposit முதலீடு Regular polygon ஒழுங்குப் பலக�ோணம்
Depreciation value தேய்மான மதிப்பு Scientific notation அறிவியல் குறியீடு
Direct proportion நேர் விகிதம் Secondary data இரண்டாம் நிலைத் தரவு
Discount தள்ளுபடி Selling price விற்ற / விற்பனை விலை
Distributive property பங்கீட்டுப் பண்பு மாநில சரக்கு மற்றும்
விளிம்புகள்
SGST சேவை வரி
Edges
Encryption குறியாக்கம் Side view பக்கவாட்டுத்தோற்றம்
Estimate உத்தேச மதிப்பு Simple interest தனி வட்டி
Extremes கடை உறுப்புகள் Solid shapes திண்ம வடிவங்கள்
Frequency distribution நிகழ்வெண் பரவல் Square root வர்க்கமூலம்
Frequency polygon நிகழ்வு பலக�ோணம் மிகை நிரப்புக்
Supplementary angles க�ோணங்கள்
Front view முகப்புத்தோற்றம்
Graph sheet வரைபடத்தாள் Tally marks நேர்கோட்டுக் குறிகள்
Grouped data த�ொகுக்கப்பட்ட தரவு Terminating முடிவுறு
Histogram நிகழ்வு செவ்வகம் Three dimensional
முப்பரிமாண வடிவங்கள்
Hypotenuse கர்ணம் shapes
Identity சமனி Top view மேற்பக்கத் த�ோற்றம்
Incentre உள்வட்ட மையம் Transposition இடமாற்று முறை
Interest வட்டி Trinomial மூவுறுப்புக் க�ோவை
Inverse நேர்மாறு Upper limit மேல் எல்லை
Inverse proportion எதிர் விகிதம் Vertically opposite குத்தெதிர்
Irregular polygon ஒழுங்கற்ற பலக�ோணம் Vertices உச்சிகள்
Mathematical Terms 281

www.tntextbooks.in
Mathematics - Class 8
Text Book Development Team
Reviewers Academic Advisor
Dr. R. Ramanujam Dr. P. Kumar
Professor, Joint Director (Syllabus),
Institute of Mathematical Science, SCERT, Chennai.
Chennai.
Academic Co-ordinator
R. Athmaraman V. Ilayarani Mohan
Educational Consultant, Assistant Professor,
Association of Mathematics Teachers of India, SCERT, Chennai.
Chennai.
Art and Design Team
Content Writers
Layout and Illustration
G. Kamalanathan
B. Yogesh, C. Prasanth, A. Adison
B.T. Assistant,
GHSS, Arpakkam, R. Mathan Raj, Sridhar Velu
Kancheepuram. In-House QC
K. Gunasekar P. Arun Kamaraj
B.T. Assistant, Wrapper Design
PUMS, Vallavanur West, Kathir Aarumugam
Koliyanur Block,
Villupuram. Layout Co-ordinator
Ramesh Munisamy
G.Palani
B.T. Assistant,
GHS, Jagadab,
EMIS Technology Team
Krishnagiri. R.M. Satheesh, State Coordinator Technical,
TN EMIS, Samagra Shiksha.
P. Malarvizhi K.P. Sathya Narayana, IT Consultant,
B.T. Assistant, TN EMIS, Samagra Shiksha.
Chennai High School,
R. Arun Maruthi Selvan,
Strahans Road, Pattalam, Chennai.
Technical Project Consultant,
TN EMIS, Samagra Shiksha.
ICT Coordinator
D. Vasuraj
P.G. Assistant, KRM Public School,
This book has been printed on 80 GSM
Sembiyam, Chennai.
Elegant Maplitho paper
Printed by offset at :
Typist
K. Punitha
Triplicane, Chennai.

8th Maths EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

8th Maths EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8th Maths EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.tntextbooks.

GOVERNMENT OF TAMIL NADU

A publication under Free Textbook Programme of Government of Tamil Nadu

Department of School Education

Untouchability is Inhuman and a Crime

00_8th_Front Pages_FM.indd 1 20/11/2022 12:43:18

Government of Tamil Nadu

First Edition - 2019

NOT FOR SALE

State Council of Educational

Printing & Publishing

Tamil Nadu Textbook and Educational

00_8th_Front Pages_FM.indd 2 20/11/2022 12:43:20

Mathematics is a unique symbolic language in which the whole world

Mathematics is not about numbers, equations, computations

Do you know? A li v e Think

The main goal of Mathematics in School Education is to mathematise

00_8th_Front Pages_FM.indd 3 20/11/2022 12:43:21

UNIT TITLE PAGE NO. MONTH

8th_Maths_English Medium_Front Matter.indd 4 03-12-2022 15:15:50

00_8th_Front Pages_FM.indd 5 20/11/2022 12:43:21

00_8th_Front Pages_FM.indd 6 20/11/2022 12:43:21

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 1 20/11/2022 12:46:34

MATHEMATICS ALIVE - NUMBERS IN REAL LIFE

1.2 Rational Numbers

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 2 20/11/2022 12:46:34

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 3 20/11/2022 12:46:38

1.2.1 Rational numbers on a number line

4 8th Standard Mathematics

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 4 20/11/2022 12:46:39

Write the decimal forms of the following rational numbers:

1.2.3 Positive and Negative rational numbers

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 5 20/11/2022 12:46:42

1.2.4 Equivalent rational numbers

The collection of rational numbers is denoted by the letter

because it is formed by considering all quotients, except General

6 8th Standard Mathematics

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 6 20/11/2022 12:46:43

1.2.6 Comparison of rational numbers

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 7 20/11/2022 12:46:50

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 8 20/11/2022 12:46:51

Visualizing these numbers on the number line, we see that

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 9 20/11/2022 12:46:54

Method of Equivalent rational numbers:

10 8th Standard Mathematics

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 10 20/11/2022 12:46:57

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 11 20/11/2022 12:47:04

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 12 20/11/2022 12:47:06

2. Say True or False:

(i) 9 -8 9(ii)-- 1798 15 9 817 --

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 13 20/11/2022 12:47:09

Objective Type Questions

1.3 Basic Arithmetic Operations on Rational Numbers

14 8th Standard Mathematics

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 14 20/11/2022 12:47:12

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 15 20/11/2022 12:47:15

1.4 Word Problems on the basic operations

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 16 20/11/2022 12:47:19

01_8th_Maths_Numbers_Chap 1.indd 17 20/11/2022 12:47:22

144 = ? 9 × 16 = × = Is 144 = 9 × 16 ? 144 = ? 36 × 4 = × = Is 144 = 36 × 4 ?

100 = ? 25 × 4 = × = Is 100 = 25 × 4 ? 1225 = ? 25 × 49 = × = Is 1225 = 25 × 49 ?

8. The sum of the cubes of first n natural 13 23 33 ..... n3 (1 2 3 ..... n)2

example, we write 52 for 25 and 53 for 125.